JP7785346B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In pachinko gaming machines, a type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, provided that a gaming ball enters the starting slot. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol's variable display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed (see Patent Document 1).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 can enter a time-saving gaming state (a gaming state advantageous to the player) in which it is easier for gaming balls to enter the variable start opening that can be opened and closed than in a non-time-saving gaming state.

JP 2018-88993 A

However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to create advantageous gaming conditions for players, as described in Patent Document 1 above, in order to increase gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
a game control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a winning ticket has been won based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The game control means
If the result of the lottery is a win, a special game is executed;
After the special game ends, the player can transition to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.
If the result of the lottery is a specific win by the game control means, after the special game ends, the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state and the execution of the next special game is confirmed;
The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state and a second advantageous game state that ends when a termination condition is met, including a timing at which the first advantageous game state ends being different from that of the second advantageous game state.
The performance control means
If the result of the lottery is the specific win, the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state, and a confirmation effect is executed to indicate that the execution of the next special game is confirmed ;
After the special game ends, if the game state is shifted to the first advantageous game state, the determination effect is executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs after the special game ends, a transition suggestion effect can be executed to suggest the possibility of transition to the advantageous gaming state .

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of gaming.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. A schematic front view showing the second large prize device and other features of the gaming machine. 2 is an enlarged view of part A shown in FIG. 1, showing displays provided on the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a table showing various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) A big win determination table of the first embodiment. (B) A big win symbol type determination table of the first embodiment. (C) A small win symbol type determination table of the first embodiment. (D) A reach determination table of the first embodiment. 10 is a determination table of the big win symbol type and the small win symbol type in the first embodiment, and is a table explaining the types of big wins and small wins. (A) A normal symbol winning determination table. (B) A normal symbol variation pattern determination table. (C) An electric chute opening pattern determination table. (A) A special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state. (B) A special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state. This is a specific table of start winning commands. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. 10 is a flowchart of a gate passing process. 10 is a flowchart of a normal operation process. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. 10 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. 10 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 1 (jackpot game). 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 2 (small win game). This is a flowchart of special electric device processing 2 (small win game). 10 is a flowchart of a distributing member control process. 10 is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a mode status setting process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the variable effect start processing of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of an opening effect selection process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a round effect selection process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of an ending effect selection process according to the first embodiment. (A) A variable effect pattern selection table in LOGO standard mode. (B) A variable effect pattern selection table in LOGO 3000 mode. (C) A variable effect pattern selection table in LOGO through-out mode. (A) An opening presentation pattern selection table for big win game presentations in LOGO standard mode. (B) A small win game presentation pattern selection table for LOGO standard mode. (C) An opening presentation pattern selection table for big win game presentations in LOGO 3000 mode. (D) A small win game presentation pattern selection table for LOGO 3000 mode. (E) An opening presentation pattern selection table for big win game presentations in LOGO through-out mode. (F) A small win game presentation pattern selection table for LOGO through-out mode. (A) A round presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation in LOGO standard mode. (B) A round presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation in LOGO 3000 mode. (C) A round presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation in LOGO through-out mode. (A) An ending presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentations in LOGO standard mode. (B) An ending presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentations in LOGO 3000 mode. (C) An ending presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentations in LOGO through-out mode. 1 is a diagram for explaining the specification flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a game in the LOGO standard mode of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a game in LOGO3000 mode in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a game in the LOGO through-out mode of the first embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect in the non-time-saving state of the first embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect in the non-time-saving state of the first embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect in the non-time-saving state of the first embodiment. 10 is an example of an ending effect according to the first embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect and a standard bonus effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in the first embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect and a standard bonus effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in the first embodiment. This is an example of a revival effect A exclusive to LOGO standard when the LOGO standard mode is set in the first embodiment. This is an example of a change effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. This is an example of a revival effect B exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a LOGO 1500 bonus effect when the LOGO 3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a variable effect and a through-out bonus effect when the LOGO through-out mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a through-out bonus effect when the LOGO through-out mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a through-out bonus effect when the LOGO through-out mode is set in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a through-out bonus effect when the LOGO through-out mode is set in the first embodiment. A diagram for explaining the output of a jackpot signal by the external terminal board while the LOGO standard mode is set in the first embodiment. A figure for explaining the output of a jackpot signal by the external terminal board while the LOGO3000 mode is set in the first embodiment. A diagram for explaining the output of a jackpot signal by the external terminal board when the LOGO through-out mode is set in the first embodiment. This is a timing chart showing the opening pattern of the second large prize opening in a small prize game in the first embodiment and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening in a type 2 large prize game. 10 is a timing chart showing the opening pattern of the first big prize opening in a type 1 big prize game in the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a customer waiting effect according to the second embodiment. 10 is an example of a distribution custom effect according to the second embodiment. 10 is an example of a distribution custom effect according to the second embodiment. 10 is an example of a distribution custom effect according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process according to the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart of a custom setting process according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a custom setting process according to a second embodiment. This is an excerpt from an opening presentation pattern selection table for big win game presentations according to the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation when the LOGO3000 mode of the second embodiment is set, and this is an excerpt from a small win game presentation pattern selection table according to the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation when the LOGO3000 mode of the second embodiment is set. 10 shows an excerpt from a round effect pattern selection table according to the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the second embodiment. 10 shows an excerpt from an ending effect pattern selection table according to the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set in the second embodiment. 10A is a big win symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment; and FIG. 10B is a small win symbol type determination table according to the third embodiment. 10 is a determination table of the big win symbol type and the small win symbol type of the third embodiment, which is a table explaining the types of big wins and small wins. (A) A special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state of the third embodiment. (B) A special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for a time-saving state of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the termination conditions of the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process of the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart of a game status management process according to a third embodiment. (A) A variable effect pattern selection table when LOGO3000 is set in the non-time-saving state of the third embodiment. (B) A variable effect pattern selection table when LOGO3000 is set in the time-saving state of the third embodiment. A diagram for explaining the execution timing of the large prize slot winning notification effect and the stock effect in the first type jackpot game of the fourth embodiment. A diagram to explain the execution timing of the large prize slot winning notification effect and the stock effect in the small prize game of the fourth embodiment. A figure to explain the execution timing of the big prize slot winning notification effect and the icon change suggestion effect in the big prize game of the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example of a battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. A figure to explain the types of scenario patterns for displaying pseudo-reserved ball icons in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a small win game presentation pattern selection table for the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment. 13 is an opening effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect of the fourth embodiment. 13 is a round effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is an ending effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a right side view of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. A figure to explain the relationship between the light color of the upper decorative part lamp and the game state of the gaming machine in the fifth embodiment. This is an example of a variable presentation in the non-time-saving state of the fifth embodiment. This is an example of a big win game presentation according to the fifth embodiment. This is an example of a change effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in the fifth embodiment. 13 is an example of a standard bonus effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in the fifth embodiment. 13 is an example of a standard bonus effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in the fifth embodiment. 10 is an execution lottery table for the winning confirmation effect of the fifth embodiment. A figure to explain the relationship between the light color of the upper decorative part lamp and the game state of the gaming machine in a modified example of the fifth embodiment. This is an example of a variable effect when the LOGO standard mode is set in a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

1. Structure of the Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1 , the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted within the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes an outer frame 52, an inner frame 53, and a front frame 51. The outer frame 52 is a vertically rectangular frame body that forms the outer casing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The inner frame 53 is a vertically rectangular frame body that is disposed inside the outer frame 52 and mounts the gaming board 2. The front frame 51 is a vertically rectangular frame body that is disposed in front of the outer frame 52 and the inner frame 53 and protects the gaming board 2. The front frame 51 faces the player and is decorated with various ornaments. The front frame 51 of the gaming machine frame 50 is provided with a handle 60 for firing gaming balls with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 for storing gaming balls, and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing gaming balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61. The front frame 51 is also provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 64 (see the plan view within the dashed line in Figure 1) that can be operated by the player during effects that are executed as the game progresses. The front frame 51 is also provided with a decorative frame lamp 66 and a speaker 67.

The gaming machine frame 50 is configured with a hinge portion 54 on its left end. This hinge portion 54 allows the front frame 51 to rotate freely relative to the outer frame 52 and inner frame 53, and the inner frame 53 to rotate freely relative to the outer frame 52 and front frame 51.

The game board 2 has a game area 3 surrounded by a rail member 4, where game balls launched by operating a handle 60 flow down. The game board 2 also has a decorative board lamp 5 (see Figure 5). The game area 3 has multiple game pegs (not shown) protruding from it to guide the game balls.

Also, near the center of the gaming area 3 is an image display device 7 (predetermined display means), which is a liquid crystal display device. The display screen 7a (display unit) of the image display device 7 has a performance pattern display area that displays the changing performance patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, and 8R in synchronization with the changing display (variable display) of the first special pattern and second special pattern described below. The special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) correspond to the "identification pattern." The performance pattern display area consists of three display areas, for example, "left," "center," and "right." The left display area displays the left performance pattern 8L, the center display area displays the center performance pattern 8C, and the right display area displays the right performance pattern 8R. Each performance pattern consists of multiple patterns representing, for example, numbers from "1" to "9." The image display device 7 uses combinations of left, center, and right effect symbols to clearly display the results of the variable display of the first and second special symbols (i.e., the results of the jackpot lottery) displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and second special symbol display device 41b (see Figure 3), which will be described later.

For example, if a jackpot is won, a static display of a repeating number such as "777" will be displayed. For example, if a small jackpot is won, a static display of a predetermined chance number such as "246" will be displayed. Furthermore, if a loss occurs (a normal miss), a static display of a random number such as "263" will be displayed. This makes it easier for players to grasp the progress of the game. In other words, players generally grasp the results of the jackpot lottery on the image display device 7, rather than on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The display positions of the display areas for the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R do not need to be fixed. The dynamic display of the effect symbols can be, for example, scrolled vertically. The type of static display of the effect symbols can be freely changed depending on the results of each lottery, and the static display of random numbers may be used when a small jackpot is won.

In addition to the above-mentioned effect symbol change effects (also referred to as "decorative symbol change effects" or simply "change effects"), the image display device 7 also displays on the display screen 7a jackpot game effects (hereinafter also referred to as bonus effects) that occur in parallel with jackpot games (special games), small jackpot game effects (hereinafter also referred to as bonus effects) that occur in parallel with small jackpot games, and customer waiting effects for waiting for customers. In effect symbol change effects (win/lose indication effects), in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols, such as background images and character images, are also displayed.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 also has a first effect hold display area that displays effect holds 9A according to the number of first special symbol holds stored, as described below. By displaying the effect holds, it is possible to clearly show the player the number of first special symbol holds stored, which is displayed on the first special symbol hold display 43a (see Figure 3), as described below.

A center decorative body 10 is located near the center of the game area 3, in front of the image display device 7. A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the center decorative body 10, which can guide game balls rolling on its top surface to the first starting opening 20 (a designated ball entry opening) described below. A warp section 12 is also provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10, which allows game balls to flow in from the entrance and out to the stage section 11 from the exit. Furthermore, a decorative member 13 depicting letters, figures, etc. is located at the top of the center decorative body 10.

Below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 equipped with a first starting hole 20 that always allows a gaming ball to enter. The first starting hole 20 is also referred to as the first starting winning hole, fixed starting hole, fixed ball entry hole, or first ball entry hole. The entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20 triggers a lottery for the first special symbol (a jackpot lottery, i.e., the acquisition and determination of a jackpot random number, etc.).

Also, to the upper right of the first starting hole 20, there is provided a normal variable winning device (so-called electric chute) 22 equipped with a second starting hole 21 (predetermined ball entry hole). The second starting hole 21 is also referred to as the second starting hole, variable starting hole, variable ball entry hole, or second ball entry hole. The entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 21 triggers the drawing of a lottery for a second special symbol (a jackpot lottery, i.e., the acquisition and determination of a jackpot random number, etc.). Note that when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or determination information) for conducting the special symbol lottery, etc., are obtained, which corresponds to the "predetermined condition."

The electric chute 22 has a movable member (ball entry opening/closing member) 23 that can move back and forth, and the second starting opening 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chute solenoid 24 (see Figure 4). The second starting opening 21 allows game balls to enter only when the movable member 23 is open (i.e., when the movable member 23 is in the open state). In other words, game balls cannot enter when the movable member 23 is closed (i.e., when the movable member 23 is in the closed state). Note that the second starting opening 21 does not have to be completely impossible to enter when the movable member 23 is closed, as long as it is more difficult for game balls to enter when the movable member 23 is closed than when it is open.

Furthermore, below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, a first large prize device 31 equipped with a first large prize opening 30 (winning opening) is provided. The first large prize device 31 is also referred to as the first special variable prize device or other special prize means, and the first large prize opening 30 is also referred to as the other special prize opening. The first large prize device 31 is equipped with an opening/closing member (other special prize opening opening/closing member) 32 that can be opened or closed, and the first large prize opening 30 is opened or closed by operation of the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first large prize opening solenoid 33 (see Figure 4). Game balls can enter the first large prize opening 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is open (i.e., when it is in the open state).

Also, to the right of the first large prize opening 30 in the game area 3 is a second large prize opening device 36 equipped with a second large prize opening 35 (winning opening). The second large prize opening device 36 is also referred to as a second special variable prize opening device or special prize opening means, and the second large prize opening 35 is also referred to as a special prize opening. The second large prize opening device 36 is equipped with an opening/closing member (special prize opening opening/closing member) 37 that can be opened or closed, and the second large prize opening 35 is opened or closed by the operation of the opening/closing member 37. The opening/closing member 37 is a retractable member that moves back and forth and is driven by a second large prize opening solenoid 38 (see Figure 4). Game balls can enter the second large prize opening 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is open (i.e., in the open state). The first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 together correspond to "winning openings."

2, the second large prize device 36 includes a specific area (V area) 39 and a non-specific area 70 through which a gaming ball that has passed through the second large prize opening 35 can pass. A second large prize opening sensor 35a that detects the entry of a gaming ball into the second large prize opening 35 is located upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70 in the second large prize device 36. A specific area sensor 39a that detects the passage of a gaming ball into the specific area 39 is located in the specific area 39. A non-specific area sensor 70a that detects the passage of a gaming ball into the non-specific area 70 is located in the non-specific area 70. The second large prize device 36 also includes a distribution member 71 that distributes gaming balls that have passed through the second large prize opening 35 to either the specific area 39 or the non-specific area 70, and a distribution member solenoid 73 that drives the distribution member 71. When the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in a first state (passage-permitting state) in which it distributes game balls to a specific area 39, and when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, it is in a second state (passage-blocking state) in which it distributes game balls to a non-specific area 70.

As shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 2, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in a passing-permitting state, allowing game balls to pass through to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in a passing-permitting state, a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 35 passes through the second large prize opening sensor 35a and then passes through the specific area 39. This route of the game ball is called the first route.

As shown by the dashed line in Figure 2, when the sorting member solenoid 73 is not energized, the sorting member 71 is in a passage-blocking state that prevents game balls from passing through to the specific area 39. When the sorting member 71 is in a passage-blocking state, a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 35 passes through the second large prize opening sensor 35a, then rolls on the sorting member 71 and passes through the non-specific area 70. This route of the game ball is called the second route.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage of a gaming ball into the specific area 39 triggers the execution of a jackpot game, which will be described later. In other words, in this form, a jackpot lottery is also conducted based on whether or not a gaming ball passes through the specific area 39. A jackpot won by the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern described above is called a Type 1 jackpot, and a jackpot won by the passage of a gaming ball into the specific area 39 is called a Type 2 jackpot. A jackpot game that is executed when a Type 1 jackpot is won is called a Type 1 jackpot game, and a jackpot game that is executed when a Type 2 jackpot is won is called a Type 2 jackpot game. A Type 1 jackpot is also called a direct hit jackpot. Here, a jackpot game is executed by the operation of a device continuous operation device due to the operation of a condition device. The condition device is a device that activates the device continuous operation device, and the device continuous operation device is a device that continuously operates the special electric device. In this embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the second large prize opening 35 during a small win game and passes through the specific area 39, the condition device is activated, and the consecutive operation device for the bonus items is then activated. In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state in which the condition device and the consecutive operation device for the bonus items are activated is the big win game.

As shown in Figure 1, a gate 28 through which the gaming ball can pass is provided above the second starting opening 21 in the gaming area 3. The passage of the gaming ball through the gate 28 triggers the execution of a normal symbol lottery (i.e., the acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (winning random number)) which determines whether or not the electric chute 22 will open.

Furthermore, a normal winning hole 27 is provided at the bottom left of the game area 3. Also, at the very bottom of the game area 3, an outlet 6 is provided for discharging game balls that have been shot into the game area 3 but have not entered any of the winning holes.

The game area 3, in which various winning slots and the like are arranged, has a left game area (first game area) 3A to the left of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B to the right. A hitting style in which game balls are fired so that they flow down the left game area 3A is called a left hit. On the other hand, a hitting style in which game balls are fired so that they flow down the right game area 3B is called a right hit. In this form of pachinko game machine 1, the flow path through which game balls flow when played with a left hit is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which game balls flow when played with a right hit is called the second flow path R2.

A first starting port 20, a first large prize device 31, and an outlet 6 are provided on the first flow path R1. The player aims to win at the first starting port 20 by hitting the game ball so that it flows down the first flow path R1.

On the other hand, a gate 28, an electric chute 22, a second large prize device 36, a first large prize device 31, and an outlet 6 are provided on the second flow path R2. By hitting a gaming ball so that it flows down the second flow path R2, the player aims to pass through the gate 28 or win in the second start opening 21 related to the electric chute 22, the first large prize opening 30, or the second large prize opening 35.

In this embodiment, the gate 28, electric chute 22, and second special prize device 36 are unitized and can be attached and detached to the game board 2 as a single structure. Furthermore, the fixed prize device 19 and first special prize device 31 are unitized and can be attached and detached to the game board 2 as a single structure.

As shown in Figures 1 and 3, displays 40 are arranged in the lower right corner of the gaming board 2. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a that variably displays the first special symbol (special symbol 1, an example of an identification symbol), a second special symbol display 41b that variably displays the second special symbol (special symbol 2, an example of an identification symbol), and a normal symbol display 42 that variably displays the normal symbol. The displays 40 also include a first special symbol reserve display 43a that displays the number of reserved activations (first special symbol reserves) of the first special symbol display 41a. The first special symbol reserve is also referred to as the special symbol 1 reserve.

The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 21. In the following explanation, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols (special symbols). Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as special symbol display device 41. Furthermore, the first special symbol reserve display device 43a may be collectively referred to as special symbol reserve display device 43.

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (changing display) and then in a static display, thereby announcing the results of a lottery (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) based on a win at the first start slot 20 or the second start slot 21. The statically displayed special symbol (stopped symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stop pattern, a jackpot game is played in which the first large prize slot 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (i.e., the type of jackpot that is won). If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (small prize symbol) with a predetermined small prize stop pattern, a small prize game is played in which the second large prize slot 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of small prize symbol that is stopped and displayed (i.e., the type of small prize that is won). The opening patterns of the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30 and second large prize slot 35) in large prize games and small prize games will be described later.

Specifically, the special symbol display 41 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs arranged horizontally, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, in the event of a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), a jackpot symbol is displayed with the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). In the event of a minor jackpot (one of the multiple types of minor jackpots described below), a minor jackpot symbol is displayed with the fifth and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "●●●●○○●●". In the event of a loss (one of the multiple types of losses described below), a loss symbol is displayed with only the rightmost LED lit, such as "●●●●●●●○". Note that a loss symbol in which all LEDs are unlit may also be used. Furthermore, before the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined period of time. The manner in which this display occurs is such that, for example, each LED lights up in a manner that causes light to flow repeatedly from left to right. Note that the manner in which the display occurs can be changed as appropriate, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously if the LEDs are not displayed in a static state (illuminated in a specific manner).

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 20, the values (determination information) of various random numbers, such as the jackpot random number, obtained for that entry are temporarily stored in the special symbol reserve memory unit 85 (see Figure 4). In more detail, if the ball enters the first starting hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reserve in the first special symbol reserve memory unit 85a (see Figure 4). There is an upper limit to the number of special symbol reserves that can be stored in each special symbol reserve memory unit 85, and in this embodiment, the upper limit (upper limit number of memories, upper limit number of reserves) for the first special symbol reserve memory unit 85a is set to "4".

A reserved special symbol stored in the reserved special symbol memory unit 85 is consumed when it becomes possible to variable display a special symbol based on that reserved special symbol. Consumption of a reserved special symbol refers to determining the jackpot random number, etc., corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing variable display of a special symbol to indicate the result of that determination. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, even if the variable display of a special symbol based on a game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, i.e., even if a winning occurs while the variable display of a special symbol is being executed or during a special game (jackpot game or small jackpot game), the right to enter a jackpot lottery for that winning can be reserved up to a predetermined number. In other words, this form of pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a holding means that can suspend the execution of the jackpot determination process (predetermined determination process) based on a ball entering the first start port 20 (fixed start port).

The number of reserved special drawings is then displayed on the reserved special drawing display 43. Specifically, the first reserved special drawing display 43a is composed of four LEDs. Each reserved special drawing display 43 displays the number of reserved special drawings by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special drawings.

The variable display of the normal symbol is triggered by the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28. The normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol variably (variably) and then stops, thereby announcing the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the gaming ball through gate 28. The stopped normal symbol (normal stop symbol, normal symbol derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal symbol selected from multiple types of normal symbols by the normal symbol lottery. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (normal winning symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of, for example, two LEDs (see Figure 3), and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by changing the lighting mode of the LEDs. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with both LEDs lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal losing symbol with only the right LED lit is displayed, such as "●○". A mode in which all LEDs are turned off may also be used to indicate a normal losing symbol. Before the normal symbol is displayed as a static symbol, a variable display (variable display) of the normal symbol is displayed for a predetermined variable time, and the variable display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs light up alternately. Note that the variable display mode can be changed as appropriate, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously unless each LED is displayed as a static symbol (a lit display in a specific mode).

Note that this pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that if the variable display of a normal symbol based on the passage of a gaming ball through gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, i.e., if the ball passes through gate 28 while the variable display of a normal symbol is being executed or while an auxiliary game is being executed, the normal symbol random number based on the passage is not acquired. In other words, it is configured so that the operation reserve (normal symbol reserve) of the normal symbol display device 42 is not stored. Note that the normal symbol reserve may be stored up to a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "4") in a predetermined memory area within RAM 84 (see Figure 4). In this case, the normal symbol reserve stored in RAM 84 is consumed when the variable display of a normal symbol based on that normal symbol reserve becomes possible. Consumption of a normal symbol reserve means determining the normal symbol random number corresponding to that normal symbol reserve and executing the variable display of a normal symbol to show the determination result. In this case, it is also recommended to provide a normal symbol reserve indicator that displays the number of stored normal symbol reserves.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the present pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 4 and 5. As shown in Figures 4 and 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control board (game control board) 80 that controls game profits such as jackpot lottery draws and game state transitions, a sub-control board (effect control board) 90 that controls effects executed as the game progresses, a payout control board 110 that controls the payout of game balls, and an external terminal board 119 that outputs various signals to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described below. The main control board 80 constitutes the main control unit, and the sub-control board 90, together with the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and sound control board 106, as described below, constitute a sub-control unit 99. Note that the sub-control unit 99 only needs to include at least the sub-control board 90 and be capable of controlling various effects using effect means (such as the image display device 7, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, and movable board 15).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 also has a power supply board 150. The power supply board 150 supplies power to the main control board 80, sub-control board 90, and payout control board 110, and also supplies the necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 150 is provided with a backup power circuit 151. When power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the backup power circuit 151 supplies power to the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90, which will be described later. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is retained even when power is lost to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A power switch 155 is also connected to the power supply board 150. The power is turned on/off by turning the power switch 155 on/off. Additionally, a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 of the main control board 80 may be provided on the main control board 80, and a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 may be provided on the sub-control board 90.

The power supply board 150 is also provided with a RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear the information stored in the RAM 84 of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means), which will be described later. The RAM clear switch 152 is provided on the power supply board 150, which is located on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, only arcade employees who have the ability to open the gaming machine frame 50 can operate the RAM clear switch 152. In other words, the RAM clear switch 152 is essentially an operation means that cannot be operated by a player. The RAM clear switch 152 is a tactile switch, and when the RAM clear switch 152 is pressed, a detection signal indicating that the RAM clear switch 152 is ON is input to the game control microcomputer 81. The state in which the RAM clear switch 152 is pressed is referred to as the ON state of the RAM clear switch 152, and the state in which the RAM clear switch 152 is not pressed is referred to as the OFF state of the RAM clear switch 152.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 80 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "game control microcomputer") 81, which controls the progress of play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of play, a RAM 84 used as work memory, a CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the ROM 83, and an I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 87 for inputting and outputting data and signals. Note that the ROM 83 may be external. The RAM 84 is provided with the special symbol reservation memory unit 85 (first special symbol reservation memory unit 85a) described above.

In addition, as shown in Figure 4, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors connected include the first start gate sensor 20a, the second start gate sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large prize gate sensor 30a, the second large prize gate sensor 35a, the specific area sensor 39a, the non-specific area sensor 70a, and the normal prize gate sensor 27a.

The first start opening sensor 20a is provided within the first start opening 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 20. The second start opening sensor 21a is provided within the second start opening 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided within the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The first large prize opening sensor 30a is provided within the first large prize opening 30 and detects game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 30. The second large prize opening sensor 35a is provided within the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in a specific area 39 within the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is installed in the non-specific area 70 within the second large prize opening 35 and detects game balls that have passed through the non-specific area 70. The regular prize opening sensors 27a are installed within each regular prize opening 27 and detect game balls that have entered the regular prize opening 27.

The solenoids connected include the electric chute solenoid 24, the first large prize opening solenoid 33, the second large prize opening solenoid 38, and the distributing member solenoid 73. The electric chute solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chute 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first large prize device 31. The second large prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second large prize device 36. The distributing member solenoid 73 drives the distributing member 71 of the second large prize device 36.

Furthermore, the main control board 80 is connected to a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, and a first special symbol reserved display 43a. In other words, the display control of these displays 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 also sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to the prize ball payout device 120 and card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card), as well as to the launching device 112 via a launch control circuit 111. The launching device 112 includes a handle 60 (see Figure 1).

The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81 and signals from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The prize balls and loan balls paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see Figure 1) of the launching device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. The launch motor 113 is then driven to launch a game ball with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, one game ball is launched in approximately 0.6 seconds.

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting communication direction.

The external terminal board 119 is connected to the main control board 80 and outputs various signals to external devices located outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the data counter 160 and hall computer, based on signals received from the game control microcomputer 81.

The external terminal board 119 is provided with multiple channels (CN) for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel (CN) is connected to the connector on the data counter 160 side by a cable. Each connector outputs one signal to the outside.

This external terminal board 119 can output signals such as a symbol determination signal, a jackpot signal, and a time-saving signal from different CNs. The output state of the symbol determination signal changes depending on whether a special symbol that was displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a static state. Specifically, the symbol determination signal in this form is turned ON for a predetermined period when a special symbol is displayed in a static state, and is OFF for other periods. The output state of the jackpot signal during jackpot play is different from that during other play states. Specifically, the output state of the jackpot signal in this form is turned ON during jackpot play and is turned OFF in play states other than jackpot play. The output state of the time-saving signal in the time-saving state (high base state) is different from that during other play states. Specifically, the output state of the time-saving signal in this form is turned ON during the time-saving state and is turned OFF in play states other than the time-saving state. Note that the output states of each signal may be reversed. In addition to these signals, the external terminal board 119 can also output from each channel a frame open signal indicating that the gaming machine frame 50 is open, a prize ball signal indicating that a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) have been played, a security signal indicating that a prize has been won in the prize opening associated with the electric chute 22 or big prize device when these devices are not in operation, and a start port signal indicating that a prize has been won in the first start port 20 or second start port 21.

The signal (external output signal) output by the game control microcomputer 81 to the external terminal board 119 is serial data containing multiple bits of information. This serial data is converted to parallel data by an S/P conversion circuit (serial/parallel conversion circuit) not shown and input to the external terminal board 119. For example, the first bit of this serial data corresponds to a jackpot signal (if the first bit is "1", a jackpot signal is output, and if it is "0", a jackpot signal is not output), and the second bit corresponds to a time-saving signal. Therefore, when such serial data is converted to parallel data and input to the external terminal board 119, signal transmission elements such as photorelays provided corresponding to each CN switch between conductive and non-conductive states in response to their respective input signals. As a result, an external output signal is output from the channel whose photorelay is in a conductive state.

The data counter 160 displays the operating status of the connected gaming machine. The data counter 160 counts the number of special symbol variations based on the change (ON edge) of the symbol confirmation signal from not being received to being received, and displays the count value on the data display device 162, a display screen provided by the data counter 160. The data counter 160 also counts the number of jackpots based on the change (ON edge) of the jackpot signal from not being received to being received, and displays the count value on the data display device 162, a display screen provided by the data counter 160. Furthermore, for example, while a jackpot signal is being received, a display indicating that a jackpot game is in progress can be displayed. In addition, the count value displayed on the data display device 162 can be reset (e.g., to zero) in response to the reception of a jackpot signal or a time-saving signal.

The hall computer is a device used to compile information such as the operating status of each pachinko gaming machine installed in the hall and manage operations and gaming machines, and is installed in the hall's control room, etc. The hall computer is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, via the data counter 160, and the various external output signals mentioned above are also input to the hall computer. Note that the hall computer may also be connected to the external terminal board 119 without going through the data counter 160.

As shown in Figure 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter referred to as "effect control microcomputer") 91, which controls the effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 (effect control means) includes a ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling effects as the game progresses, a RAM 94 used as work memory, a CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the ROM 93, and an I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 97 for inputting and outputting data and signals. Note that the ROM 93 may be external.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, and lamp control board 107. The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The RAM 104 of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM 103 of the image control board 100 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance designs) and background images. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads image data from ROM 103 based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91. It then executes display control based on the read image data.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented on the audio control board 106, in which case audio control may be performed by that CPU. In this case, a ROM may be implemented on the audio control board 106, and audio data may be stored in that ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and audio control may be performed by the CPU 102 of the image control board 100. In this case, audio data may also be stored in ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In more detail, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission data (data that determines the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 in accordance with the light emission data. Note that data stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission data.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable board 15 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The movable board 15 is a movable gimmick attached to the center decorative body 10, although not shown in Figure 1. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also called drive data) that determines the operating mode of the movable board 15, and controls the operation of the movable board 15 in accordance with the operation pattern data. The operation pattern data is created using data stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, in which case the CPU may be responsible for controlling the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable board 15. In this case, a ROM may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, in which case data related to the lighting patterns and operation patterns may be stored.

In addition, a performance button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 64a are connected to the sub-control board 90. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (see Figure 1) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90. In addition, the select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see Figure 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection switch 64a to the sub-control board 90.

Note that Figures 4 and 5 are merely functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of this pachinko gaming machine 1, and the boards shown in Figures 4 and 5 are not the only boards provided. With the exception of the main control board 80, any of the boards shown in Figures 4 and 5 may be configured as a single board, and the single board shown in Figures 4 and 5 may be configured as multiple boards.

3. Main Games in the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 obtains special symbol-related random numbers based on winning at the first start gate 20 or the second start gate 21. As shown in FIG. 6(A), the special symbol-related random numbers include jackpot random numbers, symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers. The jackpot random numbers are used to determine whether a jackpot has been won or not, and whether a small jackpot has been won or not. The jackpot random numbers take on values in the range of 0 to 65535. The symbol type random numbers are used to determine the type of jackpot symbol, the type of small jackpot symbol, and the type of losing symbol. The symbol type random numbers take on values in the range of 0 to 199.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach will occur in the variable presentation that shows the result when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss. A reach is a state in which there is only one variable presentation symbol remaining out of multiple presentation symbols, and depending on which of the variable presentation symbols that stops and is displayed, a combination of presentation symbols that indicates a jackpot win (for example, a "7↓7" state) will result. Note that the presentation symbol that is displayed stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking slightly on the display screen 7a, or as if it is displayed to expand and contract repeatedly. The reach random number takes on a value in the range of 0 to 255.

Fluctuation pattern random numbers are random numbers used to determine fluctuation patterns, including fluctuation times. Fluctuation pattern random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 99. Random numbers are also called judgment information.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 also obtains a normal symbol random number (winning random number) shown in Figure 6 (B) based on the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 28. The normal symbol random number is a random number used in a lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chute 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 determines whether or not a jackpot random number obtained based on a win in the first starting slot 20 or the second starting slot 21 is a jackpot or a small jackpot by judging it according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 7(A). As shown in FIG. 7(A), the probability of winning a jackpot is the same for the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) based on a win in the first starting slot 20 and the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) based on a win in the second starting slot 21, but the probability of winning a small jackpot is different. The probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing of special symbol 1 is zero, while the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing of special symbol 2 is approximately 1 in 1. In other words, it can be said that it is easier to win a small jackpot in the drawing of special symbol 2 than in the drawing of special symbol 1. Note that the drawing of special symbol 1 may also be configured to allow a small jackpot. In this case, it is desirable to set the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing of special symbol 1 lower than the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing of special symbol 2. Additionally, the probability of winning a small prize in the special drawing for Special Chart 2 may be changeable as needed to the extent that it does not interfere with gameplay.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines that a jackpot has been won, it determines the type of jackpot symbol by judging the symbol type random number according to the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in Figure 7 (B). In the drawing for special symbol 1, there is a 50% chance that it will be determined as "Special symbol 1_Jackpot symbol A," and a 50% chance that it will be determined as "Special symbol 1_Jackpot symbol B." On the other hand, in the drawing for special symbol 2, there is an 80% chance that it will be determined as "Special symbol 2_Jackpot symbol C," a 1% chance that it will be determined as "Special symbol 2_Jackpot symbol D," and a 19% chance that it will be determined as "Special symbol 2_Jackpot symbol D." If the type of jackpot symbol that is won is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot slot in a Type 1 jackpot game and the settings related to the game state after the jackpot game will differ (see Figure 8). This point will be discussed later.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines that a small prize has been won, it determines the type of small prize symbol by judging the symbol type random number according to the small prize symbol type determination table shown in Figure 7 (C). Specifically, in the lottery for special prize symbol 2, there is an 80% chance that it will be determined to be "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol a," a 1% chance that it will be determined to be "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol b," and a 19% chance that it will be determined to be "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol c." If the type of small prize symbol that is won is different, the settings related to the game state after the jackpot game and the ending time included in the jackpot game, which will be described later, will differ (see Figure 8). This point will be discussed later. Furthermore, different types of small prize symbols may result in different opening patterns for the large prize opening in small prize games and type 2 jackpot games.

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines a miss, it determines whether or not the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will be in a reach state in the variable effect by judging the reach random number according to the reach judgment table shown in Figure 7 (D). The probability of a reach being judged to be in a reach state differs depending on whether or not the gaming state is in the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state) described below. The probability of a reach being judged to be in a reach state is higher when the time-saving state is not in effect than when the time-saving state is in effect.

Next, the types of big wins and small wins will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 8. As mentioned above, the results of the special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery or special symbol 2 lottery) can be a "big win," a "small win," or a "lose." In the event of a "big win," a "big win symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 41. The big win symbols include "Special symbol 1_big win symbol A," "Special symbol 1_big win symbol B," "Special symbol 2_big win symbol C," "Special symbol 2_big win symbol D," and "Special symbol 2_big win symbol E." In addition, in the event of a "small win," a "small win symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 41. The small win symbols include "Special symbol 2_small win symbol a," "Special symbol 2_small win symbol b," and "Special symbol 2_small win symbol c." In the event of a "lose," a "loser symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 41.

If a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a "jackpot game" is played in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. If a small prize is won, a "small prize game" is played in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of small prize symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, if a game ball enters a specific area 39 within the second large prize opening 35 during the small prize game, a "jackpot game" is played in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of small prize symbol that has been won. A jackpot game played based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a jackpot is called a Type 1 jackpot game, and a jackpot game played based on passage through the specific area 39 is called a Type 2 jackpot game.

In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (also referred to as ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play or the start of the ED. The time (interval time) for the jackpot opening to close between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

In this embodiment, the small win game includes a small win opening game that opens the second large prize opening 35, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small win opening game begins, and an ending (post-closing interval) after the small win opening game has ended.

If the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot (i.e., if a Type 1 jackpot is won), a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game) is executed, which opens the first large prize slot 30. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) that can be won in the lottery for the first special symbol (Special Symbol 1), and three types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b) that can be won in the lottery for the second special symbol (Special Symbol 2). Specifically, in the lottery for Special Symbol 1, there are possibilities for winning "Special Symbol 1_Jackpot Symbol A" and "Special Symbol 1_Jackpot Symbol B." In addition, in the lottery for Special Symbol 2, there are possibilities for winning "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol D," and "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol E."

As shown in Figure 8, "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" and "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B" are 10R (round) jackpots, with the first large prize slot 30 opening once per Round and a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds. The game state after a jackpot game based on "Jackpot Pattern A" is a time-saving state, described below, with the number of time-saving times set to one. In contrast, the game state after a jackpot game based on "Jackpot Pattern B" is a non-time-saving state, described below. The number of time-saving times is the maximum number of times the variable display of the special pattern can be executed in the time-saving state. The various number of time-saving times is an example of a "specific number of times." Details of the game state will be provided later.

Furthermore, "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D," and "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E" are 10R (round) jackpots, with the opening time for each jackpot game being 5 seconds, the first large prize slot 30 opening once per Round, and the maximum opening time being 29.5 seconds (see Figure 68). The ending time for a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" and the ending time for a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E" are both 5 seconds (see Figure 68 (B)). On the other hand, the ending time for a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D" is 13 seconds (see Figure 68 (C)). The ending time of a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" is longer than either the ending time of a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" or the ending time of a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E". This is because the revival effect, described below, can be executed at the ending time of a jackpot game based on "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D". The game state after a jackpot game based on "Jackpot Pattern C" or "Jackpot Pattern D" is a time-saving state, described below, with the number of time-saving cycles set to one. In contrast, the game state after a jackpot game based on "Jackpot Pattern E" is a non-time-saving state, described below.

Furthermore, if a small prize is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened once. If a game ball enters the second large prize opening 35 opened by the small prize game and passes through the specific area 39 within the second large prize device 36, a jackpot is won, and a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened. When this jackpot game (jackpot game triggered by passing through the specific area 39) is executed, the opening of the second large prize opening 35 as a small prize game corresponds to the first round. Note that if a game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 in the small prize game, the jackpot game is not executed. In this specification, jackpot games and small prize games are sometimes referred to as special games. Note that in a special game, there may be rounds in which the large prize opening is opened multiple times during one round.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 8, there are three types of small prize symbols (small prize symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b) that can be won in the Special Symbol 2 lottery. Specifically, in the Special Symbol 2 lottery, there is a possibility of winning "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol a," "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol b," and "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol c."

"Special Chart 2 - Small Winning Symbol a," "Special Chart 2 - Small Winning Symbol b," and "Special Chart 2 - Small Winning Symbol c" are small wins that will always result in passage to the special area 39 (also known as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly. In other words, in this version, winning a small win based on the lottery for Special Chart 2 essentially has the same meaning as winning a big win.

In small prize games based on various small prize symbols, the second large prize opening 35 is opened and closed multiple times (see Figure 67 (B)). The total opening time of the second large prize opening 35 during each small prize game is 1.6 seconds. The opening time during each small prize game is 0.008 seconds. In large prize games (type 2 large prize games) based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area 39, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round from round 2 to round 10, with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, regardless of whether the game is a type 2 large prize game based on "small prize symbol a," a type 2 large prize game based on "small prize symbol b," or a type 2 large prize game based on "small prize symbol c." In other words, a type 2 large prize game is essentially played for 10 rounds. The opening time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol a", the opening time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol b", and the opening time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol c" are all 5 seconds (see Figures 67(C) and 67(D)). The ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol a" and the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol c" are also 5 seconds (see Figure 67(C)). On the other hand, the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol b" is 13 seconds (see Figure 67(C)). The reason why the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol b" is longer than either the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol a" or the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol c" is so that a revival effect, which will be described later, can be executed at the ending time of a jackpot game based on "small win symbol b". The game state after the execution of the above-mentioned two-type jackpot game is controlled to the time-saving state described below. The game state after a jackpot game based on either "small jackpot symbol a" or "small jackpot symbol b" is a time-saving state, with the number of time-saving times set to one. On the other hand, the game state after a jackpot game based on "small jackpot symbol c" is a non-time-saving state. In this mode, since the combined probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing for special symbol 2 and the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing for special symbol 2 is 1/1, if the game is controlled to a time-saving state with the number of time-saving times set to one, the execution of the next jackpot game is essentially confirmed.

In this form of jackpot game, there are a jackpot game based on "Special chart 1_jackpot symbol A" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game A), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 1_jackpot symbol B" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game B), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol C" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game C), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol D" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game D), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol E" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game E), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_small jackpot symbol a" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game F), a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_small jackpot symbol b" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game G), and a jackpot game based on "Special chart 2_small jackpot symbol c" (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot game H) (see FIG. 8).

Here, we will explain the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. In this embodiment, there are two gaming states: a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state. The non-time-saving state is also referred to as the normal gaming state. When playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after powering on is the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state). The time-saving state is a gaming state set in such a way that it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the electric chute 22 than in the non-time-saving state.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various parameters related to the likelihood of winning on the electric chute 22, such as the normal symbol variation pattern and the electric chute 22 opening pattern, are set differently between the time-shortened state and the non-time-shortened state. In detail, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9(A), the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery in the time-shortened state is the same as the winning probability of the normal symbol in the non-time-shortened state. Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability of a winning normal symbol lottery in either the non-time-shortened state or the time-shortened state is set to 65,535/65,536. In other words, a winning normal symbol lottery is almost always determined in either state. Note that the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher in the time-shortened state than in the non-time-shortened state (in other words, the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated in the time-shortened state).

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, as shown in Figure 9 (B), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in this form, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but 1 second in the time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated. Furthermore, the stop time of the normal symbol is 0.5 seconds in either game state.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, as shown in Figure 9 (C), the open time of the electric chute 22 during auxiliary play is longer than in the non-time-saving mode. Specifically, in this mode, the open time of the electric chute 22 is 0.05 seconds per play in the non-time-saving mode, but is 2.5 seconds in the time-saving mode. In other words, in the time-saving mode, the open time extension function of the electric chute 22 is activated.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, as shown in Figure 9 (C), the number of times the electric chute 22 opens during auxiliary play may be greater than in the non-time-saving mode. Specifically, in this mode, the electric chute 22 opens once in the non-time-saving mode, but twice in the time-saving mode. In other words, in the time-saving mode, the function to increase the number of times the electric chute 22 opens is activated.

In the non-time-saving mode, if a normal symbol lottery is executed, it will almost certainly result in a win, but the normal symbol variation time is as long as 60 seconds, and the electric chute 22 opens only once for 0.05 seconds during supplementary play, which is extremely short. Therefore, in the non-time-saving mode, even if you play by hitting to the right (a hitting style that allows the game ball to pass through the gate 28), there is almost no chance of winning on the electric chute 22.

In contrast, in the time-saving mode, if a normal symbol lottery is executed, it almost always results in a win, the normal symbol variation time is short at 1 second, and the electric chute 22 opens twice in supplementary play for 2.5 seconds, which is quite long. Therefore, in the time-saving mode, by playing with a right-hand hit, winning on the electric chute 22 can occur frequently. In other words, the time-saving mode can be said to be a gaming mode in which it is easier to win on the electric chute 22 than in the non-time-saving mode.

In this way, when the time-saving mode is not active, hitting the right side does not result in a win in the electric chute 22, so the player plays by hitting the left side. On the other hand, when the time-saving mode is active, hitting the right side frequently results in a win in the electric chute 22, so the player plays by hitting the right side. Note that with this pachinko gaming machine 1, play is performed by hitting the right side even during a jackpot game.

Incidentally, in the time-saving state, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, is higher than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state is also called the "high base state," and the non-time-saving state is also called the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control that supports winning through the second starting hole 21 by the electric chute 22) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also called the electric support control state. The low base state is also called the non-electric support control state.

The time-saving state may be achieved by activating one or more of the following functions: the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time reduction function of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension function of the electric chute 22, and the opening count increase function of the electric chute 22, so long as it makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 21 of the electric chute 22 than when the function is not activated; it is not necessary for all of these functions to be activated.

Next, we will explain how the special symbol fluctuation pattern (special symbol fluctuation pattern) is determined. The pachinko gaming machine 1 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern in accordance with a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that differs between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state (see Figure 10). The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the time-saving state (see Figure 10 (B)) is a table that makes it easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time-saving state (see Figure 10 (A)).

Here, in the non-time-saving state, the lottery for special chart 1 is mainly performed, so the table shown in the special chart 1 column of Figure 10 (A) is used. In the non-time-saving state, gameplay is mainly based on the lottery for special chart 1. Therefore, at this time, the table shown in the special chart 1 column of Figure 10 (A) is used. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the lottery for special chart 2 is mainly performed, so the table shown in the special chart 2 column of Figure 10 (B) is used. In the time-saving state, gameplay is mainly based on the lottery for special chart 2. Therefore, at this time, the table shown in the special chart 2 column of Figure 10 (B) is used.

4. Regarding the Start Winning Command The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a so-called pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect is an effect that uses a start winning command specified based on the determination information (random number value such as a jackpot random number) acquired by the start winning to suggest the expected probability of winning for the start winning before the win/loss determination immediately before the start of the special symbol variation (variable display of the special symbol) based on the start winning.

As shown in Figure 11, the start winning command generated in this embodiment includes lottery result information indicating whether the winning is a big win, a small win, or a miss. The start winning command in this embodiment also includes start gate information indicating which start gate, the first start gate 20 or the second start gate 21, the winning gate was entered in. Note that the start winning command only needs to include lottery result information, and the information included in the start winning command in addition to the lottery result information can be changed as appropriate.

5. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to Figures 12 to 30. The counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, and other components mentioned in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are stored in RAM 84. When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in Figure 12 from ROM 83. As shown in Figure 12, the main control main processing begins with initial setup (step S001). This initial setup includes, for example, stack setup, constant setup, interrupt time setup, CPU 82 setup, SIO, PIO, and CTC (a circuit for managing interrupt time), and resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of a flag is "0" (i.e., "OFF"), the initial value of a status is "1," and the initial value of a counter is "0." The initial setting (S001) is executed only once after power-on and will not be executed thereafter.

Following the initial setting (S001), interrupts are disabled (S002), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003), the various random number counter values shown in Figure 6 are updated by incrementing them by 1. When each random number counter value reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. The period initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" and may be changed randomly. Each random number may also be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

When the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, interrupts are permitted (S004). While interrupts are permitted, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on interrupt pulses repeatedly input to the CPU 82, for example, at 4 msec intervals. That is, it is executed at 4 msec intervals, for example. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), the update process for various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 while interrupts are prohibited, the main timer interrupt process (S005) does not start immediately, but rather starts after interrupts are permitted (S004).

[Main timer interrupt processing] Next, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in Figure 13, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) first executes output processing (S101). In output processing (S101), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in RAM 84 of the main control board 80 in each of the processes described below are output to the sub-control board 90, dispensing control board 110, etc.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (first start gate sensor 20a, second start gate sensor 21a, first large prize gate sensor 30a, second large prize gate sensor 35a, normal prize gate sensor 27a, etc. (see Figure 4)) are read and stored in the output buffer of RAM 84 as prize ball information. A detection signal from the lower tray full switch, which detects whether the lower tray 62 is full, is also read and stored in the output buffer of RAM 84 as lower tray full data. The number of prize balls awarded to each prize gate is set to a predetermined value, such as two balls for the second start gate 21. However, the number of prize balls awarded to each prize gate can be changed as needed.

The next normal/special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the main control main process of Figure 12. In other words, the update process for the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in Figure 6 is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) until the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005)).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the following processes are executed: sensor detection process (S104), normal operation process (S105), special operation process (S106), distribution member control process (S107), and specific area sensor detection process (S108), which will be described later. Then, external terminal output process (S109) and other processes (S110) are executed, and the main timer interrupt process (S005) ends. In the external terminal output process (S109), the output signal set in each external terminal setting process, which will be described later, is output to the external terminal board 119. Other processes (S110) include controlling the display mode of the first special symbol reserved indicator 43a to indicate the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, which will be described later. Steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process are then repeatedly executed until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 (see Figure 12). When the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later), the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output process (S101) of the main timer interrupt process (S005) that is executed again, the commands and the like that were set in the output buffer of the RAM 84 in the previous main timer interrupt process (S005) are output.

[Sensor detection processing] As shown in Figure 14, the sensor detection processing (S104) first determines whether a gaming ball has passed through the gate 28, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S201). If the gaming ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S201), the gate passing processing (S202), described below, is performed. On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S201), the gate passing processing (S202) is skipped and the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 21, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S203). If a gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 21 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S209. However, if a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 21 (YES in S203), the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206) is performed. In the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC), and variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (i.e., the random number group shown in Figure 6(A) is acquired).

Next, the second start winning command identification process (S207) is performed. In the second start winning command identification process (S207), the second start winning command (an example of winning information) is identified using the start winning command identification table shown in Figure 11 based on the random number group stored in step S206. Specifically, if the jackpot random number is "65535" and the pattern type random number is "199", the second start slot in the start winning command identification table in Figure 11 is referenced to identify the command "E2H01H" as the second start winning command. The command consists of two bytes of information (one byte of upper command (e.g., E2H) and one byte of lower command (e.g., 01H)).

The classification of jackpot random numbers in the table shown in Figure 11 corresponds to the classification in the jackpot determination table (see Figure 7 (A)). In detail, if the jackpot random number value is between 65331 and 65535, it is determined to be a jackpot, and a second start-up winning command (lower command value is 01H) indicating this (i.e., the acquired determination information is jackpot winning information that will be determined to be a jackpot win) is specified. Furthermore, if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 65329, it is determined to be a small win, and a second start-up winning command (lower command value is 02H) indicating this (i.e., the acquired determination information is small win winning information that will be determined to be a small win) is specified.

In the start winning command of this embodiment, the value of the upper digit of the two-digit hexadecimal upper command is information that specifies the type of command (that it is a start winning command). The value of the lower digit of the upper command is start port information that specifies the type of start port (whether it is a win at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21). The two-digit lower command in hexadecimal is lottery result information. Note that these rules for generating start winning commands are just an example and can be changed as desired.

The game control microcomputer 81 then sets the second start winning command identified in step S207 in the output buffer of RAM 84 (S208).

Next, in the sensor detection process (S104), it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 20, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S209). If a gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (NO in S209), the process ends. However, if a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (YES in S209), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (the number of reserved first special charts, specifically, the value of the counter in RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special charts) has reached "4" (S210). If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 has reached "4" (YES in S210), the process ends. However, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is less than "4" (NO in S210), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (S211).

Next, the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S212) is performed. In the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S212), similar to the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A), symbol type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC), and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (i.e., the random number group shown in Figure 6(A) is acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in a memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory unit 85a (Figure 4) that corresponds to the current number of balls reserved for special symbol 1.

Next, the first start winning command identification process (S213) is performed. In the first start winning command identification process (S213), the first start winning command (an example of winning information) is identified using the start winning command identification table shown in Figure 11 based on the random number group stored in step S212. Specifically, if the jackpot random number is "65535" and the pattern type random number is "199", the first start slot in the start winning command identification table in Figure 14 is referenced to identify the command "E1H01H" as the first start winning command. The identified first start winning command includes lottery result information.

As with the second start winning command described above, the classification of the jackpot random numbers in the table shown in Figure 11 corresponds to the classification in the jackpot determination table (see Figure 7 (A)). In detail, if the jackpot random number value is between 65331 and 65535, it is determined to be a jackpot, and therefore the first start winning command (the value of the lower command is 01H) indicating this (i.e., the acquired determination information is jackpot winning information that will be determined to be a jackpot win) is specified. Also, if the jackpot random number value is between 0 and 65330 and the pattern type random number value is between 0 and 199, it is determined to be a loss, and therefore the first start winning command (the value of the lower command is 03H) indicating this (i.e., the acquired determination information is loss information that will be determined to be a loss) is specified.

The game control microcomputer 81 then sets the first start winning command identified in step S213 in the output buffer of RAM 84 (S214), performs other processing (S215), and terminates this processing. In this other processing (S215), for example, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has been detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, and if it determines that a game ball has been detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, sets a command for the first large prize opening sensor in the output buffer of RAM 84. In addition, in the other processing (S215), for example, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has been detected by the second large prize opening sensor 35a, and if it determines that a game ball has been detected by the second large prize opening sensor 35a, sets a command for the second large prize opening sensor in the output buffer of RAM 84.

[Gate Passing Process] As shown in Figure 15, the gate passing process (S202) first determines whether or not the normal symbol is waiting to change (S221). Waiting for the normal symbol to change means that neither the normal symbol change display nor the auxiliary game is being played. If the normal symbol is not waiting to change (NO in S221), this process immediately ends. However, if the normal symbol is waiting to change (YES in S221), the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S222) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S222), the normal symbol random number counter value (value of label-TRND-H, Figure 6 (B)) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in a specified memory area of RAM 84.

[Normal Operation Processing] Following the sensor detection processing (S104), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal operation processing (S105) shown in Figure 16. In the normal operation processing (S105), first, it determines whether the electric chute 22 is in operation (S301). If the electric chute is not in operation (NO in S301), it then determines whether a normal symbol is currently displayed as a stationary symbol (from the start to the end of the stationary time of the normal symbol) (S302). If a normal symbol is not currently displayed as a stationary symbol (NO in S302), it then determines whether a variable normal symbol is currently being displayed (S303). If a variable normal symbol is not currently being displayed (NO in S303), it then determines whether the normal symbol random number obtained before the win determination in step S222 described above is stored (S304). If a normal symbol random number is not stored (NO in S304), this processing ends.

If a normal symbol random number is stored in step S304 (YES in S304), a win determination process (S305) is performed. In the win determination process (S305), if the time-saving mode is not active, a win or loss is determined based on the normal symbol win determination table for the non-time-saving mode (see the non-time-saving mode column in the table shown in FIG. 9(A)). If the time-saving mode is active, a win or loss is determined based on the normal symbol win determination table for the time-saving mode (see the time-saving mode column in the table shown in FIG. 9(A)). Then, a pattern determination process is performed (S306) to set normal symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the result of the win determination process in a predetermined memory area of RAM 84. That is, in the pattern determination process (S306), if the result is a "miss," data corresponding to a "normal miss symbol" is set, and if the result is a "win," data corresponding to a "normal win symbol" is set. Note that in this embodiment, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is the same whether the time-saving mode is not active or the time-saving mode.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern change time determination process (S307). In the normal pattern change time determination process (S307), the normal pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figure 9 (B) is referenced, and if the game state is not in the time-saving state, a normal pattern change pattern with a normal pattern change time of 60 seconds is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is in the time-saving state, a normal pattern change pattern with a normal pattern change time of 1 second is selected.

Then, the game control microcomputer 81 begins displaying the normal symbol fluctuations using the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in step S307 (S310). At the same time, a normal symbol fluctuation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 that the normal symbol fluctuations have begun.

If the normal symbol variation display is in progress in step S303 (YES in S303), it is then determined whether the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (S311). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S311), the normal symbol variation display is stopped with the display result (normal winning symbol or normal losing symbol) corresponding to the determination result of the normal symbol random number (S312). Then, a normal symbol variation stop command is set to the sub-control board 90 to notify the normal symbol variation stop (S313), and the normal symbol stop time (500 ms in this embodiment, see Figure 9 (B)) is set (S314), and the process ends.

Furthermore, if a normal symbol is currently displayed in step S302 (YES in S302), it is then determined whether the normal symbol stop time set in step S314 has elapsed (S315), and if not, processing ends. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S315), it is determined whether normal symbol stop symbol data for a normal winning symbol has been set (S316), and if it is not data for a normal winning symbol (i.e., if there is no win (NO in S316)), processing ends. On the other hand, if it is data for a normal winning symbol (i.e., if there is a win (YES in S316)), the opening pattern of the electric chute 22 is set (S317). In detail, if the non-time-saving state is in effect, the opening pattern for the electric chute 22 is set to the opening pattern for the non-time-saving state (see electric chute opening TBL1 in Figure 9 (C)). On the other hand, if the time-saving mode is active, the opening pattern for the time-saving mode (see electric chute opening TBL2 in Figure 9 (C)) is set as the opening pattern for the electric chute 22. Then, the electric chute 22 is operated according to the opening pattern set in step S317 (S318).

Also, if the electric chute 22 is in operation in step S301 described above (YES in S301), it is then determined whether the operation time of the electric chute 22 has elapsed (S319), and if not, the processing ends. On the other hand, if the time has elapsed (YES in S319), the operation of the electric chute 22 is terminated (S320).

[Special Operation Processing] Following the normal operation processing (S105), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special operation processing (S106) shown in Figure 17. In the special operation processing (S106), the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is assigned a "special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5." If the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S901), special symbol standby processing (S902) is performed; if the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S901, YES in S903), special symbol changing processing (S904) is performed; if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S901 and S903, YES in S905), special symbol determination processing (S906) is performed; if the "special operation status" is "4" (NO in S901, S903, and S905, YES in S907), special electric device processing 1 (S908) for a big win game is performed; and if the "special operation status" is "5" (NO in S901, S903, S905, and S907), special electric device processing 2 (S909) for a small win game is performed. The special operation status is initially set to "1."

[Special symbol waiting process] As shown in Figure 18, the special symbol waiting process (S902) first determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting hole 21 (S1001). If a game ball has not entered the second starting hole 21 (NO in S1001), that is, if a random number counter value group has not been obtained due to a ball entering the second starting hole 21, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1) is "0" (S1007). If the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 is also "0" (YES in S1007), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value group obtained as a result of winning at the first starting port 20, it is determined whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has already been set to the standby screen (demo screen for waiting for customers) (S1013). If so (YES in S1013), the processing ends; if not (NO in S1013), the standby screen setting process (S1014) is performed. In the standby screen setting process (S1014), a predetermined standby time is waited for, and then a standby command for waiting for customers is set to display the standby screen.

If a game ball enters the second start hole 21 in step S1001 (YES in S1001), that is, if a random number counter value group is obtained as a result of the ball entering the second start hole 21, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003), which will be described later, are performed. The game control microcomputer 81 then executes the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1006). In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1006), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of RAM 84, thereby starting the display of the variation of the second special symbol. The fluctuation start command (also called the special chart 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special chart 2 fluctuation start process (S1006) includes information on the special chart stop pattern data set in the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and information on the fluctuation pattern set in the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1003) (information including fluctuation time information).

Furthermore, if no game ball has entered the second starting hole 21 but the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is not "0" (NO in S1001 and NO in S1007), i.e., if a random number counter value group has not been obtained as a result of a ball entering the second starting hole 21 but there is one or more stored random number counter value groups (reserved information for special symbol 1) obtained as a result of a ball entering the first starting hole 20, the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) and special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) described below are performed. The game control microcomputer 81 then decrements the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 by 1 (S1010). The storage location (memory area) for various counter values in the first special symbol reservation memory unit 85a is then shifted by one from the current position toward the side from which the value is to be read, and the memory area corresponding to the fourth reserved ball in the first special symbol reservation memory unit 85a (the memory area farthest from the side from which the value is to be read) is cleared (S1011). In this way, the first special symbol reserves are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012). In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of RAM 84, thereby starting the display of the first special symbol variation. The variation start command (also referred to as the special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012) includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) and information on the variation pattern set in the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) (information including variation time information).

As mentioned above, in this mode, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is only performed if no game ball enters the second starting hole 21 (NO in S1001). In other words, the drawing for special symbol 2 is executed in priority to the drawing for special symbol 1. And in this mode, if a small jackpot is won in the drawing for special symbol 2, the small jackpot game will always be able to pass through the specific area 39. This point will be explained in more detail later.

[Special Chart 2 Jackpot Determination Process (Special Chart 1 Jackpot Determination Process)] The Special Chart 2 Jackpot Determination Process (S1002) and the Special Chart 1 Jackpot Determination Process (S1008) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figure 19. As shown in Figure 19, the Special Chart 2 Jackpot Determination Process (S1002) or the Special Chart 1 Jackpot Determination Process (S1008) first reads the jackpot random number counter value (the value of Label-TRND-A) as the determination value (S1101). More specifically, the Special Chart 2 Jackpot Determination Process (S1002) reads the acquired jackpot random number counter value. Furthermore, the Special Chart 1 Jackpot Determination Process (S1008) reads the jackpot random number counter value stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 85a of RAM 84 (more specifically, the memory area corresponding to the first first special chart reserved).

Next, the jackpot determination table (Figure 7(A)) is set (S1102). Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the set jackpot determination table (S1103). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A) matches any of the jackpot determination values "65331" to "65535" (see Figure 7(A)). If the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is a "jackpot," the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1104), and the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out to determine the jackpot symbol type (type of jackpot) based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in Figure 7(B) (S1105). After determining the jackpot symbol type (S1105), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot symbol type (see FIG. 7(B)) is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1106), and processing ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is not a "jackpot," it is determined whether or not it is a small jackpot (S1107). More specifically, the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) determines whether the jackpot random number counter value matches any of the small jackpot determination values between "0" and "65329" (see the special chart 2 column in Figure 7 (A)). Furthermore, the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) determines that it is not a small jackpot (see the special chart 1 column in Figure 7 (A)). The probability of winning a small jackpot is higher in the special chart 2 lottery than in the special chart 1 lottery. More specifically, while the probability of winning a small jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery is "zero," the probability of winning a small jackpot in the special chart 2 lottery is approximately 1/1.

If the result of the small win determination (S1107) is a "small win," the small win flag is turned ON (S1108), and the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out, and the small win symbol type (type of small win) is determined based on the small win symbol type determination table shown in Figure 7 (C) (S1109). After the small win symbol type is determined (S1109), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small win symbol type (see Figure 7 (C)) is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1110), and processing ends. Note that the random number that determines whether or not there is a small win may be provided separately from the big win random number.

Also, if it is not a jackpot (NO in S1103) or a small jackpot (NO in S1107), it is a "miss," so the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out to determine the type of missing symbol (type of miss) (S1112). After determining the type of missing symbol (S1112), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the type of missing symbol is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1113), and the process ends. Also, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) does not determine that it is a miss (see the special symbol 2 column in Figure 7 (A)). In other words, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) determines whether it is a jackpot or a small jackpot.

[Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process)] The Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1003) and the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1009) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figures 20 and 21. As shown in Figure 20, the Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1003) or the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1009) first determines whether the game state is in a non-time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is OFF or not) (S1301).

If the time-saving mode is not active (YES in S1301), it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1302). If it is ON (YES in S1302), the table for jackpots in non-time-saving mode (the portion of the table shown in Figure 10 (A) that corresponds to the jackpot) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (value of label-TRND-T1) (S1303). As shown in Figure 10 (A), once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined.

Fluctuating patterns are associated with fluctuation effects, and once a fluctuation pattern is determined, a fluctuation effect corresponding to that fluctuation pattern is executed. Specifically, for example, an SP reach is executed in a fluctuation effect based on fluctuation pattern P1, and a normal reach (N reach) is executed in a fluctuation effect based on fluctuation pattern P2 (see the notes section of the table shown in Figure 10 (A)). Here, an SP reach (super reach) is a reach with a longer fluctuation time after the reach than a normal reach, and the allocation rate of the table is set so that the winning expectancy (expectation of winning a jackpot) is higher than that of a normal reach. In this form, a super reach is executed in a progressive manner via a normal reach.

Also, in step S1302, if the big win flag is not ON (NO in S1302), it is determined whether the small win flag is ON (S1304). If it is ON (YES in S1304), the table for small and medium wins in non-time-saving mode (the portion of the table shown in Figure 10 (A) that corresponds to small wins) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1305).

Also, in step S1304, if the small win flag is not ON (NO in S1304), it is determined whether the reach random number counter value (value of label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number value (S1306). As shown in Figure 7 (D), the reach establishment random number value is "0" to "11" in the time-saving state, and "0" to "27" in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, it is less likely that a reach will occur when there is a normal miss than in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the consumption of special reserved charts by selecting more non-reach misses with short variable times in the time-saving state. If the reach random number counter value is a reach-established random number value (YES in S1306), that is, if there is a reach but not a win, the table for reach but not a win in the non-time-saving state (the portion of the table shown in Figure 10 (A) that corresponds to reach but not a win) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1307).

On the other hand, if the reach random number counter value is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1306), i.e., if there is a miss without a reach, the table for misses without a reach during non-time-saving mode (the portion of the table shown in Figure 10 (A) that corresponds to misses without a reach) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1308).

In addition, when there is a miss without a reach in the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009), a shortened variation function is activated according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is "3" or "4", a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected compared to when the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is "0" to "2".

Furthermore, in step S1301, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-shortened state (YES in S1301), as shown in FIG. 21, processing (S1308 to S1315) is performed in the same manner as steps S1302 to S1308 above, except that the fluctuation pattern determination table to be referenced is the table for the time-shortened state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10(B) that corresponds to the time-shortened state). In other words, if the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1309), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the time-shortened state jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10(B) that corresponds to the time-shortened state and a jackpot, and the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10(B) that corresponds to the time-shortened state and a jackpot) (S1310).

If the small win flag is ON (YES in S1311), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the time-saving state small/medium win table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 (B) that corresponds to the time-saving state and small win, and the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 (B) that corresponds to the time-saving state and small win). If the reach random number counter value is a reach-established random number value (YES in S1313), a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value by referring to the time-saving state reach and miss table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 (B) that corresponds to the time-saving state and reach and miss). Furthermore, if the reach random number counter value is not a reach establishment random number value (NO in S1313), the time-saving state no-reach miss table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 (B) that corresponds to the time-saving state and no-reach miss) is referenced, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (S1315).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table during the time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 10 (B) that corresponds to the time-saving state), the shortened fluctuation function according to the number of reserved balls when there is no reach and a miss works when the number of reserved balls is between "2" and "4". In other words, shortened fluctuation is more likely to be selected than during a non-time-saving state. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table during the time-saving state is a table in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that of the fluctuation pattern determination table during a non-time-saving state.

After selecting a variation pattern as described above, the selected variation pattern is set (S1320) as shown in Figure 20, and this process ends. Information about the variation pattern set in step S1320 is included in the variation start command set in step S1006 or S1012 in the special pattern standby process (S902).

[Special Symbol Fluctuating Process] As shown in Figure 22, the special symbol fluctuating process (S904) first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1003 or S1009; see Figure 10) has elapsed (S1501). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1501), this process immediately ends. This allows the display of the fluctuating special symbol to continue.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1501), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1502) and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1503). Then, other processing is performed (S1504), such as stopping the special symbol fluctuation display at the symbol (jackpot symbol, small win symbol, or losing symbol) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (see Figures 7(B) and 7(C)), and this processing ends.

[Special Symbol Determination Process] As shown in Figure 23, the special symbol determination process (S906) first determines whether the special symbol stop time (predetermined determination time) has elapsed (S1601). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1601), this process immediately ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1601), the game status management process described below is performed (S1602).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1603). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1603), the special operation status is set to "4" (S1604). The game control microcomputer 81 then determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1605). If it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1607, but if it is ON, the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1606) and the process proceeds to step S1607. As a result, the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state during the execution of a jackpot game. In this embodiment, the game is always in a low base state when not in a time-saving state, so the game is also controlled to a low base state during the execution of a jackpot game.

After that, to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command is set (S1607), and the opening of the jackpot game begins (S1608). Following step S1608, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 9 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been won (S1609-1). At this time, the value of the jackpot opening counter, which counts the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened during the special game, is set to a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that has been won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data corresponding to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

Then, the game control microcomputer 81 selects and sets the output mode of the jackpot signal in the jackpot start external terminal setting process (S1609-2). Specifically, in this embodiment, the output state of the jackpot signal is selected to ON depending on the start of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the big win flag is not ON in step S1603 (NO in S1603), it is then determined whether the small win flag is ON (S1610). If the small win flag is ON (YES in S1610), the special operation status is set to "5" (S1611). Note that if the small win flag is ON, the time-saving flag is not set to OFF even if it is ON. Thereafter, to start the small win game, a small win opening command is set (S1612), and the opening of the small win game begins (S1613).

Following step S1613, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 8 for details) according to the type of small win that has been won (S1614). At this time, the value of the large prize opening counter is set to a value according to the type of small win that has been won. The game control microcomputer 81 then turns the distribution member activation flag ON (S1615) and ends this processing. The distribution member activation flag is a flag that indicates that the period in which the distribution member 71 is to be activated is in progress. In other words, in this embodiment, the activation of the distribution member 71 begins with the opening of the small win game.

If the small win flag is not ON in step S1610 (NO in S1610), neither the big win game nor the small win game will start, so the special operation status is set to "1" (S1616) and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Process] As shown in FIG. 24, the game status management process (S1602) first determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1701). If it is ON, the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of special symbol variations executed during the time-saving state, is decremented by 1 (S1702), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1703). If it is "0," the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1704). Note that in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the value of the time-saving counter is set to "1" when the machine transitions to the time-saving state. This point will be described later. Then, in step S1705, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game status designation command containing information about the currently set game status in the output buffer of RAM 84, and ends this process.

[Special Electric Device Processing 1 (Jackpot Game)] Special electric device processing 1 is processing for executing a jackpot game (second special game), such as a type 1 jackpot game or a type 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 25, special electric device processing 1 (S908) first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2001). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that all openings of the first special winning device 31 have been completed in the jackpot game in which a win has been won.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether the first large prize opening 30 is currently open (i.e., whether the first large prize device 31 is currently open) (S2002). If it is not currently open (NO in S2002), it is determined whether the time has come to open the first large prize opening 30, i.e., whether the opening time for the jackpot has elapsed and it is time to start opening the first large prize opening 30, or whether the interval time between openings has elapsed and it is time to start the next opening (S2003).

If the determination result in step S2003 is NO, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2003 is YES, the first large prize opening 30 is opened according to the set opening pattern (S2004).

If the first major prize opening 30 is open in step S2002 (YES in S2002), it is determined whether the number of prizes won through the first major prize opening 30 in that unit open game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (10 in this embodiment) (S2005). If the specified number of prizes has not been reached (NO in S2005), it is determined whether it is time to close the first major prize opening 30 (i.e., whether the specified opening time (see Figure 9) has passed since the first major prize opening 30 was opened) (S2006). If the opening time for the first major prize opening 30 has not passed (NO in S2006), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S2005) or if the opening time of the first large prize opening 30 has elapsed (YES in S2006), i.e., if either of the two opening termination conditions is met, the first large prize opening 30 is closed (blocked) (S2007). Then, the value of the large prize opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2008), and it is determined whether the value of the large prize opening counter is "0" (S2009). If it is not "0" (NO in S2009), the process ends and the next opening begins.

On the other hand, if the value is "0" (YES in S2009), a jackpot ending command (see Figure 8) is set (S2010) to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending is initiated (S2011). The jackpot ending time is set by the game control microcomputer 81 in the jackpot ending process (S2010) based on the type of special symbol shown in Figure 8 and the game status at the time of winning. The jackpot ending flag is then set and the process is terminated (S2012). For example, in the jackpot ending process (S2010), if the game status at the time of winning is in the non-time-saving mode and the type of special symbol is either "Special Symbol 1_Jackpot Symbol A" or "Special Symbol 1_Jackpot Symbol B," the jackpot ending time is set to 15,000 ms. Also, for example, in the jackpot end processing (S2010), if the game state at the time of winning is in the time-saving mode and the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol C," the jackpot ending time is set to 3000 ms. Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot end processing (S2010), if the game state at the time of winning is in the time-saving mode and the special symbol type is either "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C" or "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol E," the jackpot ending time is set to 5000 ms. Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot end processing (S2010), if the game state at the time of winning is in the time-saving mode and the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D," the jackpot ending time is set to 13000 ms.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2001 (YES in S2001), all openings of the first major winning slots 30 during the jackpot game have been completed, so it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (S2013). If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2013), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2013), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2014) and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2015). Then, after setting the special operation status to "1" (S2016-1), the jackpot end external terminal setting process (S2016-2) is performed, followed by the game status setting process (S2017) described below, and this process ends. In the jackpot end external terminal setting process (S2016-2), the output mode of the jackpot signal is selected and set. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the output mode of the jackpot signal is selected to be OFF upon the end of the jackpot game.

Here, referring to Figure 68, we will explain the jackpot game in which the first large prize opening 30 (opening/closing member 32) is opened if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot win. In this embodiment, for example, if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 68(A), once the stop time of the special symbol (500 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed, the execution of the jackpot game begins in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened, as shown in Figure 68(B). First, the opening time of the jackpot game begins. Note that the opening time of the jackpot game is 5000 ms. Note that Figure 68(A) shows the timing of the changing and stopping display of the special symbol to make it easier to understand the timing of the start of the jackpot game.

The opening pattern shown in Figure 68 (B) is the opening pattern that will be selected regardless of whether the "10-hour short jackpot B" or "10R regular jackpot B" is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 (see Figure 8).

More specifically, the opening pattern selected regardless of whether the "10-Hour Shortened Jackpot B" or "10R Regular Jackpot B" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2 is an opening pattern in which a 5000 ms opening is performed before the first round of play begins, followed by a round of play in which the first large prize slot 30 is opened once per round from round 1 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and then a 5000 ms ending is performed after the final round of play has ended. In other words, the jackpot play executed in this opening pattern includes an opening time (5000 ms), a round of play in which the first large prize slot 30 is opened once per round from round 1 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending time (5000 ms).

The opening pattern shown in Figure 68 (C) is the opening pattern that will be selected even if you win the "10-Hour Shortened Big Win C" in the Special Chart 2 lottery (see Figure 8).

More specifically, even if the "10-Hour Shortened Big Win C" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2, the opening pattern selected is an opening pattern in which an opening takes place for 5,000 ms before the first round of play begins, followed by a round of play in which the first large prize slot 30 is opened once per round from round 1 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending of 13,000 ms after the final round of play has ended. In other words, the big prize play executed in this opening pattern includes an opening time (5,000 ms), a round of play in which the first large prize slot 30 is opened once per round from round 1 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending time (13,000 ms).

[Game Status Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 26, the game status setting process (S2017) first determines whether the jackpot game currently executed is a jackpot game triggered by winning a time-saving jackpot (i.e., "10R Time-Shortened Jackpot A," "10R Time-Shortened Jackpot B," "10R Time-Shortened Small Jackpot A," or "10R Time-Shortened Small Jackpot B"; see FIG. 8) (S2101). If the determination result in step S2101 is YES, the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2102), the time-saving counter is set to "1" (S2103), a game status designation command including information on the currently set game status is set in the output buffer of RAM 84 (S2104), and this process ends. By turning ON the time-saving flag and setting the time-saving counter to "1," the game status after this jackpot game becomes a time-saving state and a high base state (advantageous game state). This advantageous gaming state ends when either the variable display of the special symbol is performed once, or the next jackpot is won. However, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, the combined probability of winning a jackpot based on the drawing of special symbol 2 and the probability of winning a small jackpot based on the drawing of special symbol 2 is 1/1, so the advantageous gaming state does not end with the variable display of the special symbol being performed once. On the other hand, if it is determined that the currently executed jackpot game is a regular win (i.e., a "10R regular jackpot" or a 10R regular small jackpot; see Figure 8), that is, if the determination result in step S2101 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2104 without performing steps S2102 and S2103, and this process ends.

[Special Electric Device Processing 2 (Small Win Game)] Special electric device processing 2 is processing for executing a small win game (first special game) that opens the second large win device 36 equipped with a specific area 39. As shown in Figures 27 and 28, special electric device processing 2 (S909) first determines whether the small win end flag is ON (S2301). The small win end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second large win device 36 has finished during the small win game.

If the small win end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether the second large prize opening 35 is currently open (i.e., whether the second large prize device 36 is currently open) (S2302). If it is not currently open (NO in S2302), it is determined whether the time has come to open the second large prize opening 35, i.e., whether the specified pre-opening interval (small win opening) has elapsed and it is time to start opening the second large prize opening 35 (S2303).

If the determination result in step S2303 is NO, processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2303 is YES, the second large prize opening 35 is opened according to the opening pattern (see Figure 9) corresponding to the type of small prize that has been won (S2304).

If the second large prize opening 35 is open in step S2302 (YES in S2302), it is determined whether the number of prizes won through the second large prize opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (10 in this embodiment) (S2305). If the specified number of prizes has not been reached (NO in S2305), it is determined whether the time has come to close the second large prize opening 35 (i.e., whether the total open time of the second large prize opening 35 in one small prize game has exceeded a specified time (1.6 seconds in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 8)) (S2306). Then, if the total open time of the second large prize opening 35 has not exceeded the specified time (NO in S2306), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the specified number of winnings has been reached (YES in S2305) or the opening time of the second large prize opening 35 has elapsed (YES in S2306), i.e., if either of the two opening end conditions is met, the second large prize opening 35 is closed (blocked) (S2307). Then, the value of the large prize opening counter is decremented by 1 (S2308), and the small prize end flag is set (S2309), and this processing ends.

Also, if the small win end flag is ON in step S2301 (YES in S2301), as shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether a predetermined time (post-closing interval) has elapsed since the second large prize opening 35 was closed during the small win game (S2310), and if the post-closing interval has not elapsed (NO in S2310), processing ends. The post-closing interval for the small win game will be described later. On the other hand, if the post-closing interval has elapsed (YES in S2310), the small win end flag is turned OFF (S2311), the small win flag is turned OFF (S2312), and processing proceeds to step S2313.

In step S2313, it is determined whether the V flag is ON. The V flag indicates that a gaming ball has passed through the specific area 39 during the execution of a small win game, and is a flag that is turned ON in step S2603 (see Figure 30), which will be described later. If this V flag is not ON (NO in S2313), a Type 2 big win game will not be executed, so the value of the big prize opening counter is cleared to "0" (S2314), the special operation status is set to "1" (S2315), and processing ends.

On the other hand, if the V flag is ON (YES in S2313), the game control microcomputer 81 turns the V flag OFF (S2317), turns the jackpot flag ON (S2318), and sets the special operation status to "4" (S2319) to execute a Type 2 jackpot game. Next, if the time-reduction flag is ON (YES in S2320), the time-reduction flag is turned OFF (S2321). Then, a jackpot opening command is set (S2322), and the jackpot opening begins (S2323). This transitions from a small jackpot game, in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened for a short period of time, to a Type 2 jackpot game. After step S2323, an external terminal setting process at the start of a jackpot (S2324) is performed. In the external terminal setting process at the start of a jackpot (S2324), the output mode of the jackpot signal is selected and set. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output mode of the jackpot signal is selected to be ON in response to the start of a jackpot game.

[Distributing Member Control Processing] The game control microcomputer 81 performs the distributing member control processing (S107) following the special action processing (S106) (see FIG. 13). In the distributing member control processing (S107), as shown in FIG. 29, it first determines whether the distributing member activation flag is ON (S2501). If the distributing member activation flag is not ON, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the distributing member activation flag is ON, the opening of the small win game has begun (see FIG. 23), so the distributing member activation processing (S2502) is performed to activate the distributing member 71 in a predetermined activation pattern, and the V valid period setting processing (S2503) is also performed.

In the distributing member operation process (S2502), a timer is set to measure the operation time of the distributing member 71. Based on the timing measured using the timer, the distributing member solenoid 73 is turned ON when the timing for the distributing member 71 to open is reached, and the distributing member solenoid 73 is turned OFF when the timing for the distributing member 71 to close is reached. As a result, the distributing member 71 operates in a constant manner from the start of the opening of the small win game.

For example, the distribution member 71 is first controlled to a passage-blocking state (the state shown by the dashed line in Figure 2) from the start of the opening of the small win game, and then controlled to a passage-permitting state (the state shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 2) when the second large prize opening 35 is opened for the fourth time in one small win game, so that the passage of the game ball can be detected by the specific area sensor 39a.

In addition, in the V effective period setting process (S2503), a V effective period is set for a certain operation of the sorting member 71 as described above. The V effective period is the period during which, when a detection by the specific area sensor 39a occurs, the detection is considered valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V effective period lasts from the start of opening of the specific area 39 (the point at which the sorting member 71 is controlled to a passing-permitting state) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the specific area 39 (the time during which the sorting member 71 is controlled to a passing-permitting state). This takes into account the time lag between when a gaming ball passes through the placement position of the sorting member 71 and when it reaches the specific area 39.

Specifically, in the V valid period setting process (S2503), a timer is set to measure the V valid period, and based on the timing using the timer, the V valid flag is turned ON when it is time to enable the specific area 39, and the V valid flag is turned OFF when it is time to disable the specific area 39. Note that in step S2602 of the specific area sensor detection process (S108) described below, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress by determining whether or not this V valid flag is ON.

Following the V valid period setting process (S2503), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the operation of the distribution member 71 has ended (S2504). Specifically, based on the timer for measuring the operation time of the distribution member 71 set in step S2502, it determines whether the total operation time from when the distribution member 71 starts to when it ends a certain operation has elapsed. If the operation of the distribution member 71 has not ended, this process ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the distribution member 71 has ended, the distribution member operation flag is turned OFF (S2505) and then this process ends.

Here, based on Figure 67, we will explain the relationship between the small win game in which the second large prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 37) is opened and the type 2 large prize game in which the first large prize opening 30 (opening/closing member 32) is opened. In this mode, for example, if the lottery result for special symbol 2 is a small win, as shown in Figure 67(A), once the stop time of the special symbol (500 ms in this mode) has elapsed, the execution of the small win game in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened will begin as shown in Figure 67(B). First, the opening of the small win game begins. Note that the opening time for the small win game is 8 ms. Note that Figure 67(A) shows the timing of the changing and stopping display of the special symbol to make it easier to understand the timing of the start of the small win game.

The opening pattern shown in Figure 67 (B) is the opening pattern that is selected when a small prize is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2. In other words, it is the opening pattern that is selected when either a "10-time short-time small prize A," a "10R short-time small prize B," or a "10R regular small prize" is won (see Figure 8). This opening pattern is a passing opening pattern (first passing opening pattern) that allows passage to specific area 39.

More specifically, this first pass-through opening pattern is an opening pattern in which the second large prize opening 35 is closed for 8 ms, followed by multiple openings (six times in this embodiment) of the second large prize opening 35, resulting in the second large prize opening 35 being closed for 6,000 ms. In other words, the small prize game executed using this opening pattern includes an opening in which the second large prize opening 35 is closed for 8 ms, a small prize opening game in which the second large prize opening 35 is opened and closed multiple times (six times in this embodiment) for a total opening time of 1,600 ms, and a post-closing interval in which the second large prize opening 35 is closed for 6,000 ms. Note that in this embodiment, the second large prize opening 35 is opened and closed six times in the small prize game, but it may be opened and closed less than six times or seven times or more as long as it does not interfere with gameplay. However, in this case, the total opening time of the second large prize slot 35 during small prize play must be within 1.8 seconds.

When the second large prize opening 35 is opened in this opening pattern, the distribution member 71 is in a state where it allows passage so that the specific area sensor 39a can detect the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 35 when the second large prize opening 35 is opened for the fourth time during the small prize opening game (see Figure 67 (D)). In this embodiment, the second large prize opening device 36 and other devices are arranged so that, if game balls are continuously fired by right-hand hits, a game ball will always enter the second large prize opening 35 during the 1.6-second opening period. Furthermore, the time required for a game ball that has passed through the second large prize opening 35 to reach the position of the distribution member 71 is shorter than 3000 ms (the time from when the second large prize opening 35 closes to when the distribution member 71 finishes opening).

When the specific area sensor 39a detects that a game ball that entered the second large prize opening 35 during a small prize game has passed through the specific area 39 (see Figure 67 (D)), after the small prize game has finished, the execution of a type 2 jackpot game begins, in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened, as shown in Figure 67 (C). First, the opening time for the type 2 jackpot game begins. The opening time for the small prize game is 1,300 ms.

More specifically, there are two types of opening patterns for Type 2 jackpot games: one jackpot opening pattern that is selected regardless of whether the "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A" or "10R Regular Small Win" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2, and one that is selected even if the "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2 (see Figure 8).

The jackpot opening pattern selected regardless of whether the "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A" or "10R Normal Small Win" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2 is an opening pattern in which an opening takes place for 5000 ms before the first round of play begins, followed by round play in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round from round 2 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending of 5000 ms after the final round of play has ended. In other words, the jackpot play executed in this opening pattern includes an opening time (5000 ms), a round play in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round from round 2 to round 10 with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending time (5000 ms).

In addition, even if the "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B" is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2, the selected jackpot opening pattern is an opening pattern in which an opening takes place for 5,000 ms before the first round of play begins, followed by rounds from the second round through the tenth round in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and an ending of 13,000 ms after the final round of play has ended. In other words, the jackpot play executed in this opening pattern includes the opening time (5,000 ms), the rounds in which the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round from the second round through the tenth round with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, and the ending time (13,000 ms).

In addition, in this embodiment, during a small win game, the number of game balls entering the second large prize device 36 is counted based on detection by the second large prize opening sensor 35a, and the number of game balls ejected from the second large prize device 36 is counted based on detection by the specific area sensor 39a or the non-specific area sensor 70a. In other words, in this embodiment, the specific area sensor 39a and the non-specific area sensor 70a also function as ejection opening sensors that count the number of game balls ejected from the second large prize device 36. If the two count values do not match at the end of a certain period of operation of the distribution member 71, an error notification is issued. Note that the operation of the distribution member 71 may be stopped when the two count values match after the second large prize opening 35 is closed. This allows the display of the special symbols to begin smoothly after the second large prize opening 35 is closed.

[Specific Area Sensor Detection Processing] Returning to the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the specific area sensor detection processing (S108) following the distribution member control processing (S107) (see Figure 13). In the specific area sensor detection processing (S108), as shown in Figure 30, first, it is determined whether a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2601). If no detection has occurred (NO in S2601), the processing is terminated. However, if detection has occurred (YES in S2601), it is determined whether the V valid period is in progress (S2602). The V valid period is the period set in the V valid period setting processing (S2503) in the distribution member control processing (Figure 29) described above.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is in progress (YES in S2602), the V flag is turned ON (S2603), a V passing command is set (S2604), and processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2602 that the V valid period is not in progress (NO in S2602), the specific area sensor detection processing ends without performing the processing of steps S2603 and S2604. The V passing command is a command that causes the sub-control board 90 to notify of V passing (passing through the specific area 39).

6. Operation of the Presentation Control Microcomputer 91 Next, the operation of the presentation control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to Figures 31 to 39. The counters, timers, flags, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the presentation control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. The RAM 94 in this embodiment is provided with a LOGO bonus presentation counter that stores the number of times a LOGO standard bonus presentation, which will be described later, has been executed and the number of times a jackpot game presentation has been executed at the time of the first win (when a jackpot game in a non-time-saving mode is won that allows a transition to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game), a LOGO 1500 bonus presentation counter that stores the number of times a LOGO 1500 bonus presentation, which will be described later, a LOGO 3000 bonus presentation counter that counts the number of times a LOGO 3000 bonus presentation, which will be described later, has been executed, and a LOGO through-out bonus presentation counter that counts the number of times a LOGO through-out bonus presentation, which will be described later, has been executed.

The LOGO standard bonus effects (special effects, first special effects) are winning game effects (small win game effects and big win game effects) that correspond to the LOGO standard mode (first effect mode) of the three specific game state effect modes described below. Each time the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning game (small win game, big win game), and a big win game is executed, the winning game effects (small win game effects, big win game effects) are executed in conjunction with the execution of that big win game. In other words, the LOGO standard bonus effects function as effects that suggest to the player that one winning game (small win game, big win game) will be executed. A specific gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a LOGO rush state) is a state in which, when a player wins a win (small win, big win) that is controlled to the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends in a non-time-saving state, and the lottery result on Special Chart 2 becomes a time-saving win (time-saving big win, time-saving small win) between the transition to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game and the end of the control to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is played, and the transition to the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game is likely to occur consecutively. Also, a specific gaming state presentation mode is a presentation mode that indicates a specific gaming state.

The LOGO3000 bonus effects (special effects, confirmation effects, second special effects) are winning game effects (small win game effects, jackpot game effects) that are executed in conjunction with a potential winning game (small win game, jackpot game) when the LOGO3000 mode (second presentation mode) is set among the three specific game state presentation modes and the LOGO3000 bonus effect is not being executed, and the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning win (small win win, jackpot win). Furthermore, the LOGO3000 bonus effect functions as an effect that indicates to the player that the time-saving state will be entered after the end of a jackpot game, and that the lottery result on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state controlled after the end of a jackpot game is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot), confirming the execution of the next jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). In this embodiment, the LOGO3000 bonus effect is divided into a first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect and a second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. If the LOGO3000 bonus effect is not being executed while the LOGO3000 mode is set, and the lottery result for special symbol 2 is a time-saving win (time-saving big win, time-saving small win), the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins to be executed in conjunction with the executed jackpot game. Then, when the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect ends and the lottery result for the next special symbol is a win (small win, big win), the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins to be executed in conjunction with the executed jackpot game. In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect and the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect create a bonus effect that suggests to the player that two jackpot games have been played as if one jackpot game had been played.

The LOGO1500 bonus effect (special effect, first special effect) is a winning game effect (small win game effect, jackpot game effect) that can be executed in conjunction with a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) that is executed when the LOGO3000 mode (second effect mode) is set among the three specific game state effect modes and the LOGO3000 bonus effect is not being executed, and the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning game (small win game, jackpot game). The LOGO1500 bonus effect functions as an effect that suggests to the player that one winning game (small win game, jackpot game) will be executed.

Next, the LOGO through-out bonus effect (suggestion effect, second special effect) is a bonus effect that can be shown to the player as a series of effects (variable effect and jackpot game effect) that are performed from the start of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 in the specific game state is a winning win (small win, jackpot win) and the execution ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a "10R normal jackpot A" or "normal small win".When the LOGO through-out mode is set out of the three specific game state effect modes, the effects that are performed from the start of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a "10R normal jackpot A" or "normal small win" and the execution of the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state. In addition, the LOGO through-out bonus effect functions as an effect that suggests to the player that the one or more winning games that occur from the start of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning win (small win, big win) in a specific game state until the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a "10R normal jackpot A" or "normal small win" and the execution of the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state is a single winning game (small win game, big win game).

[Sub-control main processing] When the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads the sub-control main processing program shown in Figure 31 from the ROM 93 and executes it. As shown in the figure, the sub-control main processing first performs power-on processing in response to power-on (S4001). The power-on processing includes, for example, setting the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update processing (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters used to make judgments regarding various effects are updated. As an example, the method for updating the effect determination random number counters for various effects can be the same as the random number update processing performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating, the random number values may be incremented by 2 rather than by 1. This is also true for the random number update processing performed by the main control board 80 described above.

Once the random number update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process (S4004), various commands stored in the output buffer in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 100 displays an image on the display screen 7a (display unit) in accordance with the received command (performing various image-based effects). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 100, the sub-control board 90 also outputs audio from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 (performing various audio-based sound effects), illuminates the board lamp 5 and frame lamp 66 via the lamp control board 107 (performing various light-emitting effects through illumination), and activates the board movable body 15 (performing various movable body effects through operation). In this way, various effects (variation effects, hold effects, movable object effects, operation effects, pre-reading effects, other preview effects, small win game effects (opening effects, release game effects, and ending effects associated with small win games), big win game effects (opening effects, release game effects, and ending effects associated with big win games), customer waiting effects, control of effect modes, etc.) are realized.

The performance control microcomputer 91 then enables interrupts (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed.

The receive interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a command sent from the main control board 80 is input to the performance control microcomputer 91. In the receive interrupt process (S4010), the performance control microcomputer 91 stores the various commands sent and received by the output process (S101) of the main control board 80 in a receive buffer in RAM 94. This receive interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1 ms timer interrupt processing] The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 ms period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in Figure 32, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) sequentially performs input processing (S4101), light emission data output processing (S4102), movable body control processing (S4103), and watchdog timer processing (S4104).

The input process detects operation of player-operable controls such as the effect button detection switch 63a and the select button detection switch 64a, and sets commands and creates effect data based on the detection results. The light-emission data output process outputs light-emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 to illuminate lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 at timings that match the image effects, etc., based on the effect data created in the input process and the effect data creation process described below. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light-emission pattern in accordance with the light-emission data. The movable body control process outputs drive data to perform movable body effects that operate movable bodies such as the board movable body 15 at predetermined timings based on the effect data created in the input process and the effect data creation process described below. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs movable body effects that operate the board movable body 15 in a predetermined operating pattern in accordance with the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer.

[10 ms timer interrupt processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) is executed each time a 10 ms periodic interrupt pulse is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in Figure 33, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) sequentially performs the following processes: received command analysis processing (S4201), performance timer update processing (S4202), audio control processing (S4203), and performance data creation processing (S4204), which will be described later.

In the received command analysis process, the command stored in the receive buffer of RAM 94 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, selecting an effect, setting an effect mode, setting a command, etc.) is performed. In the effect timer update process, the timer used to measure the time related to each effect is updated. For example, in the effect timer update process, the start and end timings of the effective operation periods of operation units such as the effect button 63 and select button 64 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the audio output from the speaker 67) is created and output to the audio control board 106 based on the results of the input process and received command analysis process. In the effect data creation process, effect data is created based on the results of the received command analysis process.

[Received Command Analysis Processing] Next, the received command analysis processing (S4201) will be described in detail with reference to Figure 34. In the received command analysis processing (S4201), as shown in Figure 34, the presentation control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If a game state designation command has been received (YES in S4401), the microcomputer 91 performs the mode status setting processing (S4402) described below. If a time-reduction end command has not been received (NO in S4401), the microcomputer 91 proceeds directly to step S4403.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a start winning command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if so, performs start winning processing (S4404). In start winning processing (S4404), the start winning command is analyzed, and based on the analysis results, a lottery is performed for a pre-reading performance such as a so-called hold change notice or a consecutive notice, and a pre-reading performance start command corresponding to the lottery result is set in the output buffer of RAM 94.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if so, performs the fluctuation performance start process (S4406). In the fluctuation performance start process (S4406), the fluctuation start command is analyzed and a fluctuation performance pattern (content) is selected based on the analysis results. The fluctuation performance start command for starting the fluctuation performance with the selected fluctuation performance pattern is then set in the output buffer of RAM 94. The content of the fluctuation performance will be explained in detail later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if so, performs the variation effect end process (S4408). In the variation effect end process (S4408), the variation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis results, a variation effect end command for definitively displaying the stopped effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is set in the output buffer of RAM 94. Note that if a variation stop command for a small win variation of special chart 2 (a variation based on a small win) is received in non-time-saving mode or time-saving mode B, a command for executing a right-hit notification effect that notifies the player that a right hit should result in a win in the second large prize slot 35 is also set in the output buffer of RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if so, performs opening effect selection processing (S4410). In the opening effect selection processing (S4410), the opening command is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the special game is selected. An opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is then set in the output buffer of RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a round play command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if so, performs round play selection processing (S4412). In the round play selection processing (S4412), the round play command is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, the round play pattern (contents) to be executed during the round play of the special game is selected. Then, a round play start command to start the round play with the selected round play pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4413), and if so, performs ending effect selection processing (S4414). In the ending effect selection processing (S4414), the ending command is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command to start the ending effect using the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM 94.

Next, as other processing (S4415), processing based on received commands other than the above commands is performed, and the received command analysis processing is completed. For example, in other processing (S4415), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether a V-passing command has been received from the main control board 80, and if so, sets a V-passing notification effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start the V-passing notification effect. The V-passing notification effect is an effect to notify the player that a V-passing (passing into the specific area 39) has occurred. In this embodiment, this is an effect in which a predetermined V-passing notification image (e.g., a character image showing the letter "V") is displayed on the display screen 7a. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, which executes a type 2 jackpot game based on passing into the specific area 39, the display of the character image "V" as this V-passing notification effect also serves as a notification of a jackpot win. Note that the V-passing notification effect may take other forms, such as outputting a special sound effect from the speaker 67.

[2. Mode Status Setting Process]
The mode status setting process (S4403) shown in FIG. 35 is a process for changing the presentation mode setting in response to a change to the game state. In the mode status setting process (S4403), the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status to "1" when the normal presentation mode is selected when the game is in a non-time-saving mode. Furthermore, when the result of the lottery for special chart 1 in a non-time-saving mode is LOGO standard mode for the ending presentation of a jackpot game based on a 10R time-saving jackpot A, and the game is in a time-saving mode, the microcomputer 91 sets the mode status to "2." Furthermore, when the result of the lottery for special chart 1 in a non-time-saving mode is LOGO 3000 mode for the ending presentation of a jackpot game based on a 10R time-saving jackpot A, and the game is in a time-saving mode, the microcomputer 91 sets the mode status to "3." In addition, when the lottery result of Special Chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is the 10R time-saving jackpot A, and the LOGO through-out mode is selected in the ending performance of the jackpot game, and when the time-saving state is controlled, if the LOGO through-out mode is set as the specific game state performance mode, the mode status is set to "4". The mode status is initially set to "1".

Here, the presentation mode refers to a category of presentation (or a higher-level conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to have three presentation modes: a customer waiting presentation mode, a normal presentation mode, and a specific game state presentation mode.

The customer waiting presentation mode can be set when variable presentations are not being performed in the "non-time-saving state" or "time-saving state," and is a presentation mode that indicates a standby state in which variable presentations are not being performed. A customer waiting presentation is performed when the customer waiting presentation mode is set. In a customer waiting presentation, for example, a customer waiting demo video introducing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when the presentation button 63 is operated while the customer waiting demo video is being displayed, a settings screen is displayed for configuring the presentation settings for the pachinko gaming machine 1. Presentation settings include the volume setting for the sound output from the speaker 67, the brightness setting for the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the frequency setting for the presentations that are executed.

The normal presentation mode can be set when a variable presentation is being performed in the "non-time-saving state," and is a presentation mode that indicates that the state is not time-saving. For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (A), the normal presentation mode includes a normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting a daytime mountain scene (normal daytime background image G102) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By performing one or more variable presentations without winning a jackpot, it is possible to switch to another normal presentation mode that can be set when a variable presentation is being performed in the "non-time-saving state." The normal presentation modes include a normal early presentation mode before a reach is achieved in the variable presentation, and a normal late presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the normal early presentation mode, the normal daytime background image G102 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while in the normal late presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The specific game state presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a variable presentation is being performed in the "time-saving state" and when a "win game (small win game, jackpot game)" is being performed. It is a presentation mode that indicates that the normal probability state and time-saving state are in effect, or that a win game (small win game, jackpot game) is being performed. Specific game state presentation modes include LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode. For example, depending on the specific game state presentation mode, dedicated background images (LOGO standard background image G120, LOGO 3000 background image G129, LOGO 3000 enemy character background image TK, LOGO through-out background image G130, through-out bonus presentation image G132) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while the variable presentation is being performed. Additionally, for example, depending on the specific game state presentation mode, a dedicated background image (a background image corresponding to standard mode, a background image corresponding to LOGO 3000 mode, or a background image corresponding to LOGO through-out mode) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the execution of a winning game presentation (small winning game presentation, big winning game presentation). Furthermore, each specific game state presentation mode may have a specific game state early presentation mode before a reach is established, and a specific game state late presentation mode after a reach is established, in the variable presentation. For example, in the specific game state early presentation mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while in the time-saving late presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach may be displayed. It should be noted that the types of presentation modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

As shown in Figure 35, in the mode status setting process (S4402), the effect control microcomputer 91 first references the currently set mode status (S4501). Next, it analyzes the received game state designation command (S4502). Next, it updates the value information of various effect counters based on the information contained in the received command (time-saving counter value information, ON/OFF of the time-saving flag) (S4503). Specifically, it updates the value of the time-saving effect counter stored in RAM 94 based on the time-saving counter value information.

Next, it determines whether or not to change the mode status based on the game status designation command (S4504). That is, it determines whether the game status information (time-saving counter value information, ON/OFF status of the time-saving flag) included in the analyzed game status designation command differs from the game status information based on the mode status referenced in S4501. If it determines that the mode status should be changed (YES in S4504), proceed to S4505. On the other hand, if it determines that the mode status should not be changed (NO in S4504), this process ends.

In S4505, it is determined whether the game state information included in the game state designation command analyzed in S4502 is information about a non-time-saving state. If it is information about a non-time-saving state (YES in S4505), the mode status is set to "1" (S4506), and a left-hit display command is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4507-1). As a result, when the left-hit display command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a left-hit image (not shown) in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time. By displaying this left-hit image, it is possible to encourage the player to hit left when the game transitions to a non-time-saving state.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the result display command in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4507-2). When the result display command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a result display image RH (standard result display image RH1, LOGO3000 result display image RH2, through-out result display image RH3) in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). By displaying this result display image RH, the player is shown the number of bonus effect executions corresponding to the specific game state presentation mode selected from the three specific game state presentation modes, and the number of prize balls the player has won in the special game state, allowing the player to grasp the number of bonus effect executions and the number of prize balls won in the special game state.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 resets the values of the LOGO bonus effect counter, LOGO 3000 bonus effect counter, LOGO 1500 bonus effect counter, and LOGO through-out bonus effect counter stored in RAM 94 to "0" (S4507-3).

After passing through S4507-3, the process proceeds to S4516, where a background effect command based on the normal effect mode setting is set in the output buffer of RAM 94. When this background effect command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 will, for example, display a daytime normal background image G102 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 if the normal effect mode is set, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-1). In this way, the display of the daytime normal background image G102 allows the player to understand that the effect mode is set to normal effect mode.

If S4505 returns NO, the process determines whether the lottery result for Special Chart 1 in the non-time-saving mode indicates that the presentation mode selected for the ending presentation of the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot A is LOGO standard mode (S4508). If LOGO standard mode is selected (YES in S4508), the mode status is set to "2" (S4509), a right-hit display command is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4510-1), the value of the LOGO bonus presentation counter is incremented by 1 (S4510-2), and the process proceeds to step S4516. When the right-hit display command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a right-hit image G108 in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying this right-hit image G108 can encourage the player to make a right hit.

After passing through S4510-2, the process proceeds to S4516, where a background effect command based on the LOGO standard mode setting is set in the output buffer of RAM 94. When this background effect command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the LOGO standard background image G120 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the display of the LOGO standard background image G120 allows the player to understand that the effect mode is set to LOGO standard mode (time-saving state).

Also, if S4508 returns NO, the process determines whether the presentation mode selected for the ending presentation of the jackpot game based on the 10R time-saving jackpot A lottery result for Special Chart 1 in the non-time-saving state is LOGO 3000 mode (S4511). If LOGO 3000 mode is selected (YES in S4511), the mode status is set to "3" (S4512), a right-hit display command is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4513), and the process proceeds to step S4516. As a result, when the right-hit display command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a right-hit image G108 in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying this right-hit image G108, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right. After step S4513, the effect control microcomputer 91 may increment the value of the LOGO1500 bonus effect counter by 1 and proceed to step S4516.

After passing through S4513, processing proceeds to S4516, where a background effect command based on the LOGO3000 mode setting is set in the output buffer of RAM 94. When this background effect command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the LOGO3000 background image G129 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the display of the LOGO3000 background image G129 allows the player to understand that the effect mode is set to LOGO3000 mode (time-saving state).

Also, if S4511 returns NO, i.e., if the lottery result for Special Chart 1 in the non-time-saving state indicates that the presentation mode selected for the ending presentation of a jackpot game based on a 10R time-saving jackpot A is LOGO through-out mode, the mode status is set to "4" (S4514), a right-hit display command is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4515), and the process proceeds to step S4516. When the right-hit display command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays a right-hit image G108 in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying this right-hit image G108 can prompt the player to make a right hit. After step S4515, the presentation control microcomputer 91 may increment the value of the LOGO through-out bonus presentation counter by 1 and proceed to step S4516. In this case, the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter may not be incremented by 1 in step S4710.

After passing through S4515, the process proceeds to S4516, where a background effect command based on the setting of the LOGO through-out mode is set in the output buffer of RAM 94. When this background effect command is sent to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the LOGO through-out background image G130 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the display of the LOGO through-out background image G130 allows the player to understand that the effect mode is set to the LOGO through-out mode (time-shortened state).

[Variable Presentation Start Processing] As shown in Figure 36, in the variable presentation start processing (S4406), the presentation control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variable presentation start command (S4601). The variable presentation start command contains information about the variable presentation pattern set in the special chart 2 variable presentation pattern selection processing (S1003) or the special chart 1 variable presentation pattern selection processing (S1009). The variable presentation pattern information includes game status information that specifies the current game status, and pattern information that specifies the pattern as the determination result of the special chart 1 or special chart 2 jackpot determination processing (see Figure 8). The game status information and pattern information acquired by the presentation control microcomputer 91 here can also be used as appropriate in subsequent processing.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects and sets a variable effect pattern table corresponding to the variable effect pattern indicated by the variable effect start command analyzed in step S4601 from among multiple variable effect pattern tables provided according to the variable effect pattern (S4602). Then, a variable effect pattern is selected based on this table (S4603). Once the variable effect pattern is determined, the details of the variable effect content are determined, including the duration of the variable effect, the variable display mode of the effect pattern, whether or not there will be a reach effect, the content of the reach effect, whether or not there will be an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 63 (button operation prompt effect), the content of the effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 63 (button operation prompt effect), the effect development configuration, and the type of background for the effect pattern.

Specifically, in step S4602, if the information included in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 indicates that the game state information is in the time-saving state and is information about the fluctuation pattern set in the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1003), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the fluctuation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 40 according to the specific game state presentation mode that has been set (S4602). Then, a fluctuation effect pattern is selected based on the fluctuation effect pattern table shown in FIG. 40 (S4603).

Also, in step S4602, if the information contained in the fluctuation start command analyzed in step S4601 is information about the fluctuation pattern set in the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1009), the performance control microcomputer 91 will select another fluctuation performance pattern.

At this time, a random number for determining the effect is also obtained and judged. This determines the type of variable effect to be performed, including the content of the preview effect, such as the so-called step-up preview effect or chance-up preview effect, and the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed as stopped symbols. Then, a variable effect start command for starting the variable effect with the selected variable effect pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM94 (S4604). Here, of the variable effect start commands, the variable effect start command for starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display of special chart 1 will be called the special chart 1 variable effect start command, and the variable effect start command for starting the variable effect in response to the start of the variable display of special chart 2 will be called the special chart 2 variable effect start command.

When the variable effect start command (special chart 1 variable effect start command, special chart 2 variable effect start command) set in step S4604 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the specified effect image from ROM 103 and performs the variable effect on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the LOGO standard mode is set as the specific game state presentation mode, a special symbol 2 variation start command for starting a variation presentation based on either variation presentation pattern Q1 or variation presentation pattern Q2 based on the variation presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40 (A) is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006). The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified presentation image from ROM 103, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in a variation presentation where normal variation is performed, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a big win or a small win, are definitely displayed stopped, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a big win or a small win, are also definitely displayed stopped (for example, see FIG. 52 (B)).

Specifically, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (A), when the special chart 2 variable pattern is "P31" while the LOGO standard mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern Q1 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and executes a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern Q1 (see Figures 52 (A) and 53 (A)). Thereafter, the presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a jackpot win, are definitively displayed as stopped, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a jackpot win or a small jackpot win, are also definitively displayed as stopped (see Figures 52 (B) and 53 (B)). On the other hand, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(A), when the special chart 2 variable pattern is "P32" while the LOGO standard mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern Q2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern Q2 is executed (see FIGS. 52(A) and 53(A)). Thereafter, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a jackpot win, are definitely displayed stopped, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a jackpot win or a small jackpot win, are also definitely displayed stopped (see FIGS. 52(B) and 53(B)).

When the LOGO3000 mode is set as the specific game state presentation mode, a special symbol 2 variation start command for starting a variation presentation based on one of the variation presentation patterns R1, R2, or R3 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006) based on the variation presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), the type of special symbol (see Figure 8), and whether or not the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is being executed.The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified presentation image from ROM 103, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which form a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a big win or a small win, are definitively displayed as stopped symbols in a variation presentation in which normal variation is performed.

Specifically, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special chart 2 variable pattern is "P31" and the special pattern type is "Special chart 2_jackpot pattern C", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is to be executed in the next jackpot game, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (D)), after which the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that constitute the stopping pattern (double number) indicating a jackpot win are also definitively displayed as stopped (see Figure 56 (E)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P31" and the type of special symbol is "special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next jackpot game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, the selection rate (selection rate) is 87.5%. A variable presentation pattern R1 is selected based on the selection ratio, and a variable presentation based on the variable presentation pattern R1 is executed (see Figures 55(A), 55(B-1), and 55(C-1)), and then the presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that constitute a stopping pattern suggesting a big win or a small win (a pattern showing "LOGO3000") are definitely displayed stopped, and the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that constitute a stopping pattern suggesting a big win (a double number) are also definitely displayed stopped (see Figure 55(D)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P31" and the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C", if the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next jackpot game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R3 with a selection rate (selection ratio) of 12.5%, and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R3 is executed (see Figures 55 (A) and 55 (B-2)), after which the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that constitute a stop pattern (double number) that indicates a jackpot win are definitely displayed stopped, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that constitute a stop pattern (double number) that indicates a jackpot win are also definitely displayed stopped (see Figure 55 (C-2)).

Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, regardless of whether the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P31" and the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D" or "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol E," when the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed in the next jackpot game, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and the variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 55 (D)), and then the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which form the stopping pattern (double number) indicating a jackpot win, are also definitively displayed as stopped (see Figure 55 (E)). Based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P31" and the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D" or "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol E", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next big win game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed, or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, When this occurs, variable presentation pattern R3 is selected with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R3 is executed (see Figures 55(A) and 55(B-2)). After that, the presentation image LB2 showing "LOGO 1500 BONUS," which suggests a big win or a small win, is displayed in a definite stopped state, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which make up the stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a big win, are also displayed in a definite stopped state (see Figure 55(C-2)).

Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set and the special pattern 2 variable pattern is "P32" and the type of special pattern is "Special pattern 2_small win pattern a", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed in the next small win game and big win game, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and the variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (D)), and then the small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that constitute the stopping pattern (double number) indicating a small win are also definitively displayed as stopped (see Figure 56 (E)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P32" and the type of special symbol is "special symbol 2_small win symbol a", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next big win game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed, or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects 87.5% of the time. Variable presentation pattern R1 is selected based on the selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R1 is executed (see Figures 55(A), 55(B-1), and 55(C-1)), after which presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, which constitute a stopping pattern suggesting a small win (a pattern showing "LOGO3000"), are definitively displayed as stopped, and small patterns KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern suggesting a small win (a double number), are also definitively displayed as stopped (see Figure 55(D)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P32" and the type of special symbol is "special symbol 2_small prize symbol a", if the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next big win game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R3 with a selection rate (selection ratio) of 12.5%, and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 55(A), FIG. 55(B-2)), and the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that constitute the stop pattern (double number) that suggests the small prize win are definitely displayed stopped, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that constitute the stop pattern (double number) that suggests the small prize win are also definitely displayed stopped (see FIG. 55(C-2)).

Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, regardless of whether the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P32" and the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_small win symbol b" or "Special symbol 2_small win symbol c," when the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed in the next big win game, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and the variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 55 (D)), and then the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a small win, are also definitively displayed as stopped symbols (see Figure 55 (E)). Based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the special symbol 2 variable pattern is "P32" and the type of special symbol is "special symbol 2_small winning symbol b" or "special symbol 2_small winning symbol c", if the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is not executed in the next big win game, that is, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed, or if the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is executed, When executing the bonus effect, variable effect pattern R3 is selected with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable effect based on variable effect pattern R3 is executed (see Figures 55 (A) and 55 (B-2)). After that, the effect image LB2 showing "LOGO 1500 BONUS," which suggests a small win, is displayed in a definite stopped state, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 that make up the stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a small win are also displayed in a definite stopped state (see Figure 55 (C-2)).

When the LOGO through-out mode is set as the specific game state presentation mode, a special symbol 2 variation start command for starting a variation presentation based on either variation presentation pattern S1 or variation presentation pattern S2 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006) based on the variation presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (C) and whether or not the LOGO through-out bonus presentation is being executed.The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified presentation image from ROM 103, and on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which form a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a big win or a small win, are definitively displayed as stopped symbols in a variation presentation in which normal variation is performed.

Specifically, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (C), when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the special chart 2 variable pattern "P31" is being used and a through-out bonus presentation is being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern S2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern S2 is executed (see Figure 60 (F)), after which the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a jackpot win, are also definitively displayed as stopped symbols (see Figure 60 (G)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40 (C), when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the special chart 2 variable pattern "P31" is selected and the through-out bonus presentation is not being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern S1 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern S1 is executed (see FIG. 60 (A)). After that, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which form a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a jackpot win, are definitely displayed stopped, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which form a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a jackpot win, are also definitely displayed stopped (see FIG. 60 (B)).

Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 40 (C), when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the special chart 2 variable pattern "P32" is being used and a through-out bonus presentation is being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern S2 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and executes a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern S2 (see Figure 60 (F)), after which the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which form a stopping pattern (double number) indicating a small win, are definitively displayed as stopped symbols (see Figure 60 (G)). Furthermore, based on the variable presentation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 40 (C), when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the special chart 2 variable pattern "P32" is selected and the through-out bonus presentation is not being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects variable presentation pattern S1 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio), and a variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern S1 is executed (see FIG. 60 (A)). Thereafter, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a small win, are definitively displayed as stopped symbols, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, which constitute a stopping pattern (double number) suggesting a small win, are also definitively displayed as stopped symbols (see FIG. 60 (B)).

Following step S4604, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the special chart 2 variable performance start command has been set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4605). If the special chart 2 variable performance start command has been set (YES in S4605), the variable performance will start in response to the start of the variable display of special chart 2, so the special chart 2 variable performance in progress flag is turned ON (S4606) and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the special chart 2 variable performance start command has not been set (NO in S4605), the variable performance will start in response to the start of the variable display of special chart 1, so this processing ends without turning ON the special chart 2 variable performance in progress flag.

[Opening Effect Selection Process] The opening effect selection process (S4410) shown in Figure 37 selects the opening effect pattern (content) to be executed during jackpot play and the pattern (content) of the small jackpot play effect to be executed during small jackpot play. Furthermore, the opening effect selection process (S4411) in this embodiment counts the number of bonus effects (standard bonus effect, LOGO3000 bonus effect, LOGO1500 bonus effect (first special effect), LOGO through-out bonus effect) executed based on the analysis results of the opening command, i.e., the number of jackpot play effects corresponding to each specific play mode. The counted number of bonus effect executions is displayed on the display screen 50a for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) in the non-time-saving mode entered after the jackpot play ends. The jackpot play effects selected here include opening effects executed during the opening of the jackpot play and open play effects executed while the jackpot entry slot is open and during the interval between openings. Additionally, the small win game effects selected here include opening effects that are executed during the opening of the small win game, and opening game effects that are executed while the large prize opening is open and during the intervals between openings.

As shown in Figure 37, the opening effect selection process (S4410) first analyzes the opening command (S4701). In this embodiment, the opening command includes information about the special stop symbol data (see Figure 8) that was set when a big win or small win was determined.

Next, in step S4702, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not LOGO standard mode is being set (S4702). If it determines that LOGO standard mode is being set (YES in S4702), it increments the value of the LOGO bonus effect counter by 1 (S4703) and proceeds to step S4711.

Furthermore, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines in step S4702 that LOGO standard mode is not set (NO in S4702), it determines whether LOGO3000 mode is set (S4704). If it determines that LOGO3000 mode is set (YES in S4704), it determines whether this is the first jackpot game in the LOGO3000 bonus effect, i.e., whether the first winning game effect in the LOGO3000 bonus effect (the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect) should be executed (S4705).

If the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines that this is the first jackpot game in the LOGO3000 bonus presentation (YES in S4705), it increments the value of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation counter by one (S4706) and proceeds to step S4711. Also, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines that this is not the first jackpot game in the LOGO3000 bonus presentation (NO in S4705), it determines whether or not to start the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus presentation (S4707). If the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is to be started (YES in S4707), it increments the value of the LOGO1500 bonus presentation counter by one (S4708) and proceeds to step S4711. Also, if the LOGO 1500 bonus effect is not started in step S4707, that is, if the second jackpot game is started in the LOGO 3000 bonus effect (if the second half of the LOGO 3000 bonus effect is executed) (NO in S4707), proceed directly to S4711.

Furthermore, in step S4704, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the LOGO 3000 mode is not set (NO in S4704), it determines whether or not the LOGO through-out mode is set (S4709-1). If it determines that the LOGO through-out mode is set (YES in S4709-1), it determines whether or not the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is "1" (S4709-2). If the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is "1" (NO in S4709-2), it increments the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter by 1 (S4710) and proceeds to step S4711. Furthermore, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the LOGO through-out mode is not set (NO in S4709-1), or if the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is "1" (YES in S4709-2), it proceeds directly to step S4711.

The presentation control microcomputer 91 then selects a presentation pattern for a small win game presentation or a big win game presentation based on the type of win indicated by the analyzed opening command (S4711), and proceeds to step S4712. In step S4712, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets, in the output buffer of RAM 94, an opening presentation start command for starting an opening presentation (big win game presentation) using the selected presentation pattern. Also, in step S4712, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets, in the output buffer of RAM 94, a small win game presentation start command for starting a small win game presentation using the selected small win game presentation pattern.

Specifically, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO standard mode is set is either "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D," or "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern Q1 with a 100% selection rate (selection ratio) based on the opening effect pattern selection table for jackpot game effects shown in Figure 41 (A), and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern Q1 is executed (see Figures 52 (C) and 53 (C)).

On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), even if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO standard mode is set is any of "Special chart 2_small win symbol a," "Special chart 2_small win symbol b," or "Special chart 2_small win symbol c," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern Q1 with a 100% selection rate based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (B), and an opening effect based on small win game effect pattern Q1 is executed (see Figures 52 (C) and 53 (C)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" and variable presentation pattern R1 is selected based on the opening presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (C), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening presentation based on opening presentation pattern R1 is executed (see Figure 56 (A)). On the other hand, in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command during the LOGO3000 mode setting is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" and variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the opening effect pattern selection table for the jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (C), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). In the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command during the LOGO3000 mode setting is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" and variable presentation pattern R3 is selected based on the opening effect pattern selection table for the jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (C), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern R3 is executed (see Figure 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D" and variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the opening presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (C), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening presentation based on opening presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Pattern D," and variable effect pattern R3 is selected based on the opening effect pattern selection table for jackpot game effects shown in FIG. 41 (C), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E" and variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the opening presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (C), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening presentation based on opening presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Pattern E," and variable effect pattern R3 is selected based on the opening effect pattern selection table for jackpot game effects shown in FIG. 41 (C), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern a" and variable presentation pattern R1 is selected based on the small win game presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (D), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R1 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game presentation based on small win game presentation pattern R1 is executed (see Figure 56 (A)). On the other hand, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern a" and the variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the small win game presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (D), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects the small win game presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game presentation based on the small win game presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). During the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while in LOGO3000 mode is "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern A" and variable effect pattern R3 is selected based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 41 (D), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game effect based on small win game effect pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern b" and variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the small win game presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (D), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game presentation based on small win game presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern b," and variable effect pattern R3 is selected based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 41 (D), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game effect based on small win game effect pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern C" and variable presentation pattern R2 is selected based on the small win game presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (D), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R2 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game presentation based on small win game presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 56 (F)). On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern C," and variable effect pattern R3 is selected based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 41 (D), the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern R3 with a 100% selection rate, and a small win game effect based on small win game effect pattern R3 is executed (see FIG. 59 (A)).

In addition, during the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern S2 based on the opening presentation pattern selection table for jackpot game presentation shown in Figure 41 (E), regardless of whether the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is "Special chart 2_jackpot pattern C," "Special chart 2_jackpot pattern D," or "Special chart 2_jackpot pattern E," and an opening presentation based on opening presentation pattern S2 is executed (see Figure 61 (A)). On the other hand, during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the LOGO through-out mode is set and the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is any of "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol C," "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol D," or "Special chart 2_jackpot symbol E," and the LOGO through-out bonus effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern S1 based on the opening effect pattern selection table for jackpot game effects shown in FIG. 41 (E), and an opening effect based on opening effect pattern S1 is executed (see FIG. 60 (C)).

In addition, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern S2 based on the small win game presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 41 (F) when the LOGO through-out bonus presentation is being executed, regardless of whether the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is "Special chart 2_small win pattern a," "Special chart 2_small win pattern b," or "Special chart 2_small win pattern c," and a small win game presentation based on small win game presentation pattern S2 is executed (see Figure 61 (A)). On the other hand, in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), if the LOGO through-out mode is set and the win type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is any of "Special chart 2_small win symbol a," "Special chart 2_small win symbol b," or "Special chart 2_small win symbol c," and the LOGO through-out bonus effect is not being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern S1 based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 41 (F), and a small win game effect based on small win game effect pattern S1 is executed (see FIG. 60 (C)).

When the opening effect start command set in step S4712 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads a specified opening effect image or a specified small win game effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Round effect selection process] The round effect selection process (S4412) shown in Figure 38 is a process for selecting the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during a round of play in a jackpot game. As shown in Figure 38, the round effect selection process (S4412) first analyzes the round play command (S4751). In this embodiment, the round play command includes information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data (see Figure 8) that was set when a jackpot or small jackpot was determined to have been won.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the pattern (contents) of the round effect to be executed during the round of play of the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the analyzed round play command (S4752). Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4753), and this processing ends. When the round effect start command set in step S4753 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending processing (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out a specified round effect image from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Specifically, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern Q1 as the round presentation pattern when the analysis result of the analyzed round game command during the LOGO standard mode is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Symbol C" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol A" (see FIG. 42(A)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern Q1 is executed (see FIG. 52(D) to FIG. 52(F)). Also, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern Q2 as the round presentation pattern when the analysis result of the analyzed ending command during the LOGO standard mode is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol B" (see FIG. 42(A)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern Q2 is executed (see FIG. 53(D) to FIG. 53(F)). Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern Q2 as the round presentation pattern (see Figure 42 (A)) regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command while the LOGO standard mode is set is "Special chart 2_big win symbol E" or "Special chart 2_small win symbol c" (see Figure 42 (A)), and executes a round presentation based on round presentation pattern Q2 (see Figures 53 (D) to 53 (F)).

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R1 as the round presentation pattern (see Figure 42 (B)), and executes a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R1 (see Figure 56 (B)), regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern C" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern A", if opening presentation pattern R1 or small win play presentation pattern R1 has been selected for this bonus presentation (see Figure 41 (C) and Figure 41 (D)). Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects the round presentation pattern R2 as the round presentation pattern (see Figure 42(B)) and executes a round presentation based on the round presentation pattern R2 (see Figures 57(A) to 57(C)), regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special chart 2_big win pattern C" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern a", if the opening presentation pattern R2 or the small win game presentation pattern R2 has been selected for this bonus presentation (see Figures 41(C) and 41(D)). Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R3 as the round presentation pattern (see FIG. 42(B)), and executes a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R3 (see FIG. 59(B) to FIG. 59(D)), regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special chart 2_big win symbol C" or "Special chart 2_small win symbol a."

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R4 as the round presentation pattern (see Figure 42 (B)) regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern D" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern B", if opening presentation pattern R2 or small win play presentation pattern R2 has been selected for this bonus presentation (see Figure 41 (C) and Figure 41 (D)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R4 is executed (see Figure 57 (A) to Figure 57 (B) and Figure 57 (E)). Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R5 as the round presentation pattern (see FIG. 42(B)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R5 is executed (see FIG. 59(B) to FIG. 59(C), FIG. 57(F)), regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special chart 2_big win symbol D" or "Special chart 2_small win symbol b."

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R4 as the round presentation pattern (see Figure 42 (B)) regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern E" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern C," if opening presentation pattern R2 or small win play presentation pattern R2 has been selected for this bonus presentation (see Figure 41 (C) and Figure 41 (D)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R4 is executed (see Figure 57 (A) to Figure 57 (B) and Figure 57 (E)). Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern R5 as the round presentation pattern (see FIG. 42(B)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern R5 is executed (see FIG. 59(B) to FIG. 59(C), FIG. 57(F)), regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round play command is "Special chart 2_big win pattern E" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern c" and opening presentation pattern R3 or small win game presentation pattern R3 has been selected for this bonus presentation (see FIG. 41(C) and FIG. 41(D)).

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern S1 as the round presentation pattern with a selection rate of 80% regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special chart 2_big win pattern C" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern a," and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern S1 is executed (see Figure 60 (D) and Figure 61 (A)). On the other hand, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern S2 as the round presentation pattern with a selection rate of 20% regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Symbol C" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol A" (see Figure 42 (C)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern S2 is executed (see Figures 61 (B), 62, and 63 (B-1)).

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern S1 as the round presentation pattern with an 80% selection rate regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special chart 2_big win pattern D" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern b," (see Figure 42 (C)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern S1 is executed (see Figure 60 (D), Figure 61 (A)). On the other hand, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern S2 as the round presentation pattern with a selection rate of 20% regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol B" (see Figure 42 (C)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern S2 is executed (see Figures 61 (B), 62, and 63 (B-1)).

In addition, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern S3 as the round presentation pattern with a 100% selection rate regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Pattern E" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern C" (see Figure 42 (C)), and a round presentation based on round presentation pattern S3 is executed (see Figures 61 (B), 62, and 63 (B-2)).

[Ending Effect Selection Process] The ending effect selection process (S4414) shown in Figure 39 is a process for selecting the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of a jackpot game. As shown in Figure 38, the ending effect selection process (S4413) first analyzes the ending command (S4801). In this embodiment, the ending command includes information regarding the special symbol stop pattern data (see Figure 8) that was set when a jackpot or small jackpot was determined.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the pattern (content) of the ending effect to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the analyzed ending command (S4802). Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect using the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of RAM 94 (S4803), and this processing ends. When the ending effect start command set in step S4803 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending processing (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the specified ending effect image from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Specifically, in the ending presentation selection process (S4415), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern Q1 as the ending presentation pattern when the analysis result of the analyzed ending command during the LOGO standard mode setting is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Symbol C" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol A" (see FIG. 43(A)), and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern Q1 is executed (see FIG. 52(G)). Also, in the ending presentation selection process (S4415), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern Q2 as the ending presentation pattern when the analysis result of the analyzed ending command during the LOGO standard mode setting is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol B" (see FIG. 43(A)), and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern Q2 is executed (see FIG. 54). Furthermore, during the ending effect selection process (S4415), when the LOGO standard mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern Q3 as the ending effect pattern regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special chart 2_big win symbol E" or "Special chart 2_small win symbol c" (see Figure 43 (A)), and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern Q3 (an ending effect indicating that control of the specific game state has ended) is executed.

In addition, during the ending presentation selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern C" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern A", and if round presentation pattern R1 has been selected for the bonus presentation being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern R1 as the ending presentation pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern R1 is executed (see Figure 56 (C)). Furthermore, in the ending presentation selection process (S4415), when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is either "Special chart 2_big win pattern C" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern a", and the round presentation pattern R2 has been selected for the bonus presentation being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects the ending presentation pattern R2 as the ending presentation pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending presentation based on the ending presentation pattern R2 is executed (see Figure 57 (D)). Furthermore, during the ending effect selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Pattern C" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern A," and round effect pattern R3 has been selected for the bonus effect being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern R3 as the ending effect pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern R3 is executed (see Figure 59 (E)).

In addition, during the ending presentation selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern D" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern B", and if round presentation pattern R4 has been selected for the bonus presentation being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern R6 as the ending presentation pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern R6 is executed (see Figure 58). Furthermore, during the ending effect selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Pattern D" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern B," and round effect pattern R5 is selected for the bonus effect being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern R7 as the ending effect pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern R7 is executed (see Figure 58).

In addition, during the ending presentation selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern E" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern C," and if round presentation pattern R4 has been selected for the bonus presentation being executed, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern R4 as the ending presentation pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern R4 is executed (an ending presentation indicating that control of a specific game state has ended). Furthermore, in the ending effect selection process (S4415), if the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol B," and round effect pattern R5 is selected for the bonus effect being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern R5 as the ending effect pattern (see Figure 43 (B)), and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern R5 (an ending effect indicating that control of the specific game state has ended) is executed.

In addition, in the ending presentation selection process (S4415), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern S1 as the ending presentation pattern, and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern S1 is executed, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern C" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern A" while the LOGO through-out mode is set (see Figures 60(E) and 63(C-1)). In addition, in the ending presentation selection process (S4415), the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects ending presentation pattern S2 as the ending presentation pattern, and an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern S2 is executed, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Pattern D" or "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern B" while the LOGO through-out mode is set (see Figures 60(E) and 63(C-1)). Furthermore, in the ending effect selection process (S4415), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern S3 as the ending effect pattern regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special Chart 2 - Big Win Symbol E" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol C," and executes an ending effect based on ending effect pattern S3 (an ending effect indicating that control of the specific game state has ended).

7. Game Flow of the Pachinko Game Machine 1 of This Form Next, the game flow of the pachinko game machine 1 of this form will be explained using Figure 44. As shown in Figure 44, first, in the non-time-saving state (normal game state), the game progresses by hitting with the left hand, aiming to win the jackpot based on the lottery of special chart 1.

If a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery, and the type of jackpot pattern is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-cycle time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game A ends (see Figure 8). Also, if the type of jackpot pattern is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B," the game will continue to be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the 10R normal jackpot game ends (see Figure 8). As shown in Figure 44, when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery, the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" will be determined is 50%, and the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B" will be determined is 50%.

In the time-saving mode, the game is played by hitting the right button, aiming to win a jackpot based on the drawing of special chart 2 (mainly a jackpot based on passing through specific area 39 after winning a small jackpot). If the number of time-saving times is set to one, this mode does not have a special chart 2 reserve, so it is possible to draw special chart 2 once in the time-saving mode. Note that in this mode of pachinko gaming machine 1, the result of the drawing of special chart 2 will be a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 is approximately 1/319, and the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 is approximately 1/1. The combined probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 and the probability of winning a small jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 is 1/1. Furthermore, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to always allow the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 39 if a small jackpot is won based on the drawing for Special Chart 2, so that a jackpot game will always be executed as long as the game is played correctly. Therefore, it can be said that the effective probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 is 1/1.

In the lottery for Special Chart 2, if a jackpot is won, i.e., a Type 1 jackpot, and the type of jackpot pattern is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to one time-saving cycle after the end of 10 rounds of jackpot play C (see Figure 8). In the lottery for Special Chart 2, if a jackpot is won, an 80% chance is allotted to jackpot pattern C (see Figure 8). Also, in the lottery for Special Chart 2, if a jackpot is won, i.e., a Type 1 jackpot, and the type of jackpot pattern is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to one time-saving cycle after the end of 10 rounds of jackpot play D (see Figure 8). In the lottery for Special Chart 2, if a jackpot is won, an 1% chance is allotted to jackpot pattern D (see Figure 8). On the other hand, if a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, i.e., if a Type 1 jackpot is won, and the type of jackpot pattern is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E," the machine will transition to a non-time-saving state after the 10R jackpot game E ends (see Figure 8). If a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, the machine is allocated to the jackpot pattern E 19% of the time (see Figure 8). As a result, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, if the result of the Special Chart 2 lottery is a jackpot, the machine will transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends 81% of the time, while the machine will transition to a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game ends 19% of the time.

If a player wins a Type 2 jackpot after winning a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Small jackpot symbol a," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-time time-saving state after a 10-round jackpot game F (see Figure 8). If a player wins a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, the number of time-saving cycles will be allocated to small jackpot symbol a at an 80% rate (see Figure 8). Also, if a player wins a Type 2 jackpot after winning a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Small jackpot symbol b," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-time time-saving state after a 10-round jackpot game G (see Figure 8). If a player wins a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, the number of time-saving cycles will be allocated to small jackpot symbol b at a 1% rate (see Figure 8). Additionally, if a player wins a Type 2 jackpot after winning a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol C," the game will transition to a non-time-saving state after a 10-round jackpot game H (see Figure 8). If a player wins a small jackpot in the Special Chart 2 lottery, the game will be allocated to small jackpot symbol C 19% of the time (see Figure 8). As a result, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, if the result of the Special Chart 2 lottery is a small jackpot, there is an 81% chance that the game will transition to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game that includes a small jackpot game, while there is a 19% chance that the game will transition to a non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game that includes a small jackpot game.

As described above, a time-saving state in which the number of time-saving cycles is one essentially guarantees the next jackpot. As a result, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, if a transition to the time-saving state is made after a jackpot game has ended, control of the time-saving state will continue until a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot) is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2 while in the time-saving state, and there is a 19% chance that the machine will be controlled to the non-time-saving state after the jackpot game has ended. In other words, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, if a 10R time-saving jackpot A is won in the lottery on Special Chart 1 while in the non-time-saving state and the machine transitions to the time-saving state after the jackpot game has ended, the lottery result on Special Chart 2 will be a time-saving win (time-saving jackpot, time-saving small win), a jackpot game will be played, and a specific gaming state in which this series of events, including a transition to the time-saving state after the jackpot game has ended, can continue. Therefore, in this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a jackpot game is executed based on a one-time time-saving symbol (a symbol that will be controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends) in a non-time-saving state, there is an 81% chance that the time-saving state will continue after the jackpot game ends, resulting in a pachinko gaming machine that continues to operate in a specific gaming state (special gaming state). In other words, by continuing to control the gaming state in a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, the result of the lottery for the next special symbol 2 will essentially be a jackpot win (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot), making it a loop-type gaming machine in which the execution of a jackpot game can be expected. The period from the start of control of the specific gaming state, when the jackpot game starts, to the end of control of the specific gaming state corresponds to the "advantageous period."

Next, the specific game state presentation mode in this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 45 to 47. The specific game state presentation mode is a presentation style using the image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, etc. Different presentation modes, for example, result in different characters, items, background images, etc. displayed on the image display device 7, and variable presentations using presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are also executed in a style corresponding to the specific game state presentation mode. The 10R time-limited jackpot games shown in Figures 45 to 46 refer to jackpot game C, jackpot game D, jackpot game F, and jackpot game G. Furthermore, the 10R normal jackpot games shown in Figures 45 to 46 refer to jackpot game E and jackpot game H. Furthermore, the 10R jackpot games shown in FIG. 47 refer to jackpot game C, jackpot game D, jackpot game E, jackpot game F, jackpot game G, and jackpot game H.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" in the non-time-saving mode, at the end of the executed jackpot game, one of the three specific game state presentation modes is selected by the player pressing the presentation button 63, and that one presentation mode is set. The three specific game state presentation modes are LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode. Here, the three specific game state presentation modes, LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode, function as presentation modes that indicate either a normal probability state and time-saving mode, a jackpot game, or a small jackpot game. In this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on the three specific game state presentation modes that are set, there may be some common presentation content, or the content of the variable presentation in the time-saving state may differ, and the content of the bonus presentation may also differ. Note that the variable presentation in the time-saving state and the bonus presentation may be completely different depending on the three specific game state presentation modes.

First, using Figure 45, we will explain the LOGO standard mode, one of the three specific game state presentation modes. LOGO standard mode is a presentation mode in which, depending on the result of a single special symbol drawing while LOGO standard mode is set, a variable presentation is executed to suggest the result of that special symbol drawing, and a standard bonus presentation is executed in conjunction with the execution of a single winning game (small win game, type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), suggesting that that winning game is currently being played. Note that the standard bonus presentation is a battle presentation in which an enemy character and the main character fight. Furthermore, the standard bonus presentation is a winning game presentation (small win game presentation, jackpot game presentation) exclusive to LOGO standard mode.

As shown in Figure 45, first, when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode), the game progresses by hitting the left button, aiming to win the jackpot based on the lottery on Special Chart 1. Note that when the time-saving mode is not active, the normal presentation mode is set. The normal presentation mode (see, for example, Figure 48 (A)) is the presentation mode that is set when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode).

When a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery while the normal presentation mode is set, if the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-cycle time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game A (see Figure 8). Also, if the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B," the game will continue to be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game B (see Figure 8). As shown in Figure 45, when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery, the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A" will be determined is 50%, and the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B" will be determined is 50% (see Figure 8).

Then, in the ending presentation executed at the ending time of 10R jackpot game A, the player presses the presentation button 63 to set the LOGO standard mode selected from the three specific game state presentation modes.

As shown in Figure 45, when the time-saving mode is activated after a jackpot game ends and LOGO standard mode is set, the game progresses by hitting the right button.

If a jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 2 while in the time-saving mode, and the type of jackpot symbol is "Special chart 2_Jackpot symbol C," the number of time-saving cycles will be shifted back to one after jackpot game C ends (see Figure 8), and the LOGO standard mode setting will continue. Also, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 2 while in the time-saving mode, and the type of jackpot symbol is "Special chart 2_Jackpot symbol D," the number of time-saving cycles will be shifted back to one after jackpot game D ends (see Figure 8), and the LOGO standard mode setting will continue. If a small jackpot is won in the lottery for special chart 2 while in the time-saving mode, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special chart 2_Jackpot symbol a," the number of time-saving cycles will be shifted back to one after jackpot game F, which was executed via small jackpot game F, ends (see Figure 8), and the LOGO standard mode setting will continue. Furthermore, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 during the time-saving mode, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Big Win Symbol B," after the big jackpot game G executed via the small jackpot game ends, the number of time-saving attempts will be shifted back to the one time-saving mode (see Figure 8), and the LOGO standard mode setting will continue. In addition, when the LOGO standard mode is set in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, the probability that the time-saving mode will be restored after the big jackpot game ends based on the lottery result for Special Chart 2 during the time-saving mode (big jackpot, small jackpot) is 81%.

As shown in Figure 45, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state entered after the end of a jackpot game, and the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol E," the game will transition to a non-time-saving state after the end of jackpot game E, and the game will change from logo standard mode to regular presentation mode. Also, if a small jackpot is won in the lottery for Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state entered after the end of a jackpot game, and the type of small jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," the game will transition to a non-time-saving state after the end of jackpot game H, and the game will change from logo standard mode to regular presentation mode. In this type of pachinko gaming machine 1, when logo standard mode is set, the rate at which the game will be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game based on the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot) is 19%.

When LOGO standard mode is set on this type of pachinko gaming machine 1, after the player has enjoyed a variable effect based on the result of a single special symbol drawing in the time-saving mode, the player can then enjoy one standard bonus effect that is performed during the execution of a jackpot game based on the result of that special symbol drawing being a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot). In other words, when LOGO standard mode is set, the player can be entertained by separating the variable effect that is performed for each jackpot from the jackpot game effect.

Next, using Figure 46, we will explain the LOGO3000 mode, one of the three specific game state presentation modes. In the LOGO3000 mode, one of two types of bonus presentations is executed while the LOGO3000 mode is set. There is the LOGO3000 bonus presentation, which is a winning game presentation (small winning game presentation, big winning game presentation) that suggests to the player that two predetermined jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) are executed as if they were a single jackpot game, and the LOGO1500 bonus presentation, which is a winning game presentation (small winning game presentation, big winning game presentation) that suggests that one jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) is executed as if it were a single jackpot game. The LOGO3000 bonus effect is divided into a first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect and a second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. The first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is an effect that suggests that the first of two predetermined jackpot games (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) has been played. The first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is an effect that suggests that the second of two predetermined jackpot games (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) has been played.

As shown in Figure 46, first, when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode), the game progresses by hitting the left button, aiming to win the jackpot based on the lottery on Special Chart 1. Note that when the time-saving mode is not active, the normal presentation mode is set. The normal presentation mode (see, for example, Figure 48 (A)) is the presentation mode that is set when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode).

If a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery while the normal presentation mode is set, and the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-cycle time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game A (see Figure 8). Also, if the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B," the game will continue to be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game B (see Figure 8). As shown in Figure 46, when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery, the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A" will be determined is 50%, and the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B" will be determined is 50% (see Figure 8).

Then, during the ending presentation executed during the ending time of 10R jackpot game A, the player presses the presentation button 63 to set the LOGO3000 mode, selected from three specific game state presentation modes.

As shown in Figure 46, if LOGO3000 mode is set, play proceeds by hitting the right button in the time-saving mode entered after a jackpot. In the time-saving mode, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Symbol C," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot. Here, if LOGO3000 mode is set, unless the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects variable effect pattern R1 87.5% of the time (see Figure 40(B)). Then, opening effect pattern R1, round effect pattern R1, and ending effect pattern R1 are selected (see Figures 41(C), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed during the jackpot.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol A," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. Here, if LOGO3000 mode is set, and the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is not being executed, there is an 87.5% chance that the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R2 (see Figure 40 (B)), and then select small win game effect pattern R1, round effect pattern R1, and ending effect pattern R1 (see Figures 41 (D), 42 (B), and 43 (B)), and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

The 70% execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect shown in Figure 46 indicates the rate at which the LOGO3000 bonus effect will be initiated when the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving mode is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot), i.e., the execution rate for the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is 70%.

Also, when LOGO3000 mode is set, the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is performed, and if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 during time-saving mode is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot), the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect will be performed regardless of whether the stopped symbol is a time-saving symbol (Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Symbol C, Special Chart 1 - Jackpot Symbol D, Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol A, Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol B) or a regular symbol (Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Symbol E, Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol C). The win rate for the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is 81%.

The 81% win rate in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect shown in Figure 46 indicates that the main character has an 81% chance of beating the enemy character in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. Specifically, this indicates the probability (81%) of transitioning to the time-saving state after the second of two predetermined jackpot games ends in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, i.e., when the stopped symbol becomes a time-saving symbol or a normal symbol, and the second of two predetermined jackpot games ends (see Figure 8).

Next, we will explain the LOGO1500 bonus effect shown in Figure 46. In the time-saving mode, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if the LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 with a 12.5% chance (see Figure 40(B)), and then select opening effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R3, and ending effect pattern R3 (see Figures 41(C), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is a 1% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 with a 100% chance (see Figure 40(B)), and then select opening effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R5, and ending effect pattern R7 (see Figures 41(C), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is a 19% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol E," and the game will transition to non-time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, there is a 100% chance that the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 (see Figure 40(B)), and then select opening effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R5, and ending effect pattern R5 (see Figures 41(C), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol A," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 with a 12.5% chance (see Figure 40(B)), and then select small win game effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R3, and ending effect pattern R3 (see Figures 41(D), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

Also, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is a 1% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol b," and the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 with a 100% chance (see Figure 40(B)), and then select small win game effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R5, and ending effect pattern R7 (see Figures 41(D), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a jackpot, there is a 19% chance that the stopped symbol will be "Special Chart 2_Small Win Symbol C," and the game will transition to non-time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends. In this case, if LOGO3000 mode is set and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed during the previous jackpot play, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select variable effect pattern R3 with a 100% chance (see Figure 40(B)), and then select small win game effect pattern R3, round effect pattern R5, and ending effect pattern R5 (see Figures 41(D), 42(B), and 43(B)), and the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed during the jackpot play.

The 30% execution rate of the LOGO 1500 bonus effect shown in Figure 46 indicates that when the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving mode is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot), the rate at which the LOGO 1500 bonus effect will be executed is 30% of the time, either in the first half of the LOGO 3000 bonus effect or in the LOGO 1500 bonus effect.

The 37% win rate in the LOGO1500 bonus presentation shown in Figure 46 indicates that the protagonist character has a 37% chance of beating the enemy character in the LOGO1500 bonus presentation. Here, the 37% win rate can be calculated by taking 11 out of the selection rates (81) of the time-saving symbols ("Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol C," "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," "Special Symbol 2 - Small Win Symbol A," and "Special Symbol 2 - Small Win Symbol B") in the allocation of the second special symbols for the predetermined winning stop patterns (small win stop pattern, big win stop pattern) in this mode, and dividing that 11 by the sum (30) of the selection rates (19) of the normal symbols ("Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol E," "Special Symbol 2 - Small Win Symbol C"), and multiplying this value by 100.

When the LOGO3000 mode is set on this pachinko gaming machine 1, if either the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO1500 bonus effect, which has a higher execution rate than the LOGO1500 bonus effect, is executed, the player is informed that the time-saving state will continue after the current jackpot game is completed, the next jackpot game will also be executed, and 3,000 prize balls can be won in two jackpot games. On the other hand, when the LOGO3000 mode is set on this pachinko gaming machine 1, if either the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO1500 bonus effect, which has a lower execution rate than the LOGO3000 bonus effect, is executed, the player is informed that the time-saving state is unlikely to be controlled after the current jackpot game is completed, but 1,500 prize balls can be won in a jackpot game.

Next, using Figure 47, we will explain the LOGO through-out mode, one of the three specific game state presentation modes. The LOGO through-out bonus presentation is executed when the LOGO through-out mode is set. Here, the through-out bonus presentation is a bonus presentation that makes the presentations (variable presentations and jackpot presentations) that are executed in the specific game state appear as a single jackpot presentation. As a result, the through-out bonus presentation of this form suggests that multiple jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) are executed as a single jackpot game before the game is controlled to the non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), making it possible for the player to feel as if multiple jackpot games were executed as a single jackpot game before the game is controlled to the non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game).

As shown in Figure 47, first, when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode), the game progresses by hitting the left button, aiming to win the jackpot based on the lottery on Special Chart 1. Note that when the time-saving mode is not active, the normal presentation mode is set. The normal presentation mode (see, for example, Figure 48 (A)) is the presentation mode that is set when the time-saving mode is not active (normal game mode).

When a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery while the normal presentation mode is set, if the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A," the number of time-saving cycles will transition to a 1-cycle time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game A (see Figure 8). Also, if the type of jackpot symbol is "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B," the game will continue to be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the end of 10R jackpot game B (see Figure 8). As shown in Figure 45, when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery, the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A" will be determined is 50%, and the probability that "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B" will be determined is 50% (see Figure 8).

Then, during the ending presentation executed at the ending time of 10R jackpot game A, the player presses the presentation button 63 to set the LOGO through-out mode, selected from three specific game state presentation modes.

As shown in Figure 47, if the LOGO through-out mode is set in the time-saving state entered after the end of a jackpot game, play will proceed by hitting the right button. If the through-out mode is set and a win (jackpot win or small win) is won in the lottery for special chart 2, a through-out bonus effect will be executed. The through-out bonus effect will continue to be executed until the execution of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is completed.

For example, if the execution of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H ends while a through-out bonus effect is being executed, a fall notification effect will be executed at the ending time of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H, indicating that the game will be controlled to a non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends. When the fall notification effect at the ending time of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H ends and the jackpot game ends, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will transition to a non-time-shortened state, as shown in FIG. 47.

When the LOGO through-out mode is set on this type of pachinko gaming machine 1, the through-out bonus effect can make the player feel as if one jackpot game is being played continuously. Furthermore, during the execution of the through-out bonus effect, the player can win prize balls in the jackpot game while feeling anxious about when the game will transition to a non-time-saving mode.

The specifications of this pachinko gaming machine 1 are of a single type: a loop type, in which the game state after the end of a jackpot game continues to be controlled in a time-saving state, allowing for the execution of another jackpot game. However, it is possible to provide a variety of bonus effects by selecting a specific game state presentation mode from three types: LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode, to suit the player's own preferences. As a result, although the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself are of a single type, the bonus presentation executed according to the set specific game state presentation mode makes it seem as if the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself have changed, providing the player with a new sense of pleasure.

8. Examples of Presentations in the First Embodiment 8-1. Variable Presentation Next, the variable presentation will be explained. When the variable display of the special symbol begins, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a variable presentation based on the variable pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol and the results of the special symbol lottery (the results of the big win determination, small win determination, symbol type determination, reach determination, and variable pattern determination). In the variable presentation, the display screen 7a displays the variable presentation of the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable presentation of the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change and then stop. In other words, the variable presentation of the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed over the special symbol variation time, and then the variation stops, and the presentation symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as still symbols. The result of the special symbol lottery is then announced by the display of the still symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

8-1-1. Effect Symbol Display Area As shown in FIG. 48(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is divided horizontally into three approximately equal parts, with a left effect symbol area 50b1, a middle effect symbol area 50b2, and a right effect symbol area 50b3 provided on the left, center, and right sides. The left effect symbol area 50b1 is an area that displays the left effect symbol 8L when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state during variable effects. Similarly, the middle effect symbol area 50b2 and the right effect symbol area 50b3 are areas that display the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R.

Also, as shown in Figure 48 (A), a small symbol area 50c is provided in one section (upper left) at the top left of the display screen 7a. Small symbol area 50c is an area that displays the changing small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the changing special symbol display is being performed. Note that while the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may become hidden during the changing display, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 never become hidden. In this respect, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 function as symbols that complement the role of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In Figure 48 (A), the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed double-dashed lines, but this is only to indicate the range of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c, and is not actually displayed. Furthermore, the range of each area can be changed as appropriate.

8-1-2. Normal Variation In the variation effect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can first perform a normal variation. The normal variation functions as an effect that indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has started.

When the display of the special patterns begins, for example, as shown in Figure 48 (A), the left performance pattern 8L, the middle performance pattern 8C and the right performance pattern 8R are displayed frozen on the display screen 7a, and the left small pattern KZ1, the middle small pattern KZ2 and the right small pattern KZ3 are displayed frozen, and the display of the special patterns is not being performed and the display of the special patterns is in a waiting state.As shown in Figure 48 (B), as the display of the special patterns begins, the display of the performance patterns 8L, 8C and 8R begins to change, and the display of the small patterns KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 begins to change. Then, when the variation pattern of the variation display of this special symbol is, for example, a "normal miss variation" (a variation of a miss without a reach), as shown in FIG. 48 (C-1), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed as provisionally stopped in different stopping patterns, and then, as shown in FIG. 48 (D), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as stopped in a stopping pattern suggesting a miss (a so-called spread pattern). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed as stopped all at once in a stopping pattern suggesting a miss. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol is, for example, a variation pattern with a reach, such as an "N miss variation" (a variation of a reach with a miss that is indicated by a normal reach), as shown in FIG. 48 (C-2), the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are displayed as provisionally stopped in the same stopping pattern, and a reach is established. At this time, the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 continues, and a reach effect is performed according to the variation pattern. The stopping order and stopping mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R can be changed as appropriate. A provisional stop display (hereinafter also referred to as a provisional stop) refers to a state in which the variation speed of the effect symbol is "0", but the effect symbol is changing by shaking, expanding and contracting repeatedly at the displayed position, and has not completely stopped. In contrast, a confirmed stop display (confirmed stop display) or a final stop display (final stop display) refers to a state in which the effect symbol has completely stopped. When simply referred to as a "stop display", it can refer to either a provisional stop display or a confirmed stop display.

8-1-3. N Reach (Normal Reach)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform an N-reach when a reach is achieved in normal variation. The N-reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery may be a "jackpot," and functions as a presentation that makes the player look forward to a jackpot.

In an N reach, as shown in Figure 49 (A), the reach state is maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and as shown in Figure 49 (B), the speed of change of the middle effect symbol 8C gradually slows down. If the change pattern of the special symbol change display is, for example, an "N miss change," then, as shown in Figure 49 (C-1), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a stopping pattern suggesting a miss (so-called "barake" patterns). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a stopping pattern suggesting a miss. On the other hand, if the change pattern of the special symbol change display is, for example, an "N jackpot change" (a jackpot change indicating a jackpot win by a normal reach), then, as shown in Figure 49 (C-2), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a stopping pattern suggesting a jackpot (so-called "double numbers" (an example of a predetermined stopping pattern)). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed stopped simultaneously in a manner that suggests a jackpot. Note that the effects of N Reach are not limited to the gradual slowdown of the medium symbol 8C, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

Furthermore, with regard to the stopping patterns of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that indicate a miss, the spread patterns when a reach is not achieved are referred to as "non-reach spread patterns" or "non-reach miss patterns," and the spread patterns when a reach is achieved are referred to as "reach spread patterns" or "reach miss patterns." The combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that make up the non-reach spread patterns (e.g., "2, 3, 1" or "5, 8, 6") and the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that make up the reach spread patterns (e.g., "2, 1, 2" or "5, 4, 5") are selected by the effect control microcomputer 91. Additionally, the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that make up the stopping pattern (double number) that indicates a jackpot (for example, "2-2-2" or "7-7-7") is selected by the effect control microcomputer 91 based on the type of jackpot symbol that has been won.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform an SP reach after an N reach. The SP reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the special symbol lottery is more likely to be a "jackpot" than an N reach, and functions as a presentation to make the player expect a jackpot.

In an SP Reach, after an N Reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 50(A), a background image dedicated to the SP Reach (SP Reach background image G113) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and an image indicating the start of the SP Reach (SP Reach start title image) G1 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 50(B), an SP Reach-specific effect (e.g., a battle effect in which an ally character and enemy character A battle) is performed. Then, when the final stage of the SP Reach-specific effect is reached, if the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display is, for example, an "SP jackpot variation" (a jackpot variation in which the SP Reach indicates a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 50(C-1), a success effect suggesting a jackpot (e.g., a display in which an ally character has won the battle and is standing in a pose of defiance, a victory effect) is performed on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state suggesting a jackpot (so-called double numbers). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a manner suggesting a jackpot. On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display is, for example, an "SP miss variation" (a reach-and-miss variation in which a miss is indicated by an SP reach), as shown in FIG. 50 (C-2), a failure effect suggesting a miss (for example, a display in which enemy character A has won the battle and is standing in a pose of defiance, a defeat effect) is displayed, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a miss (so-called barrages). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a manner suggesting a miss. The content of the SP reach effect can be changed or added as appropriate. In this embodiment, the effect shown in FIG. 44 is executed as the SP reach based on the lottery for special symbol 1.

8-1-5. Selection of specific game state presentation mode Using FIG. 51, during the ending of jackpot game A when the lottery result of special chart 1 is a jackpot win in a non-time-saving state, one of the presentation modes from "LOGO standard mode,""LOGO 3000 mode," or "LOGO through-out mode" can be selected. Note that in this form, only during the ending of jackpot game A when the lottery result of special chart 1 is a jackpot win in a non-time-saving state, one of the presentation modes from "LOGO standard mode,""LOGO 3000 mode," or "LOGO through-out mode" can be selected.

Using Figure 51, we will explain the ending effects that are executed during the ending of jackpot game A when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot in non-time-saving mode. Note that the ending effects shown in Figure 51 are assumed to be executed during the ending of jackpot game A when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot in non-time-saving mode.

In this mode, when the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving mode, during the ending presentation that is executed during the ending of jackpot game A, the player can press presentation button 63 to select from "LOGO standard mode," "LOGO 3000 mode," or "LOGO through-out mode" the specific game state presentation mode that will be set in the time-saving mode that will be switched to after the end of jackpot game A. Furthermore, once the selectable time has elapsed from "LOGO standard mode," "LOGO 3000 mode," or "LOGO through-out mode" in the ending presentation, the setting of the selected specific game state presentation mode will be determined.

When the ending effect begins during the ending of jackpot game A in a non-time-saving mode where the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot, the example effect shown in Figure 51(A) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 51(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an ending effect image G109 is displayed, which includes an item image showing "LOGO Standard," an item image showing "LOGO 3000," an item image showing "LOGO Through Out," an arrow image showing a black down arrow pointing to one of the item images showing "LOGO Standard," "LOGO 3000," or "LOGO Through Out," an image of "Select" below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a button image simulating effect button 63 below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a remaining time text image showing "15 seconds left until decision." The item image labeled "LOGO STANDARD" in FIG. 51(A) is an item image indicating "LOGO STANDARD MODE," the item image labeled "LOGO 3000" in FIG. 51(A) is an item image indicating "LOGO 3000 MODE," and the item image labeled "LOGO THROUGH OUT" in FIG. 51(A) is an item image indicating "LOGO THROUGH OUT MODE." The arrow image in FIG. 51(A) is an image indicating the item image currently selected by the player, i.e., the specific game state presentation mode currently selected by the player. The "SELECT" image and button image in FIG. 51(A) are images indicating that one specific game state presentation mode can be selected from three specific game state presentation modes by the player pressing the presentation button 63. Furthermore, the remaining time text image showing "15 seconds left until decision" shown in Figure 51 (A) indicates that the setting of the specific game state presentation mode indicated by the arrow image will be decided once the time (15 seconds) for selecting the specific game state presentation mode has elapsed.

After the example presentation shown in Figure 51 (A) is displayed, if the player does not press the presentation button 63 when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 10 seconds during the ending presentation, the presentation will proceed to the example presentation shown in Figure 51 (B-1). As shown in Figure 51 (B-1), an arrow image showing a black down arrow is displayed above the item image showing "LOGO STANDARD" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying an arrow image showing a black down arrow above the item image showing "LOGO STANDARD" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to let the player know that LOGO STANDARD mode is currently selected as the specific game state presentation mode that will be set when control is exercised to the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game.

After that, when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 0 seconds during the ending presentation, the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-1) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 51 (C-1), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a first ending end image G110 indicating that the specific game state presentation mode is "Entering LOGO Standard Mode." As shown in Figure 51 (C-1), the display of the first ending end image G110 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that "LOGO Standard Mode" will be set in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. After the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-1) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ending of jackpot game A in the non-time-saving state when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win will end, and the execution of the ending presentation will be completed.

Furthermore, after the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (A) is displayed, if the player presses the presentation button 63 once during the ending presentation when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 10 seconds, the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (B-2) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 51 (B-2), an arrow image showing a black down arrow is displayed above the item image showing "LOGO3000" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying an arrow image showing a black down arrow above the item image showing "LOGO3000" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to inform the player that the LOGO3000 mode is currently selected as the specific game state presentation mode that will be set when the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game.

After that, when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 0 seconds during the ending presentation, the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-2) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 51 (C-2), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a second ending image G111 indicating that the specific game state presentation mode is "Entering LOGO 3000 mode." As shown in Figure 51 (C-2), the display of the second ending image G111 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that "LOGO 3000 mode" will be set in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. After the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-2) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ending of jackpot game A in the non-time-saving state when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win will end, and the execution of the ending presentation will be completed.

Furthermore, after the example presentation shown in Figure 51 (A) is displayed, if the player presses the presentation button 63 twice during the ending presentation when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 10 seconds, the presentation will proceed to the example presentation shown in Figure 51 (B-3). As shown in Figure 51 (B-3), an arrow image showing a black down arrow is displayed above the item image showing "LOGO THROUGH OUT" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying an arrow image showing a black down arrow above the item image showing "LOGO THROUGH OUT" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to let the player know that the LOGO THROUGH OUT mode is currently selected as the specific game state presentation mode that will be set when the game is controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game.

After that, when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 0 seconds during the ending presentation, the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-3) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 51 (C-3), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a third ending image G112 indicating that the specific game state presentation mode is "Entering LOGO Throughout Mode." As shown in Figure 51 (C-3), the display of the third ending image G112 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that "LOGO Throughout Mode" will be set in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. After the presentation example shown in Figure 51 (C-3) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ending of jackpot game A in the non-time-saving state when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win will end, and the execution of the ending presentation will be completed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the ending effect image G109 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if the arrow image is pointing to the item image indicating "LOGO THROUGH OUT" and the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image is not 0 seconds, pressing the effect button 63 once will cause the arrow image to return to above the item image indicating "LOGO STANDARD."

8-1-6. Bonus Effects Next, using Figures 52 to 54, we will explain the variable effects and bonus effects when the LOGO standard mode is set. The effects shown in Figures 52 to 54 are effects that are executed when the LOGO standard mode is set at the end of jackpot game A when the lottery result of special chart 1 is a jackpot win in the non-time-saving state.

First, we will explain the variable effects and standard bonus effects that are executed when the lottery result for Special Chart 2 when LOGO Standard Mode is set is either "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B" or "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A."

As shown in Figure 52 (A), when LOGO standard mode is set, a background image representing the sky (LOGO standard background image G120) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the LOGO standard background image G120 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that LOGO standard mode has been set, i.e., that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state.

If the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination), when the execution of the variable effect based on Special Chart Variation Pattern "P31" or "P32" begins, the display proceeds to the example of the effect shown in Figure 52 (A). As shown in Figure 52 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will begin to display the variable effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the display of the variable effect symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also begin.

After that, when the variable effect finishes, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a small win or a big win, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop to display the double number "666" as shown in Figure 52 (B), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also stop to display.

Next, if jackpot game C or jackpot game F is executed while LOGO standard mode is set, a standard bonus effect is executed. When the execution of the standard bonus effect begins, an opening effect is executed at the opening of jackpot game C or the opening of jackpot game F, as shown in FIG. 52 (C). During the opening effect of the standard bonus effect, a standard opening image G121 indicating "standard bonus" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the standard opening image G121 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to let the player know that the execution of the standard bonus effect has begun when LOGO standard mode is set.

After that, when the third round of jackpot game C or jackpot game F begins, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), a round game image G122 corresponding to the round effect in the standard bonus effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the round game image G122 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to understand that a round effect in the standard bonus effect is being performed.

After that, when the eighth round of jackpot game C or jackpot game F begins, as shown in FIG. 52 (D), a round game image G123 corresponding to the round presentation of the eighth round in the standard bonus presentation is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the round game image G123 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to understand that the main character will perform a special move against the enemy character in the round presentation of the standard bonus presentation.

After that, in the 10th round (final round) of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, as shown in FIG. 52 (F), a successful round game image G124 corresponding to the round presentation of the final round in the standard bonus presentation will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the successful round game image G124 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a presentation image that indicates to the player that the main character has defeated the enemy character. By displaying the successful round game image G124 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to inform the player that the game will transition to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and to make the player aware that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

At the ending of jackpot game C or the ending of jackpot game F, the execution of the ending presentation shown in Figure 52 (G) begins. In the ending presentation shown in Figure 52 (G), a LOGO standard mode continuation presentation is executed, suggesting that control will be placed into a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game, and a standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that control will continue in a specific game state, and it is possible to make the player aware that control will continue in a specific game state.

Next, we will explain the variable effects and bonus effects that are executed when the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is either a "10R Time-Shortened Big Win C," a "10R Regular Big Win B," a "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B," or a "10R Regular Small Win."

As shown in Figure 53 (A), when LOGO standard mode is set, a background image representing the sky (LOGO standard background image G120) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the LOGO standard background image G120 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that LOGO standard mode has been set, i.e., that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state.

If the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination), when the execution of the variable effect based on Special Chart Variation Pattern "P31" or "P32" begins, the display proceeds to the example of the effect shown in Figure 53 (A). As shown in Figure 53 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 begins to display the variable effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and also begins to display the variable effect symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3.

After that, when the variable effect finishes, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a small win or a big win, for example, the repeated numbers "666" will appear, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop and be displayed, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also stop and be displayed.

Next, when any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H is played, if LOGO standard mode is set, a standard bonus effect will be executed. Execution of the standard bonus effect begins, and as shown in FIG. 53(C), the opening effect shown in FIG. 53(C) is executed for the opening of any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H. During the opening effect of the standard bonus effect, a standard opening image G121 indicating "standard bonus" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the standard opening image G121 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 makes it possible for the player to understand that execution of the standard bonus effect has begun when LOGO standard mode is set.

After that, when the third round of any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H begins, a round game image G122 corresponding to the round effect in the standard bonus effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 53 (D). The display of the round game image G122 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 makes it possible to understand that a round effect in the standard bonus effect is being performed.

After that, when the eighth round of any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H begins, a round game image G126 corresponding to the round presentation of the eighth round in the standard bonus presentation will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 53(E). By displaying the round game image G126 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to understand that the enemy character will use a special move against the main character in the round presentation of the standard bonus presentation.

After that, regardless of whether jackpot game D, jackpot game E, jackpot game G, or jackpot game H is being played, in the 10th round (final round) of that jackpot game, a failed round game image G127 corresponding to the round presentation of the final round in the standard bonus presentation will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 53 (F). Specifically, the failed round game image G127 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a presentation image that indicates to the player that the main character has been defeated by an enemy character. By displaying the failed round game image G127 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game will be controlled to a non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and to make the player aware of the possibility of being controlled to a non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

After that, for example, if either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is being played, the standard bonus effect ends when the ending effect of the standard bonus effect ends. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 then returns to the non-time-shortened state, and the effect example shown in Figure 53 (G) is displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to the non-time-saving state, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will display a standard result display image RH1, as shown in Figure 53 (G), which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific gaming state, and a bonus execution count image SB1 indicating the number of bonus effects executed until the specific gaming state ends.

As shown in FIG. 53(G), a total prize ball count image KS indicating "15,000 points won" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating that the player has won 15,000 prize balls in the specific game state, allowing the player to understand that the number of prize balls won in the specific game state is 15,000. Also, as shown in FIG. 53(G), a bonus execution count image SB1 indicating "10 bonuses" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating that the number of jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot games, Type 2 jackpot games) has been played 10 times, allowing the player to understand that the number of jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot games, Type 2 jackpot games) has been played 10 times. Furthermore, the "10 bonuses" displayed by the bonus execution count image SB1 allows the player to understand that the number of standard bonus effects played by the time the specific game state ends is 9 times and the bonus effect at the time of the first win is 10 times in total. Furthermore, for example, when the standard result display image RH1 is displayed, a standard bonus execution count image SB5 indicating the number of times the standard bonus effect will be executed until the specific gaming state ends, and a bonus execution count image SB6 indicating the number of times the bonus effect will be executed at the time of the first win may be displayed separately.

On the other hand, for example, if either jackpot game D or jackpot game G is being played, the display will proceed from the example presentation shown in FIG. 53 (F) to the LOGO standard exclusive revival presentation A shown in FIG. 54 (A). When either jackpot game D or jackpot game G ends, the standard bonus ending presentation shown in FIG. 54 may begin.

In this case, the LOGO standard revival effect A is executed in the ending effect of the standard bonus effect. In the LOGO standard revival effect A, as shown in FIG. 54(A), a LOGO standard bonus revival effect image FG1 consisting of the main character and a text image stating "Not yet!" is displayed. By displaying the LOGO standard bonus revival effect image FG1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the specific game state will continue, and to make the player aware that the specific game state will continue.

After the display of the LOGO standard bonus revival effect image FG1 shown in Figure 54(A) has finished, the display proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 54(B). As shown in Figure 54(B), the LOGO standard mode continuation effect is executed, and a standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that control to the specific game state will continue, and it is possible to make the player aware that the specific game state will continue.

Next, using Figures 55 to 59, we will explain the variable effects and bonus effects when LOGO3000 mode is set. The effect examples shown in Figures 55 to 59 are effects that are executed when LOGO3000 mode is set at the end of jackpot game A when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win in non-time-saving mode.

First, while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is either "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B," "10R Time-Shortened Big Win C," "10R Regular Big Win B," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B," or "10R Regular Small Win," the variable presentation shown in Figure 55 (A) will be executed.

As shown in Figure 55(A), when the execution of the variable effect begins when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 also begins in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 55(A), in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a LOGO3000 bonus effect execution count image KH1 that indicates to the player the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect has been executed, and a LOGO1500 bonus effect execution count image KH2 that indicates to the player the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus effect has been executed are displayed. Note that in Figure 55(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the number indicated by the LOGO3000 bonus effect execution count image KH1 is "0," and the number indicated by the LOGO1500 bonus effect execution count image KH2 is "0." This makes it possible to understand that, since the LOGO3000 mode was set, the LOGO3000 bonus effect and the LOGO1500 bonus effect have never been executed up to this point.

In the variable effect, a promotional effect is executed in which the effect image LB1 displaying "LOGO 3000 BONUS" collides with the effect image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS." In the promotional effect, the effect image LB1 displaying "LOGO 3000 BONUS" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves downward on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an attempt to move the effect image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" downward and out of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, in the promotional effect, the effect image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves upward on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in an attempt to move the effect image LB1 displaying "LOGO 3000 BONUS" upward and out of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 55 (A), the variable effect causes the effect image LB1 showing "LOGO3000 BONUS" to collide with the effect image LB2 showing "LOGO1500 BONUS," making it possible to induce the player to guess which bonus effect will be executed: the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO1500 bonus effect.

While the provocative effect in the variable effect shown in Figure 55 (A) is being executed, a button image BS imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the button image BS on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to encourage the player to press the effect button 63. Then, when the effect button 63 is pressed while the provocative effect in the variable effect is being executed, the effect example shown in Figure 55 (A) will progress to the effect example shown in Figure 55 (B-1) or the effect example shown in Figure 55 (B-2).

If the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B," there is an 87.5% chance that the presentation example shown in Figure 55(A) will progress to the presentation example shown in Figure 55(B-1) (see Figure 40(B)). Also, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A," there is an 87.5% chance that the presentation example shown in Figure 55(A) will progress to the presentation example shown in Figure 55(B-1) (see Figure 40(B)).

On the other hand, if the result of the Special Chart 2 drawing is "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B," there is a 12.5% chance that the display example shown in Figure 55(A) will progress to the display example shown in Figure 55(B-2) (see Figure 40(B)). Also, if the result of the Special Chart 2 drawing is "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A," there is a 12.5% chance that the display example shown in Figure 55(A) will progress to the display example shown in Figure 55(B-2) (see Figure 40(B)). Furthermore, whether the result of the Special Chart 2 drawing is "10R Time-Shortened Big Win C," "10R Regular Big Win B," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B," or "10R Regular Small Win," there is a 100% chance that the display example shown in Figure 55(A) will progress to the display example shown in Figure 55(B-2)

For example, when the player presses the effect button 63, the effect image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" that was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is moved downward and off the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect example shown in Figure 55 (B-1) is displayed. As shown in Figure 55 (B-1), the effect image LB1 displaying "LOGO 3000 BONUS" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the display example shown in Figure 55 (B-1) progresses to the display example shown in Figure 55 (C-1). As shown in Figure 55 (C-1), a left display pattern 8L consisting of a pattern pattern indicated as "LOGO3000", a middle display pattern 8C consisting of a pattern pattern indicated as "LOGO3000", and a right display pattern 8R consisting of a pattern pattern indicated as "LOGO3000" are temporarily displayed.

After that, when the variable effect execution is completed, the left effect pattern 8L consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000", the middle effect pattern 8C consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000", and the right effect pattern 8R consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000" will be displayed definitively as stopped. The left effect pattern 8L consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000", the middle effect pattern 8C consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000", and the right effect pattern 8R consisting of the pattern aspect indicated by "LOGO3000" will be displayed definitively as stopped, suggesting to the player that a LOGO3000 bonus effect will be executed, making it possible for the player to understand that a LOGO3000 bonus effect will be executed. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped simultaneously in a pattern suggesting a jackpot ("777" in Figure 55 (C-1)). After that, the display proceeds to the example shown in Figure 56 (A).

For example, if the player presses the effect button 63 and the effect image LB1 displaying "LOGO 3000 BONUS" that was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is moved off the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect example shown in Figure 55 (B-2) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 55 (B-2), the effect image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the display proceeds from the example presentation shown in FIG. 55 (B-2) to the example presentation shown in FIG. 55 (C-2). As shown in FIG. 55 (C-2), the presentation image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" is displayed definitively in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a stopping pattern suggesting a jackpot ("222" in FIG. 55 (C-2)). The display then proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 59 (A). The presentation image LB2 displaying "LOGO 1500 BONUS" is displayed definitively in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, suggesting to the player that a LOGO 1500 bonus presentation will be executed, making it possible for the player to understand that a LOGO 1500 bonus presentation will be executed.

When the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 56(A), the opening effect is executed during the opening of jackpot game C or the opening of jackpot game F, and a first half opening image M1 indicating "LOGO3000 BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the first half opening image M1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that the LOGO3000 bonus effect has begun to be executed.

After that, when the round effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins to be executed, as shown in Figure 56 (B), a LOGO3000 band image LO indicating "LOGO3000" will be displayed in the upper left, upper right, lower left, and lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the LOGO3000 band image LO indicating "LOGO3000" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is being executed.

After that, when the ending effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins to be executed, as shown in Figure 56 (C), a LOGO effect image LG showing the main character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a text image BM showing "Battle Start" is displayed below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the LOGO3000 mode is set, the first jackpot game in the LOGO3000 bonus presentation ends, and when the variable presentation begins based on the result of the lottery for the next special chart 2 in the time-saving mode (a small jackpot win, a big jackpot win), the presentation will proceed to the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (D). Furthermore, regardless of whether the result of the lottery for the next special chart in the time-saving mode is a "10R time-saving jackpot A," "10R regular jackpot A," "10R time-saving jackpot B," "10R time-saving jackpot C," "10R regular jackpot B," "10R time-saving small jackpot A," "10R time-saving small jackpot B," or "10R regular small jackpot," the presentation will proceed to the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (D).

As shown in Figure 56 (D), when the variable effect begins, a LOGO3000 enemy character background image TK showing the enemy character facing off against the main character is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, as shown in Figure 56 (D), when the variable effect begins, the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 begins.

When the variable effect finishes, as shown in FIG. 56(E), the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will all stop and be displayed in a manner suggestive of a jackpot ("222" in FIG. 56(E)). Thereafter, in the opening of any of the jackpot games, jackpot game C, jackpot game D, jackpot game E, jackpot game F, jackpot game G, or jackpot game H, the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect will be executed, and the second opening effect shown in FIG. 56(F) will begin. As shown in FIG. 56(F), in the second opening effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (i.e., the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect), the second half opening image KB of the "Joint Battle Bonus" will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The second half opening image KB of the "Joint Battle Bonus" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, allowing the player to understand that the second opening effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect has begun. The effect example shown in Figure 56 (F) progresses to the effect example shown in Figure 57 (A).

The second round effect in the LOGO3000 bonus effect (the round effect in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect) begins, and the third round of the round effect involves a joint battle bonus effect. When the joint battle bonus effect is performed, an effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the main character and an ally character fighting alongside them appear, as shown in Figure 57 (A).

As shown in Figure 57 (B), a joint battle bonus effect is executed in which the main character and an ally character cooperate to battle an enemy character. The joint battle bonus effect then branches into either a victory effect in which the main character wins (an example of a success effect), or a defeat effect in which the main character is defeated (an example of a failure effect).

For example, if the main character and an ally character cooperate to win a battle against an enemy character in a joint battle bonus effect during jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the game will proceed to the victory effect as shown in Figure 57(C). After that, when the round effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect ends and the ending effect of the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect begins, the game will proceed from Figure 57(C) to Figure 57(D).

As shown in Figure 57 (D), in the ending effect of the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, a LOGO3000 mode continuation effect (continuation suggestion effect) is executed, and a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that the specific game state will continue, making it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state will continue.

For example, if the protagonist character and an ally character cooperate and lose a battle against an enemy character during any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H, the game will proceed to a defeat effect (end suggestion effect) for the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, as shown in Figure 57 (E). The execution of the defeat effect for the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect suggests that the specific game state will end when the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, making it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state may end.

After that, for example, if either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is being played, once the ending effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect has finished, the execution of the LOGO3000 bonus effect ends. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 then returns to the non-time-shortened state, and the effect example shown in Figure 57 (F) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 57 (F), in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a non-time-saving state, a LOGO3000 result display image RH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific gaming state, a LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed until the LOGO3000 mode is changed to the normal presentation mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ends, and a LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus effect is executed until the LOGO3000 mode is changed to the normal presentation mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ends. 57(F), the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating "LOGO 3000 BONUS x 1" and the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating "LOGO 1500 BONUS x 0" are displayed so that they can be distinguished by the player. This makes it possible for the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 to indicate that the LOGO3000 bonus effect was executed once until the LOGO3000 mode was changed to the normal effect mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ended, and for the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 to indicate that the LOGO1500 bonus effect was not executed until the LOGO3000 mode was changed to the normal effect mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ended. Therefore, by the time the LOGO3000 mode is changed to the normal presentation mode, i.e., by the time the specific gaming state ends, the player can be made aware that only the LOGO3000 bonus presentation has been executed once.

On the other hand, for example, if either jackpot game D or jackpot game G is being played, the display will proceed from the example presentation shown in FIG. 57(E) to the LOGO3000 mode-exclusive revival presentation B (specific presentation) shown in FIG. 58(A). When either jackpot game D or jackpot game G ends, the execution of the LOGO3000 mode-exclusive revival presentation B will begin in the ending presentation of the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation.

In this case, the LOGO3000 mode-exclusive revival effect B is executed in the ending effect of the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. In the LOGO3000 mode-exclusive revival effect B, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 consisting of the main character and a text image stating "We can still fight!" is displayed. By displaying the LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the specific game state will continue, and to make the player aware that the specific game state will continue.

After the display of the LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 shown in Figure 58(A) has finished, the display proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 58(B). As shown in Figure 58(B), the LOGO3000 mode continuation effect is executed, and a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that control to the specific game state will continue, and it is possible to make the player aware that the specific game state will continue.

Next, the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be explained. When the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus effect begins, as shown in FIG. 59(A), an opening effect is executed for any of the openings of jackpot games C, D, E, F, G, or H, and a LOGO1500 opening image M2 indicating "LOGO1500 BONUS" may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the LOGO1500 opening image M2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus effect has begun.

During the round effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect, a battle effect begins in which the main character and enemy character engage in a battle. During the third round, as shown in Figure 59 (B), an effect is executed in which the main character and enemy character appear on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As shown in Figure 59 (C), a battle presentation focusing on the main character is executed. After that, the battle presentation will eventually branch into a victory presentation in which the main character wins (an example of a success presentation), or a defeat presentation in which the main character is defeated (an example of a failure presentation).

For example, if the main character defeats an enemy character in a battle presentation during jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the game will proceed to a victory presentation as shown in Figure 59 (D). The execution of the victory presentation causes the game to enter a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, suggesting that the specific game state will continue, allowing the player to understand that the specific game state will continue. After that, when the execution of the round presentation of the LOGO1500 bonus presentation ends and the execution of the ending presentation of the LOGO1500 bonus presentation begins, the game will proceed from Figure 59 (D) to Figure 59 (E).

As shown in Figure 59 (E), during the ending presentation of the LOGO 1500 bonus presentation, a LOGO 3000 mode continuation presentation is executed, and a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO 3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO 3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that control over the specific game state will continue, and it is possible to make the player aware that control over the specific game state will continue.

For example, jackpot game D, jackpot game E, jackpot game G, or jackpot game H
If the main character is defeated by an enemy character in the battle presentation during any of the jackpot games, the game will proceed to a defeat presentation, as shown in Fig. 59(F). The execution of the defeat presentation indicates that the game will be controlled to a non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and the specific game state will end, making it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state will end.

After that, for example, if either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is being played, once the ending effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect has finished, the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus effect ends. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 then returns to the non-time-shortened state, and the effect example shown in Figure 59 (G) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 59 (G), in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a non-time-saving state, a LOGO3000 result display image RH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific gaming state, a LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed until the LOGO3000 mode is changed to the normal presentation mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ends, and a LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus effect is executed until the LOGO3000 mode is changed to the normal presentation mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ends. 59(G), the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating "LOGO 3000 BONUS x 0" and the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating "LOGO 1500 BONUS x 3" are displayed so that they can be distinguished and viewed by the player. This makes it possible for the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 to indicate that the LOGO3000 bonus effect was not executed until the LOGO3000 mode was changed to the normal effect mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ended, and for the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 to indicate that the LOGO1500 bonus effect was executed twice until the LOGO3000 mode was changed to the normal effect mode, i.e., until the specific gaming state ended. Therefore, it is possible for the player to understand that only the LOGO 1500 bonus effect has been executed twice by the time the LOGO 3000 mode is changed to the normal effect mode, i.e., by the time the specific gaming state ends.

On the other hand, for example, if either jackpot game D or jackpot game G is being played, the display will proceed from the example presentation shown in FIG. 59 (F) to the LOGO3000 mode exclusive revival presentation B shown in FIG. 58 (A). When either jackpot game D or jackpot game G ends, the ending presentation with the LOGO1500 bonus presentation will begin.

In this case, the LOGO3000 mode exclusive revival effect B is executed in the ending effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect. In the LOGO3000 mode exclusive revival effect B, as shown in FIG. 58(A), a LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 consisting of the main character and a text image stating "We can still fight!" is displayed. By displaying the LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the specific game state will continue, thereby making it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state will continue.

After the display of the LOGO3000 mode revival effect image FG2 shown in Figure 58(A) has finished, the display proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 58(B). As shown in Figure 58(B), the LOGO3000 mode continuation effect is executed, and a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to indicate to the player that control to the specific game state will continue, thereby making it possible to inform the player that the specific game state will continue.

Next, using Figures 60 to 63, we will explain the variable effects and bonus effects when the LOGO through-out mode is set. The effect examples shown in Figures 60 to 63 are effects that are executed when the LOGO through-out mode is set at the end of jackpot game A when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win in the non-time-saving mode.

First, we will explain the variable effects and bonus effects that will be executed regardless of whether the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B," "10R Time-Shortened Big Win C," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A," or "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B."

As shown in Figure 60 (A), when the LOGO through-out mode is set, a background image depicting a forest scene (LOGO through-out background image G130) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the LOGO through-out background image G130 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that the LOGO through-out mode has been set, i.e., that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state.

If the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination), the execution of a variable effect based on Special Chart Variation Pattern "P31" or "P32" will begin (see Figure 10 (B)). As shown in Figure 60 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will begin to display the variable effects of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and will also begin to display the variable effects of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3.

After that, when the variable effect finishes, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is either a small win or a big win, for example, the repeat number "666" will appear, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop and be displayed, and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also stop and be displayed.

Next, when any of jackpot games C, D, E, or F is played, if the LOGO through-out mode is set, a through-out bonus effect will be executed. Execution of the standard bonus effect begins, and as shown in FIG. 60(C), the opening effect of the LOGO through-out bonus effect is executed for any of the openings of jackpot games C, D, E, or F. During the opening effect of the through-out bonus effect, a through-out opening image G131 indicating "LOGO through-out" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the through-out opening image G131 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that execution of the through-out bonus effect has begun when the LOGO through-out mode is set.

After that, during a round of play of any of jackpot games C, D, E, or F, the example effect shown in FIG. 60(D) will be displayed. As shown in FIG. 60(D), a through-out bonus effect image G132 showing the main character is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the through-out bonus effect image G132 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is informed that a through-out bonus effect is being executed, allowing the player to understand that a through-out bonus effect is being executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 60(D), a prize ball count image SK showing the number of prize balls acquired by the player is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the prize ball count image SK showing "2250 pt" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is able to understand that the number of prize balls acquired since the first win is 2250.

After that, during a round of play of any of jackpot games C, D, E, or F, the example effect shown in Figure 60 (E) will be displayed. As shown in Figure 60 (E), a through-out bonus effect image G132 in which the main character is displayed is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A prize ball count image SK showing "3000pt" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, allowing the player to understand that the number of prize balls won since the first win is 3000.

When the execution of any of jackpot games C, D, E, or F ends and the result of the next special drawing in the time-saving mode is "10R time-saving jackpot B," "10R time-saving jackpot C," "10R time-saving small jackpot A," or "10R time-saving small jackpot B," the display of the through-out bonus effect image G132 will continue on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 60 (F), even if the execution of the variable effect begins. By continuing to display the through-out bonus effect image G132 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that the through-out bonus effect is being executed. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60 (F), the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is being displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, even after the execution of the variable effect has finished, the display of the through-out bonus effect image G132 will continue on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 60(G). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60(G), the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are displayed frozen in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner suggesting a jackpot ("222" in Figure 60(G)). After that, the jackpot game will begin, and the display will proceed to the example effect shown in Figure 61(A).

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 continues to display the through-out bonus effect image G132. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(B), during the round play of any of the jackpot games C, D, E, F, G, or H, a through-out bonus effect may be executed, in which a through-out band image G133 displaying "Through-out Judge?" is displayed on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating whether a through-out fall branching effect will be executed. Then, the effect example shown in FIG. 61(B) may proceed to the effect example shown in FIG. 62(A). Also, as shown in FIG. 61(B), a prize ball count image SK indicating "3600 points" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in Figure 61 (B), the prize ball count image SK is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, making it possible to understand that the number of game balls won since the first win is 3,600.

In addition, when any of jackpot games C, D, E, F, G, or H is being played, the through-out bonus effect may proceed directly from the example shown in Figure 61 (A) to the example shown in Figure 62 (A) without the fall-inducing effect being executed.

For example, when proceeding from the presentation example shown in Figure 61 (A) or the presentation example shown in Figure 61 (B) to the presentation example shown in Figure 62 (A), the execution of a through-out fall branching presentation may begin in the through-out bonus presentation. The through-out fall branching presentation will either branch to a fall presentation, which ends the execution of the through-out bonus presentation, or branch to a continuation presentation, which continues the execution of the through-out bonus presentation.

When the through-out bonus fall branching effect is executed during the through-out bonus effect, as shown in Figure 62 (A), a left door image G134L, a right door image G134R, and a text image G135 indicating "Through-out Judge" are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, in the through-out fall branching effect, the display of the left door image G134L, right door image G134R, and text image G135 indicating "Through-out Judge" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 ends, and the effect example shown in Figure 62(A) progresses to the effect example shown in Figure 62(B). As shown in Figure 62(B), a text image G136 indicating "Keep pressing the button and the door will open to continue the LOGO rush" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, in the through-out fall branching effect, the effect example shown in Figure 62(B) will progress to the effect example shown in Figure 63(A). As shown in Figure 63(A), the left door image G134L and the right door image G134R displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are slightly open. Also, at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a button image BS imitating the effect button 63 and a text image MO stating "Keep pressing" are displayed. By displaying the button image BS and text image MO on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to encourage the player to continue pressing the effect button 63.

In addition, in the round play of any of the jackpot games C, D, F, and G, in the through-out bonus effect, the through-out fall branching effect will proceed to a continuation effect (see FIG. 63 (B-1)) in which the execution of the through-out bonus effect continues. As shown in FIG. 63 (B-1), the left door image G134L and the right door image G134R shown in FIG. 63 (A) are in a more open state than the open state. Also, as shown in FIG. 63 (B-1), a continuation image G138 indicating "Breakthrough" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, a continuation icon image G137 showing the main character is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of the continuation icon image G137 and the continuation image G138 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 makes it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state will continue.

After that, regardless of the ending time of any of the jackpot games, jackpot game C, jackpot game D, jackpot game F, or jackpot game G, the display proceeds from the example presentation shown in FIG. 63 (B-1) to the example presentation shown in FIG. 63 (C-1). As shown in FIG. 63 (C-1), in the ending presentation of the LOGO through-out bonus presentation, a LOGO through-out mode continuation presentation (continuation suggestion presentation) is executed, and a through-out continuation suggestion image G142 indicating "Through-out mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the through-out continuation suggestion image G142 indicating "Through-out mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested that control in the specific game state will continue, making it possible for the player to understand that control in the specific game state will continue.

The execution of the through-out fall branching effect in the through-out bonus effect will end, and the execution of the through-out bonus effect will continue. After that, regardless of whether the result of the lottery for the next special chart 2 in the time-saving state is "10R time-saving big win B," "10R time-saving big win C," "10R time-saving small win A," or "10R time-saving small win B," when the execution of the variable effect begins, as shown in Figure 63 (C-1), the through-out bonus effect image G132 will continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, allowing the player to understand as if the through-out bonus effect is being executed.

On the other hand, regardless of the ending time of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H, the through-out bonus effect will cause the through-out fall branching effect to proceed to a fall effect (see Figure 63 (B-2)), which will end the execution of the through-out bonus effect. As shown in Figure 63 (B-2), the left door image G134L and the right door image G134R are completely closed. In addition, a text image G135 reading "Through-out Judgement" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, at the end of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H, the through-out fall branching effect ends, and the through-out bonus effect ends. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to the non-time-shortening state, and the effect example shown in Figure 63 (C-2) appears.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to the non-time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 63 (C-2), a through-out result display image RH3 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The through-out bonus execution count image SB4 indicates the number of times the through-out bonus effect has been executed in the specific gaming state, and the through-out bonus execution count image SB4 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The through-out bonus execution count image SB4 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 indicates to the player that the through-out bonus effect has been executed once in the specific gaming state, allowing the player to understand that the through-out bonus effect has been executed once. Furthermore, the total prize ball count image KS displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that the number of prize balls the player has acquired in the advantageous gaming state is 4,500.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, whether the presentation mode is set to LOGO standard mode or LOGO 3000 mode, the ending effect of the bonus effect suggests that control of the specific game state will continue at the ending time of jackpot game C (5000 ms) or the ending time of jackpot game F (5000 ms). On the other hand, whether the presentation mode is set to LOGO standard mode or LOGO 3000 mode, whether the presentation mode is set to LOGO standard mode or LOGO 3000 mode, the ending effect of the bonus effect suggests that control of the specific game state will end at the ending time of jackpot game D (13000 ms) or the ending time of jackpot game G (13000 ms), and then a revival effect (LOGO standard mode-exclusive revival effect A, LOGO 3000 mode-exclusive revival effect B) is performed suggesting that control of the specific game state will continue, suggesting that control of the specific game state will continue.

However, as explained using Figure 63, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the ending effect of the bonus effect suggests that control of the specific game state will continue at the ending time of jackpot game C (5000 ms) or the ending time of jackpot game F (5000 ms). Furthermore, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, at the ending time of jackpot game D (13000 ms) or the ending time of jackpot game G (13000 ms), unlike when the LOGO standard mode or the LOGO 3000 mode is set, the ending effect of the bonus effect suggests that control of the specific game state will end, but does not actually execute a revival effect suggesting that control of the specific game state will continue. Instead, only one of the effects suggesting that control of the specific game state will end or that control of the specific game state will continue is executed. This makes it possible to provide an innovative pachinko gaming machine in which the execution rate of the revival effect and the execution rate of the continuation effect at the ending time can be changed depending on the specific game state presentation mode, even if the ending time of the jackpot game differs depending on the winning symbol (small win symbol, jackpot symbol) (see Figure 8).

9. Jackpot Signal Next, using Fig. 64 to Fig. 66, when a specific game state presentation mode (LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, LOGO through-out mode) is set, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 will be described when the lottery result for the special chart is a winning win (small win, jackpot win).

First, using Figure 64, we will explain the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 when the LOGO standard mode is set and the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, jackpot winning combination).

First, as shown in Figure 64 (A), when LOGO standard mode is set, each time an opening command is received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 increments the value of the LOGO bonus effect counter by 1 in step S4703 of the opening effect selection process (S4410).

As shown in Figure 64(A), if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 while in LOGO Standard mode is a jackpot, the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner as shown in Figure 64(B), and then the second special symbol will be displayed as a jackpot symbol (e.g., "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," see Figure 8). At the same time, as shown in Figure 64(C), the condition device and continuous operation of the bonus device will be activated, starting the execution of a Type 1 jackpot game, and the output state of the jackpot signal from external terminal board 119 will be turned ON as shown in Figure 64(F). Note that when the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game starts, the execution of the LOGO Standard Bonus effect will also start as shown in Figure 64(A). After that, at the same time as the execution of the Type 1 jackpot game ends, the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device are stopped (see Figures 64(C) and 64(D)), and the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board 119 is turned OFF (see Figure 64(F)). When the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game ends, the execution of the LOGO standard bonus effect also ends (see Figure 64(A)).

If the LOGO standard mode is set and the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is a small prize, the second special symbol will change and be displayed. If the second special symbol then stops and displays the small prize symbol "Special Chart 2 - Small Prize Symbol a" or "Special Chart 2 - Small Prize Symbol b" (see Figures 64(B) and 8), a small prize game will be played. Simultaneously with the execution of the small prize game, the LOGO standard bonus effect will be executed, as shown in Figure 64(A). Then, when the specific area sensor 39a detects the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 during the small prize game (see Figure 64(E)), the execution of the Type 2 jackpot game will be initiated. At the same time, the condition device will be activated (see Figure 64(C)), the bonus device continuous operation device will be activated (see Figure 64(D)), and the jackpot signal output state from the external terminal board 119 will be turned ON (see Figure 64(F)).

Then, the execution of the jackpot game ends, and the operation of the condition device and the consecutive role-playing device ends (see Figures 64(C) and 64(D)). At the same time, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns OFF (see Figure 64(F)). Furthermore, when the execution of this type 2 jackpot game ends, the execution of the LOGO standard bonus effect also ends (see Figure 64(A)).

Furthermore, when LOGO standard mode is set, if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot win, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 64(B)), and then the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol (e.g., "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," see Figure 8). Then, the condition device is activated (see Figure 64(C)), the bonus device continuous operation device is activated (see Figure 64(D)), the execution of a Type 1 jackpot game begins, and the output state of the jackpot signal from external terminal board 119 becomes ON (see Figure 64(F)). When the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game begins, the execution of the LOGO standard bonus presentation also begins (see Figure 64(A)). After that, when the execution of the Type 1 jackpot game ends and the operation of the condition device and the consecutive role-playing device also ends (see Figures 64(C) and 64(D)), the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns OFF (see Figure 64(F)). When the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game ends, the execution of the LOGO standard bonus effect exclusive to the LOGO standard mode also ends (see Figure 64(A)).

As explained using Figure 64, even when the LOGO standard mode is set on this type of pachinko gaming machine 1, the output state of the jackpot signal will be turned ON as soon as a jackpot game begins, and the value of the LOGO bonus effect counter will be incremented by 1 by the effect control microcomputer 91 each time a jackpot game is played and an opening command is received. In other words, even when the LOGO standard bonus effect is executed while the LOGO standard mode is set, which makes one jackpot game appear as one jackpot game, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 will be turned ON each time the special chart lottery result is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot).

Next, using Figure 65, we will explain the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 when the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a win (small win, jackpot) while the LOGO3000 mode is set.

First, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, upon receiving an opening command from the main control board 80, the value of the LOGO3000 bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 by the effect control microcomputer 91 only when an opening command for the first jackpot game is received in step S4706 of the opening effect selection process (S4410), which starts the execution of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. When the LOGO3000 mode is set, upon receiving an opening command from the main control board 80, the value of the LOGO1500 bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 by the effect control microcomputer 91 only when an opening command for the first jackpot game, which starts the execution of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, is received in step S4708 of the opening effect selection process (S4410).

As shown in Figure 65(A), even when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot win, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 65(B)), and then the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol (e.g., "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," see Figure 8). At the same time that the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, the condition device is activated (see Figure 65(C)), and the bonus device continuous operation device is activated (see Figure 65(D)), and the execution of a Type 1 jackpot game begins. At the same time that the Type 1 jackpot game begins, the output state of the jackpot signal from external terminal board 119 becomes ON (see Figure 65(F)). Note that when the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game begins, the execution of the LOGO1500 bonus effect, which is exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode, may also begin. Thereafter, the accessory continuous operation device and the condition device stop, i.e., the execution of the jackpot game ends (see Figures 65(C) and 65(D)), and at the same time, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns OFF (see Figure 65(F)). Note that when the execution of this type 1 jackpot game ends, if a LOGO1500 bonus effect is being executed, the execution of that LOGO1500 bonus effect also ends.

If the result of the lottery for Special Symbol 2 is a small prize while the LOGO3000 mode is set (see Figure 65(A)), the second special symbol will change and be displayed (see Figure 65(B)), and the second special symbol may then stop and be displayed as the small prize symbol "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol a" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol b." Then, when the specific area sensor 39a detects the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 during the small prize game (see Figure 65(E)), the execution of the Type 2 Big Prize game begins, the condition device is activated (see Figure 65(C)), the bonus device continuous operation device is activated (see Figure 65(D)), and the output state of the big prize signal from the external terminal board 119 becomes ON (see Figure 65(F)). When this type 2 jackpot game begins, the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode, may begin (see Figure 65 (A)).

Then, as soon as the operation of the condition device and the consecutive device operation device is stopped (see Figures 65(C) and 65(D)), i.e., the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 is set to OFF (see Figure 65(F)). Furthermore, when the execution of this two-type jackpot game is completed and the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode is being executed, the execution of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is completed (see Figure 65(A)).

When LOGO3000 mode is set (see Figure 65(A)), if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot win, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 65(B)), and then the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol (for example, "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C", "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D", see Figure 8). When the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, the condition device is activated (see Figure 65(C)), and the device for continuous operation of the bonus items is activated (see Figure 65(D)), and the execution of a Type 1 jackpot game begins. At the same time that the execution of the Type 1 jackpot game begins, the output state of the jackpot signal from external terminal board 119 becomes ON (see Figure 65(F)). When this Type 1 jackpot game begins, if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was executed in the previous jackpot game, the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, which is exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode, will begin (see Figure 65(A)). After that, the consecutive device operation device and the condition device stop, meaning the jackpot game ends (see Figures 65(C) and 65(D)), and at the same time, the jackpot signal output from external terminal board 119 turns OFF (see Figure 65(F)). When this Type 1 jackpot game ends, the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect will end (see Figure 65(F)).

As explained using Figure 65, when the LOGO3000 mode is set in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, the output state of the jackpot signal is set to ON each time a jackpot game is started. However, the value of the LOGO3000 bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 by the effect control microcomputer 91 only when an opening command for the first jackpot game, which starts the execution of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, is received. On the other hand, when the LOGO1500 bonus effect is executed, the value of the LOGO1500 bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 by the effect control microcomputer 91 only when an opening command for the jackpot game is received. In other words, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, whether the LOGO3000 bonus presentation, which makes two jackpot games look like one jackpot game, or the LOGO1500 bonus presentation, which makes one jackpot game look like one jackpot game, is executed, the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board 119 will be turned ON every time the special chart lottery result is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot, Type 2 jackpot).

Next, using Figure 66, we will explain the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 when the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning win (small win, jackpot win) while the LOGO through-out mode is set.

First, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, if the result of the special drawing during the time-saving mode is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination), the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 in step S4710 of the opening effect selection process (S4410). However, even if the result of the special drawing is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination) after the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is incremented by 1, the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter will never become 2 or greater.

First, while the LOGO through-out mode is set (see Figure 66(A)), if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a jackpot win while the LOGO through-out bonus effect has not yet begun, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 66(B)), and then the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol (e.g., "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," see Figure 8). At the same time that the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, the condition device and the device continuous operation device are activated (see Figures 66(C) and 66(D)), and the jackpot signal output from external terminal board 119 is turned ON (see Figure 66(F)). When the execution of this Type 1 jackpot game begins, the LOGO through-out bonus effect begins. After that, the consecutive operation device and the condition device stop (see Figures 66(C) and 66(D)), i.e., the execution of the jackpot game ends, and at the same time, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns OFF (see Figure 66(F)). Note that if the LOGO through-out mode is set, the execution of the through-out bonus effect will continue even after the execution of this type 1 jackpot game ends (see Figure 66(A)).

After that, when the LOGO through-out mode is set (see FIG. 66(A)), if the result of the lottery for Special Symbol 2 is a small prize win, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol is displayed as a small prize symbol ("Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol a" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol b"; see FIG. 8) (see FIG. 66(B)). After that, during the execution of a small prize game executed when the second special symbol is displayed as a small prize symbol, "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol a" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol b," if the specific area sensor 39a detects the passage of the game ball into the specific area 39 (see FIG. 66(E)), the condition device is activated (see FIG. 66(C)), the bonus device continuous operation device is activated (see FIG. 66(D)), the execution of a type 2 jackpot game is initiated, and the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 becomes ON (see FIG. 66(F)). As shown in Figure 66 (A), the through-out bonus effect continues to be executed.

After that, as soon as the operation of the condition device and the consecutive device operation device is stopped (see Figures 66(C) and 66(D)), i.e., the execution of the jackpot game is completed, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 becomes OFF (see Figure 66(F)). Note that if the LOGO through-out mode is set, the execution of the through-out bonus effect will continue even when the execution of this two-type jackpot game is completed (see Figure 66(A)).

If the lottery result for Special Chart 2 while the LOGO through-out mode is set is a jackpot win, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (see Figure 66(B)), and then the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol (e.g., "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D," see Figure 8). At the same time that the second special symbol is displayed as a jackpot symbol, the condition device is activated (see Figure 66(C)), the special device continuous operation device is activated (see Figure 66(D)), and the jackpot signal output from external terminal board 119 is set to ON (see Figure 66(F)). Then, the special device continuous operation device and the condition device are stopped (see Figures 66(C) and 66(D)), i.e., the jackpot game ends, and at the same time, the jackpot signal output from external terminal board 119 is set to OFF (see Figure 66(F)). Furthermore, if the LOGO through-out mode is set, the through-out bonus effect will continue to be executed even after the execution of this type 1 jackpot game has ended (see Figure 66 (A)).

As explained using Figure 66, even when the LOGO through-out mode is set in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the output state of the jackpot signal is turned ON each time a jackpot game is started. However, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, when the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is incremented by 1 in the special game state, the value of the LOGO through-out bonus effect counter is then incremented, and one execution of the LOGO through-out bonus effect continues. In other words, when the LOGO standard mode is set, each time the special chart lottery result is a jackpot (type 1 jackpot, type 2 jackpot), the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 is turned ON. On the other hand, once the execution of the LOGO standard bonus effect is started, the system is subsequently controlled to the non-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, so the execution of the LOGO through-out bonus effect continues.

As explained using Figures 64 to 66, in this form of pachinko gaming machine 1, the way in which the effect control microcomputer 91 counts the number of times a bonus effect is executed varies depending on the effect mode that is set among the specific game state effect modes (LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, LOGO through-out mode). However, regardless of which effect mode is set among the specific game state effect modes (LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, LOGO through-out mode), when the result of the special chart lottery is a win (small win, big win), the number of times the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns ON and the time from when the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 turns ON until it returns to the OFF state are the same.

10. Effects of the First Embodiment As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, even if the LOGO through-out bonus effect, which indicates that the game is controlled to a specific game state, ends after the end of a jackpot game, the LOGO through-out bonus effect continues when the game is controlled to a specific game state. As a result, the execution of the LOGO through-out bonus effect continues, providing the player with a novel effect that heightens the player's desire for the specific game state to continue for a long time, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, if a jackpot game is being played while the LOGO through out mode is set among the LOGO standard mode, LOGO3000 mode, and LOGO through out mode, a LOGO through out bonus effect may be executed. On the other hand, if a jackpot game is being played while the LOGO3000 mode is set, a LOGO3000 bonus effect or a LOGO1500 bonus effect is executed. This makes it possible to enjoy the LOGO through out bonus effect during a jackpot game when the LOGO through out mode is set, and to enjoy the LOGO3000 bonus effect or a LOGO1500 bonus effect during a jackpot game when the LOGO3000 mode is set.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, the revival effect is not executed in the LOGO through-out bonus effect, but when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the LOGO3000-specific revival effect B may be executed in either the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO1500 bonus effect. This provides an innovative pachinko gaming machine in which a revival effect may or may not be executed in a jackpot game effect depending on the effect mode set among the specific game state effect modes, thereby making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as any of "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol a," or "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol b," the machine will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the LOGO through-out mode is set, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as any of "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol a," or "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol b," a presentation is executed suggesting that the machine will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the second special symbol is either "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," a LOGO3000-only revival effect B may be executed in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or in the LOGO1500 bonus effect. Also, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the second special symbol is either "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," a display suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game may be executed in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or in the LOGO1500 bonus effect. This provides an innovative gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not a winning symbol that is stopped and displayed, but rather, depending on the presentation mode that is set, it is possible to change whether a presentation suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, a revival presentation, or only a presentation suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, or whether only a presentation suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set and control of the specific gaming state ends, a LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect will be executed until the specific gaming state ends, and a LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus effect will be executed in that specific gaming state are displayed separately (see Figure 59 (G)). This makes it possible to provide an innovative pachinko gaming machine 1 that allows the player to properly check the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect has been executed in the specific gaming state and the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus effect has been executed in the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the LOGO standard bonus effect and the LOGO 1500 bonus effect are jackpot game effects that suggest the execution of one jackpot game, and the LOGO 3000 bonus effect is a jackpot game effect that suggests the execution of two jackpot games as if it were one jackpot game. As a result, depending on the LOGO 1500 bonus effect or the LOGO 3000 bonus effect that is executed, it is possible to show the player a variety of bonus effects even though the set presentation mode is the same, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the LOGO standard bonus effect and the LOGO 1500 bonus effect are jackpot game effects that suggest the execution of one jackpot game, and the LOGO through-out bonus effect is a bonus effect that changes from the LOGO through-out mode to the normal effect mode, i.e., suggests that the variable effects and jackpot game effects executed from the start of the specific gaming state to the end of the specific gaming state represent the execution of one jackpot game. As a result, the LOGO standard bonus effect, LOGO 1500 bonus effect, or LOGO through-out bonus effect that is executed can show the player a variety of bonus effects even though the set effect mode is the same, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the execution of one jackpot game is counted by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the execution of one LOGO1500 bonus effect, and the execution of two jackpot games is counted by the effect control microcomputer 91 as the execution of one LOGO3000 bonus effect. As a result, after the control of the specific gaming state has ended and for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds), the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 and the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 make it possible to accurately grasp the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus effect and the LOGO1500 bonus effect have been executed in the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, regardless of whether a LOGO standard bonus effect, a LOGO 1500 bonus effect, a LOGO 3000 bonus effect, or a LOGO through-out bonus effect is executed, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a win (small win or big win), the output state of the big win signal from the external terminal board 119 is always turned ON (see Figures 64, 65, and 66). As a result, regardless of whether a LOGO standard bonus effect, a LOGO 3000 bonus effect, a LOGO 1500 bonus effect, or a LOGO through-out bonus effect is provided to the player, it is possible to accurately convey the number of times the special symbol lottery result has been a win.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set and the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed, or when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the LOGO through-out bonus effect is executed, the output state of the jackpot signal from the external terminal board 119 is always ON (see Figures 65 and 66). As a result, when providing the player with either the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO through-out bonus effect, it is possible to accurately convey the number of times the special chart lottery result has been a win.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the LOGO3000 bonus effect that can be performed when the LOGO3000 mode is set allows the player to understand that the time-saving state will be entered after the jackpot game has ended, and that the result of the next lottery on Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state after the jackpot game has ended will be a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), confirming the execution of the jackpot game. As a result, the LOGO3000 bonus effect allows the time-saving state to be entered after the jackpot game has ended, and this innovative bonus effect gives the strong impression that the execution of the next jackpot game is confirmed, making it possible to get the player excited and increase their interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in the time-shortened state is a jackpot, there is an 81% chance that control of the time-shortened state will continue after the end of the Type 1 jackpot game (see Figure 8). Also, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in the time-shortened state is a small jackpot, there is an 81% chance that control of the time-shortened state will continue after the end of the Type 2 jackpot game (see Figure 8). When the LOGO3000 mode is set, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the lottery result for special chart 2 in the time-shortened state is a jackpot is 70%, but when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the execution rate of the LOGO1500 bonus effect when the lottery result for special chart 2 in the time-shortened state is a jackpot is 11%. As a result, although the likelihood of the time-saving state continuing to be controlled after the end of a jackpot game remains the same, the novelty of the difference between the likelihood of the LOGO3000 bonus effect being executed when the LOGO3000 mode is set and the likelihood of the LOGO1500 bonus effect being executed can be visually entertaining to players and increase their interest in the game.

11. Modifications Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components according to the modifications may be appropriately combined. Of course, the components according to the first embodiment and the components according to the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in the above first embodiment and the following modifications may be deleted as appropriate unless they are described as essential in this specification.

Second Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the LOGO3000 mode, which is a specific game state presentation mode, is set and the lottery result for the special chart 2 is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the probability that the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation will be executed is predetermined to 70%. However, this is not limited to this. For example, as in the second embodiment described below, when the LOGO3000 mode, which is a specific game state presentation mode, is set and the lottery result for the special chart 2 is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the probability that the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation will be executed (hereinafter also referred to as the execution probability of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation) may be selectable by the player.

In the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small win or big win) while the LOGO3000 mode, a specific game state presentation mode, is set, the player can select the probability of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation during the customer waiting presentation by pressing the presentation button 63 and the select button 64. First, we will explain the customer waiting presentation using Figure 67.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the customer waiting display mode, it is possible for the customer waiting display to be performed. The customer waiting display may be performed before a special symbol change begins after the power is turned on, or if the next special symbol change does not begin for a predetermined time after a special symbol change. For example, the customer waiting display is performed as shown in Figure 67 if the next special symbol change does not occur for a predetermined time after a special symbol change. In this form, the waiting image displayed by the customer waiting display basically changes in four stages.

Figure 69 (A) shows the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the display of the variable effect symbol 8 is displayed as a stopped symbol against the normal daytime background image G102 (symbol stopped image). In addition, the small symbol KZ is also displayed as a stopped symbol in the upper left area.

Figure 69 (B) shows the state in which the selection standby image G232 is displayed. The selection standby image G232 is a standby image indicating that pressing the up or down button on the select button 64 will transition to a distribution custom effect, which allows customizing the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. The selection standby image G232 is also a standby image indicating that pressing the left or right button on the select button 64 will allow the set volume to be changed. The stopped-displayed performance symbol 8 and small symbol KZ are also shown.

Figure 69 (C) shows the state in which the hall code corresponding image G233 is displayed. The hall code corresponding image G233 is a standby image that shows the main character and the name of the amusement facility corresponding to the hall code information. The hall code information is information that can be displayed by entering a predetermined number of digits corresponding to each amusement facility.

Figure 69 (D) shows the state in which the customer waiting demo image G231 is displayed. In this embodiment, the customer waiting demo image G231 is a waiting image showing a battle between the main character and an enemy character in this pachinko gaming machine 1. This customer waiting demo image G231 is able to appropriately appeal to players who are unsure which gaming machine to play at the gaming parlor, and this pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, when the variable effect ends and the display of the effect symbol 8 remains stationary for a predetermined time (approximately 30 seconds) (see FIG. 69(A)), a selection standby image G232 is displayed (see FIG. 69(B)). Furthermore, when the selection standby image G232 is displayed for a predetermined time (approximately 30 seconds), a hall code corresponding image G233 is displayed (see FIG. 69(C)). Furthermore, when the hall code corresponding image G233 is displayed for a predetermined time (approximately 30 seconds), a customer waiting demo image G231 is displayed (see FIG. 69(D)). Furthermore, when the customer waiting demo image G231 is displayed for a predetermined time (approximately 30 seconds), a selection standby image G232 is displayed (see FIG. 69(B)).

In other words, as shown in Figure 69, in this form of customer waiting effect, during periods when special chart changes are not being performed, it is possible to repeatedly execute a selection waiting demo effect that can display a selection waiting image G232, a hall code corresponding demo effect that can display a hall code corresponding image G233, and a specific demo effect that can display a customer waiting demo image G231, in this order. Furthermore, if a special chart change is initiated during a customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect can be terminated and a change effect can be executed.

<LOGO3000 Bonus Effects in the Second Embodiment>
Next, the allocation custom effect of the second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 72. When the up button or down button of the select button 64 is pressed while the selection standby image G232 shown in Figure 69 (B) is displayed, the allocation custom effect is executed in the customer waiting effect, and an allocation custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 70 (A).

As shown in FIG. 70(A), a custom sorting image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The custom sorting image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a title image indicating "Custom sorting," a text image DK1 indicating "Custom sorting," an item image DK2 indicating "Back," an arrow image YZ, a select button operation image SR consisting of an image imitating the select button 64 and a text image indicating "Select up or down," and a performance button operation image TB consisting of an image imitating the performance button 63 and a text image indicating "Confirm."

The select button operation image SR of the allocation custom image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that by pressing the up or down button of the select button 64, the text image indicated by the arrow image YZ can be changed to the text image DK1 indicating "Allocation Custom" or the item image DK2 indicating "Back." Furthermore, the effect button operation image TB of the allocation custom image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that by pressing the effect button 63, the text image indicated by the arrow image YZ will be selected to either the text image DK1 indicating "Allocation Custom" or the item image DK2 indicating "Back." Furthermore, when the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 switches from displaying the selection standby image G232 to displaying the allocation custom image G234, as shown in FIG. 70(A), the arrow image YZ displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will show the text image DK1 indicating "Allocation Custom."

Furthermore, when the sorting custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, pressing the down button of the select button 64 will cause the arrow image YZ to point to the item image DK2 indicating "Back" (see Figure 70 (B)).

After that, for example, when the allocation customization image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if the up button of the select button 64 is pressed and the arrow image YZ selects the text image DK1 indicating "Allocation Customization," and the player presses the effect button 63, the allocation customization is confirmed and the display proceeds to the effect example in Figure 71 (A).

For example, when proceeding to the effect example of Figure 71 (A), a custom allocation image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The custom allocation image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a title text image indicating "Custom Allocation," a text image indicating "LOGO3000 Bonus Effect," a text image indicating the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, an execution rate numerical image area JS including eight reliability numerical images, an item image indicating "Back," an item image indicating "Initialize," a select button operation image SR consisting of an image imitating the select button 64 and a text image indicating "Up/Down to Select, Left/Right to Switch," and an effect button operation image TB.

The select button operation image SR of the allocation custom image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that by pressing the up or down button of the select button 64, the image can be changed to a text image indicating the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, a "back" item image, or an "initialize" item image. Furthermore, the select button operation image SR of the allocation custom image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that by pressing the left or right button of the select button 64, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect can be selected.

For example, when the allocation custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the arrow image YZ selects a text image indicating the LOGO3000 bonus effect, each time the right button of the select button 64 is pressed once, one white execution percentage numeric image in the execution percentage numeric image area JS displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be changed to a black execution percentage numeric image. Each time a white execution percentage numeric image is changed to a black execution percentage numeric image, the player can understand that the execution percentage of the LOGO3000 bonus effect has increased by 10%.

Furthermore, when the allocation custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the arrow image YZ selects a text image indicating the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, each time the left button of the select button 64 is pressed once, one black execution rate numeric image in the execution rate numeric image area JS can be changed to a white execution rate numeric image. Each time a black execution rate numeric image is changed to a white execution rate numeric image, the player can understand that the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect has decreased by 10%.

For example, when the example presentation shown in Figure 71 (A) is displayed and the arrow image YZ selects the text image indicating the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus presentation, if the player presses the right button of the select button 64 five times, the presentation will proceed to the example presentation shown in Figure 71 (B).

As shown in Figure 71(B), of the ten execution percentage number images in the execution percentage number image area JS, the five white execution percentage number images located on the far left have changed to black execution percentage number images, and the text image indicating "0%" has changed to a text image indicating an execution percentage value of "50%." By displaying the allocation custom image G234 shown in Figure 71(B), the player can understand that by pressing the select button 64, they have selected the execution percentage of the LOGO3000 bonus effect to be "50%."

Then, the display example shown in FIG. 72(A) appears. For example, if the arrow image YZ selects a text image indicating the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect, and the player further presses the right button of the select button 64 three times, all of the eight execution rate numeric images in the execution rate numeric image area JS displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will turn black, as shown in FIG. 72(A). As a result, the allocation custom image G234 shown in FIG. 72(A) is displayed, allowing the player to understand that by pressing the select button 64, the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect has been set to the maximum of "81%." Note that in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect can be set up to "81%." Here, the execution rate of "81%" is the same as the rate (81%) at which the time-saving state will continue to be controlled after the end of the executed jackpot game if either a Type 1 or Type 2 jackpot is won in the lottery on Special Chart 2.

Then, when the player presses the effect button 63 once, the execution rate ("81%) of the LOGO3000 bonus effect selected by the player is selected and confirmed, and the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is set to "81%" by the effect control microcomputer 91. In this case, the process proceeds from Figure 72 (A) to Figure 72 (B).

As shown in Figure 72 (B), a setting content image G235 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting content image G235 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a text image indicating that the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect selected and determined by the player is "81%". By displaying the setting content image G235 shown in Figure 72 (B) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it becomes possible for the player to understand that the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect selected and determined by the player himself is 81%.

When a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the setting content image G235 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the allocation customization effect will end, and the setting content image G235 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will change to the selection standby image G232 (see Figure 69 (B)).

[Received command analysis processing in the second embodiment] Next, the received command analysis processing (S4201) in the second embodiment will be described in detail using Figure 73. Note that the received command analysis processing (S4201) in the second embodiment shown in Figure 73 will omit a description of processing that is similar to the received command analysis processing (S4201) in the first embodiment.

In the received command analysis process (S4201) of the second embodiment, if the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received an ending command in step S4414 (NO in S4413), or after performing the ending performance selection process (S4414), it proceeds to step S4416.

In step S4416, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether a customer waiting standby command has been received (S4416). If a customer waiting standby command has been received (YES in S4416), the performance control microcomputer 91 performs customer waiting performance processing (S4417), followed by the custom setting processing (S4418) described below, and then proceeds to step S4415.

[Customer waiting effect processing in the second embodiment] During the customer waiting effect processing (S4417), the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) in the customer waiting timer and sets the customer waiting flag value to "1." Here, the customer waiting timer is a counter that measures the display timing of various images (selection waiting image G232, hall code corresponding image G233, customer waiting demo image G231; see Figure 69) that are displayed sequentially as customer waiting effects. Note that the period from when the sub-control board 90 receives a customer waiting command until it receives the next fluctuation start command (i.e., the period during which the customer waiting wait flag is ON in the main control board 80) is referred to as the customer waiting state.

The customer waiting flag is a flag that indicates the stage of the customer waiting state. In detail, as shown in the table in Figure 73, a customer waiting flag of "0" indicates that the machine is not currently in a customer waiting state (i.e., not currently waiting for a customer). A customer waiting flag of "1" indicates that the machine is currently displaying a stopped image in which the performance symbol 8 has completely stopped (i.e., the machine has started waiting for a customer). A customer waiting flag of "2" indicates that the machine is currently displaying the selection waiting image G232. A customer waiting flag of "3" indicates that the machine is currently displaying the hall code corresponding image G233. A customer waiting flag of "4" indicates that the machine is currently displaying the customer waiting demo image G231. A customer waiting flag of "5" indicates that the machine is currently displaying the distribution custom image G234, the distribution custom image G234, and the setting content image G235.

In the customer waiting effect processing (S4417), the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the still symbol image shown in FIG. 69 (A) (a state in which effect symbol 8 is displayed still). When the waiting time set in the customer waiting timer (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a new waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) in the customer waiting timer and sets the value of the customer waiting flag to "2." When the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the value of the customer waiting flag to "2," it is time to switch from the still symbol image to the selection waiting image G232, so it sets a selection waiting image display command to display the selection waiting image G232 in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the selection waiting image display command set here, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the selection waiting image G232 (see FIG. 69 (B)) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This starts the customer waiting effect in this form.

Furthermore, in the customer waiting effect processing (S4417), the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the selection waiting image G232 shown in FIG. 69 (B). When the waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) set in the customer waiting timer has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a new waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) in the customer waiting timer and sets the value of the customer waiting flag to "3." Because it is now time to switch from the selection waiting image G232 to the hall code corresponding image G233, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a hall code corresponding image display command to display the hall code corresponding image G233 in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the hall code corresponding image display command set here, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the hall code corresponding image G233 (see FIG. 69 (C)) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Furthermore, in the customer waiting effect processing (S4417), the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the hall code corresponding image G233 shown in Figure 69 (C). When the waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) set in the customer waiting timer has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a new waiting time (e.g., 30 seconds) in the customer waiting timer and sets the value of the customer waiting flag to "4." Because it is now time to switch from the hall code corresponding image G233 to the customer waiting demo image G231, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a customer waiting demo image display command to display the customer waiting demo image G231 in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the customer waiting demo image display command set here, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the customer waiting demo image G231 (see Figure 69 (D)) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Furthermore, in the customer waiting effect processing (S4417) of the second embodiment, when the selection waiting image G232 shown in FIG. 69(B) is displayed, if the select button detection switch 64a detects that the up or down button on the select button 64 is pressed, the effect control microcomputer 91 resets the customer waiting timer to "0" and sets the customer waiting flag to "5" even if the waiting time set in the customer waiting timer (e.g., 30 seconds) has not yet elapsed. Since this is the timing to switch from the selection waiting image G232 to the allocation custom image G234, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a distribution custom image display command for displaying the distribution custom image G234 in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Upon receiving the distribution custom image display command set here, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the distribution custom image G234 shown in FIG. 70(A) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This allows the player to press the select button 64 and effect button 63 while the allocation custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, select either the "Allocation Custom" text image DK1 or the "Back" item image DK2, and confirm the selection.

[Custom Setting Process of the Second Embodiment] Next, the custom setting process (S4418) of the second embodiment will be described in detail using Figures 74 and 75. As shown in Figure 74, the custom setting process (S4418) first determines whether the value of the customer waiting flag is "5" (S5101). If the value of the customer waiting flag is not "5" (NO in S5101), this process ends and proceeds to step S4415 in Figure 73. Furthermore, if it is determined that the value of the customer waiting flag is "5" (YES in S5101), it determines whether the sorting custom image G234 is being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (S5102). If it is determined that the sorting custom image G234 is being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (YES in S5102), it proceeds to step S5103. Furthermore, if it is determined that the sorting custom image G234 is not being displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (NO in S5101), proceed to step S5103.

In step S5103, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the selection of the "Custom Sorting" item image shown in the custom sorting image G234 has been confirmed, i.e., whether the normal button detection switch 40a has detected the arrow image YZ shown in the custom sorting image G234 while pointing to the "Custom Sorting" item image (S5103). If the selection of the "Custom Sorting" text image DK1 shown in the custom sorting image G234 has been confirmed (YES in S5103), the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a custom sorting image display command for displaying the custom sorting image G234 in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Upon receiving the custom sorting image display command set here, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the custom sorting image G234 shown in FIG. 70(A) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, if the selection of the "sorting custom" text image DK1 shown in the sorting custom image G234 has not been confirmed (NO in S5103), proceed to step S5105.

Next, in step S5105, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the sorting custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (S5105). If the sorting custom image G234 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (YES in S5105), it determines whether the "Back" item image DK2 or the "Initialize" item image indicated by the sorting custom image G234 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has been determined, that is, whether the performance button detection switch 63a detected the arrow image YZ indicated on the sorting custom image G234 while it was pointing to the "Back" item image DK2 or the "Initialize" item image (S5106). If the "Back" item image or the "Initialize" item image has not been determined (NO in S5106), proceed to step S5107. Also, if the "Back" item image DK2 or the "Initialize" item image is selected (YES in S5106), proceed to step S5111 in Figure 75.

Next, in step S5107, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether the effect button detection switch 63a has been detected, i.e., whether the effect button 63 has been pressed (predetermined operation). If the effect button detection switch 63a has been detected (YES in S5107), the setting of the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect selected by the player by pressing the select button 64 is confirmed (S5108), and the process proceeds to step S5109. Note that once the setting of the execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect is confirmed in step S5108, the confirmed execution rate for the LOGO3000 bonus effect is stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90. Specifically, the opening effect pattern selection table or small win game effect pattern (see FIG. 76), round effect pattern selection table (see FIG. 77), and ending effect pattern selection table (see FIG. 78) corresponding to the LOGO3000 bonus effect execution rate (any of "0%" to "81%)" selected by the player by pressing the select button 64 are selected. This allows the player to change the LOGO3000 bonus effect execution rate to suit their own preferences when the LOGO3000 mode is set.

Next, in step S5109, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a setting content image display command in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 to display a setting content image G235 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then proceeds to step S5110. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100, having received the setting content image display command set here, displays, for example, the setting content image G235 shown in FIG. 72(B) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the setting content image G235 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, it is possible to show the player the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation that he or she has selected.

Next, in step S5106, if the "Back" item image DK2 or the "Initialize" item image is determined (YES in S5106), in step S5111 of FIG. 75, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the "Initialize" item image has been determined, that is, whether the performance button detection switch 63a has detected the arrow image YZ shown in the sorting custom image G234 pointing to the "Initialize" item image.

In step S5111, if the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the "Initialize" item image has been selected (YES in S5111), it initializes the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, changes the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect to the initial value (default value) (S5112), and then terminates this processing. The initial value of the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is, for example, 70% (see Figures 76 (E) and 76 (F)).

Also, in step S5111, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that the "Initialize" item image has not been determined, that is, if it determines that the item image DK2 indicating "Back" displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has been determined (NO in S5111), the process proceeds to step S5113. In S5113, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a selection standby image display command for displaying the selection standby image G232 in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124, and sets the value of the customer waiting flag to "2" (S5114). Here, in step S5114, the CPU 102 of the image control board 100, which has received the set selection standby image display command, displays the selection standby image G232 (see FIG. 69(A)) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) in the opening effect selection process (S4410) of the second embodiment will be described. When the LOGO3000 mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects, in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), an opening effect pattern selection table corresponding to the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 (see Figure 76), and selects an opening effect pattern based on the selected opening effect pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command.

Using Figure 76, the selection of the opening effect pattern by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) will be explained. The opening effect pattern selection table shown in Figure 76 is an excerpt of the opening effect pattern selection table and the small win game effect pattern selection table in order to explain the portion related to the start of execution of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. Therefore, Figure 76 shows an opening effect pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of "20%", a small win game effect pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of "20%," an opening effect pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of "30%," a small win game effect pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of "30%," an opening effect pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of "40%," The small win game presentation pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of 40%, the opening presentation pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of 50%, the small win game presentation pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of 50%, the opening presentation pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of 60%, and the small win game presentation pattern selection table with a LOGO3000 bonus execution rate of 60% are omitted.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "0%," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the opening effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "0%" execution rate in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) (see FIG. 76(A)), and selects an opening effect pattern based on the selected opening effect pattern selection table (see FIG. 76(A)) and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R3 regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol C" or "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol D."

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "0%," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the small win game effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "0%" execution rate in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) (see FIG. 76(B)), and selects a small win game effect pattern based on the selected small win game effect pattern selection table (see FIG. 76(B)) and the analysis result of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis result of the opening command, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern R3 regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_small win symbol a" or "Special symbol 2_small win symbol b," regardless of whether the special symbol type is a jackpot symbol.

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (jackpot game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small jackpot game effect with the selected small jackpot game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4712 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "10%," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the opening effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "10%" execution rate (see FIG. 76(C)) or the small win game effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "10%" execution rate (see FIG. 76(D)), and selects an opening effect pattern or small win game effect pattern based on the selected opening effect pattern selection table (see FIG. 76(C) or FIG. 76(D)) and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R1 12.5% of the time and opening effect pattern R3 87.5% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Jackpot Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time (see Figure 76 (C)).

For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects small win game presentation pattern R1 12.5% of the time and small win game presentation pattern R3 87.5% of the time based on the analysis results of the opening command if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a" (see Figure 76 (D)). Furthermore, when the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b" based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time (see Figure 76 (D)).

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), an opening presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 20% execution rate or a small win game presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 20% execution rate if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is 20%, and selects an opening presentation pattern or a small win game presentation pattern based on the selected opening presentation pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 25% of the time and opening presentation pattern R3 75% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time.

In the second embodiment, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R1 25% of the time when the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," and selects small win game presentation pattern R3 75% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time.

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4712 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), an opening presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 30% execution rate or a small win game presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 30% execution rate if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is 30%, and selects an opening presentation pattern or a small win game presentation pattern based on the selected opening presentation pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 37.5% of the time and opening presentation pattern R3 62.5% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time.

In the second embodiment, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R1 37.5% of the time, and selects small win game presentation pattern R3 62.5% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time.

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), an opening presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 40% execution rate or a small win game presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 40% execution rate if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is 40%, and selects an opening presentation pattern or a small win game presentation pattern based on the selected opening presentation pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 50% of the time and opening presentation pattern R3 50% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time.

Based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R1 50% of the time when the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," and selects small win game presentation pattern R3 50% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time when the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b."

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), an opening presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 50% execution rate or a small win game presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 50% execution rate if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is 50%, and selects an opening presentation pattern or a small win game presentation pattern based on the selected opening presentation pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol C," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 62.5% of the time and opening presentation pattern R3 37.5% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time.

Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects small win game presentation pattern R1 62.5% of the time if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol A," and selects small win game presentation pattern R3 37.5% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R3 100% of the time if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D."

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects, in the opening presentation pattern selection process (S4711), an opening presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 60% execution rate or a small win game presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the 60% execution rate if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is 60%, and selects an opening presentation pattern or small win game presentation pattern based on the selected opening presentation pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects opening presentation pattern R1 75% of the time and opening presentation pattern R3 25% of the time. Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time.

Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," the presentation control microcomputer 91 will select small win game presentation pattern R1 75% of the time, and small win game presentation pattern R3 25% of the time.Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," the presentation control microcomputer 91 will select small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time.

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "70%," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the opening effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "70%" execution rate (see FIG. 76(E)) or the small win game effect pattern selection table corresponding to the "70%" execution rate (see FIG. 76(F)), and selects an opening effect pattern or small win game effect pattern based on the selected opening effect pattern selection table and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern R1 87.5% of the time and opening effect pattern R3 12.5% of the time (see FIG. 76(E)). Furthermore, if the type of special symbol is "Special Symbol 2 - Jackpot Symbol D" based on the analysis results of the opening command, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R3 100% of the time (see Figure 76 (E)).

Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R1 87.5% of the time, and small win game presentation pattern R3 12.5% of the time (see Figure 76 (F)). Furthermore, based on the analysis results of the opening command, if the type of special symbol is "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects small win game presentation pattern R3 100% of the time (see Figure 76 (F)).

In step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (big win game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1 or opening effect pattern R3. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small win game effect with the selected small win game effect pattern R1 or small win game effect pattern R3. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the opening effect of the LOGO1500 bonus effect from ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus stored in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "81%," in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), the microcomputer 91 for effect control selects the opening effect pattern selection table corresponding to the execution rate of "81%" (see Figure 76 (G)) or the small win game effect pattern selection table corresponding to the execution rate of "81%" (see Figure 76 (H)), and selects the opening effect pattern or small win game effect pattern based on the selected opening effect pattern selection table (see Figure 76 (G), Figure 76 (H)) and the analysis results of the opening command. Specifically, based on the analysis results of the opening command, the effect control microcomputer 91 will select opening effect pattern R1 100% of the time, regardless of the type of special symbol, whether it is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C," "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D," "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b" (see Figures 76 (G) and 76 (H)).

In step S4710, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an opening effect (jackpot game effect) with the selected opening effect pattern R1. Also, in step S4712, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an opening effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a small jackpot game effect with the selected small jackpot game effect pattern R1. Then, when the opening effect start command set in step S4710 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the opening effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) in the round presentation selection process (S4412) of the second embodiment will be described. When the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752), a round presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 (see FIG. 77), and selects a round presentation pattern based on the selected round presentation pattern selection table, the analysis results of the round game command, and whether the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is being executed or the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is being executed.

Using Figure 77, we will explain the selection of the round presentation pattern by the presentation control microcomputer 91 in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752). Note that the round presentation pattern selection table shown in Figure 77 is an excerpt from the round presentation pattern selection table in order to explain the part related to the start of execution of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation.

For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects a round presentation pattern selection table (see Figure 77(A)) in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) regardless of whether the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "0%,", "10%,", "20%,", "30%,", "40%,", "50%, "60%," or "70%". Based on the selected round presentation pattern selection table (see Figure 77(A)) and the analysis results of the round game command, the microcomputer 91 selects a round presentation pattern depending on whether the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is being executed or the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is being executed.

Specifically, based on the analysis results of the round game command, when the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed by the presentation control microcomputer 91, round presentation pattern R1 is selected 100% of the time, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol A." When the LOGO1500 bonus is being executed by the presentation control microcomputer 91, round presentation pattern R3 is selected 100% of the time, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol C" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol A." Furthermore, when the LOGO1500 bonus is being executed by the presentation control microcomputer 91, round presentation pattern R5 is selected 100% of the time, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special Symbol 2_Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol B."

In step S4753, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a round effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start a round effect using one of the selected round effect patterns: round effect pattern R1, round effect pattern R3, or round effect pattern R5. Then, when the round effect start command set in step S4753 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out from ROM 103 one of the round effects for the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, the round effect for the LOGO1500 bonus effect based on round effect pattern R3, or the round effect for the LOGO1500 bonus effect based on round effect pattern R5, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus stored in the RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "81%", the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects the round presentation pattern selection table corresponding to the execution rate of "81%" in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) (see Figure 77 (B)), and selects a round presentation pattern based on the selected round presentation pattern selection table (see Figure 77 (B)) and the analysis results of the round game command, depending on whether the first half presentation of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed.

Specifically, based on the analysis results of the round game command, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C," "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D," "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed by the effect control microcomputer 91, round effect pattern R1 will be selected 100% of the time.

In step S4753, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a round effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start the round effect using the selected round effect pattern R1. Then, when the round effect start command set in step S4753 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the round effect for the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the ending selection process (S4802) in the ending effect selection process (S4414) of the second embodiment will be described. When the LOGO3000 mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects, in the ending effect pattern selection process (S4802), an ending effect pattern selection table corresponding to the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 (see FIG. 78), and selects an ending effect pattern based on the selected ending effect pattern selection table, the analysis results of the ending command, and whether the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is being executed or the LOGO1500 bonus effect is being executed.

Using Figure 78, we will explain the selection of the opening effect pattern by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the ending effect pattern selection process (S4802). Note that the ending effect pattern selection table shown in Figure 78 is an excerpt from the ending effect pattern selection table in order to explain the part related to the start of execution of the LOGO3000 bonus effect.

For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the second embodiment selects an ending presentation pattern selection table in the ending presentation pattern selection process (S4802) regardless of whether the LOGO3000 bonus execution rate stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "0%, " ", "10%, " ", "20%, " ", "30%, " "40%, " ", "50%, " "60%, " or "70%" (see Figure 78(A)). Based on the selected ending presentation pattern selection table (see Figure 78(A)) and the analysis results of the ending command, the microcomputer 91 selects an ending presentation pattern depending on whether the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is being executed or the LOGO1500 bonus presentation is being executed.

Specifically, based on the analysis results of the ending command, when the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed by the performance control microcomputer 91, ending performance pattern R1 is selected 100% of the time, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a." When the LOGO1500 bonus is being executed by the performance control microcomputer 91, ending performance pattern R3 is selected 100% of the time, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a." Additionally, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special Symbol 2 - Big Win Symbol D" or "Special Symbol 2 - Small Win Symbol B," if the LOGO1500 bonus is being executed by the effect control microcomputer 91, ending effect pattern R7 will be selected 100% of the time.

In step S4803, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start an ending effect using the selected ending effect pattern R1, ending effect pattern R3, or ending effect pattern R7. Then, when the ending effect start command set in step S4803 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads out from ROM 103 one of the ending effects for the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, the ending effect for the LOGO1500 bonus effect based on ending effect pattern R3, or the ending effect for the LOGO1500 bonus effect based on ending effect pattern R7, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

For example, in the second embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus stored in RAM 94 of the sub-control board 90 is "81%," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects the ending effect pattern selection table corresponding to the execution rate of "81%" in the ending effect pattern selection process (S4802) (see Figure 78 (B)), and selects an ending effect pattern based on whether the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed, based on the selected ending effect pattern selection table (see Figure 78 (B)) and the analysis results of the ending command.

Specifically, based on the analysis results of the ending command, regardless of whether the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C," "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D," "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a," or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b," if the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus is being executed by the effect control microcomputer 91, ending effect pattern R1 will be selected 100% of the time.

In step S4803, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command to the output buffer of RAM 94 to start the ending effect using the selected ending effect pattern R1. Then, when the ending effect start command set in step S4803 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads the ending effect of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect from ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

<Effects of the Second Embodiment>
As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 during LOGO3000 mode is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot or Type 2 jackpot), the player can be provided with a LOGO3000 bonus effect with an execution rate of 10%, indicating that the game will be controlled to a time-saving mode after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 during LOGO3000 mode is a jackpot (Type 1 jackpot or Type 2 jackpot), the player can be provided with a LOGO3000 bonus effect with an execution rate of 81%. This allows the player to enjoy a LOGO3000 bonus effect with an execution rate that can be adjusted to suit the player's preferences, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by pressing the effect button 63 or the select button 64 in the allocation custom effect, it is possible to provide the player with a LOGO3000 bonus effect in which the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is set to "10%", a LOGO3000 bonus effect in which the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is set to "81%", or the like. This allows the player to enjoy a LOGO3000 bonus effect in which the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is set to "10%", or a LOGO3000 bonus effect in which the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is set to "81%", by pressing the effect button 63 or the select button 64 to suit their own preferences, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 continues in a time-saving state at a rate of 81%, and the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect can be set up to the same rate of 81%. This makes it possible to increase interest in the game by providing the novelty of being able to set the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect up to the same rate at which the time-saving state continues (81%).

Furthermore, according to the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the LOGO3000 bonus effect is an effect that indicates to the player that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game and that the result of the next lottery for Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state is confirmed to be a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide an innovative gaming machine that can inform the player in a way that suits their preferences, by using the LOGO3000 bonus effect, that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game and that the result of the next lottery for Special Chart 2 in the time-saving state is confirmed to be a jackpot, depending on the execution rate of various LOGO3000 bonus effects.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, out of the LOGO standard mode, LOGO3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode, the player can set the LOGO through-out mode, in which a LOGO through-out bonus effect is executed, or the LOGO3000 mode, in which a LOGO through-out bonus effect is not executed but a LOGO3000 bonus effect or a LOGO1500 bonus effect is executed, by pressing the effect button 63 or select button 64. This allows the player to select the LOGO through-out mode or the LOGO3000 mode according to their own preference, thereby providing a novel pachinko gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the player presses the effect button 63, a LOGO standard bonus effect corresponding to the set effect mode, LOGO standard mode, is displayed, allowing the player to confirm that a jackpot game is being played. On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button 63, a LOGO3000 bonus effect corresponding to the set effect mode, LOGO3000 mode, is displayed, allowing the player to confirm that a jackpot game is being played. This allows the player to understand that a jackpot game is being played through a bonus effect corresponding to a specific game state effect mode set to suit the player's preferences, allowing the player to enjoy the game and increase their interest in the game.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the LOGO standard bonus effect makes it possible for the player to see that one jackpot game has been played, and the LOGO 3000 bonus effect makes it possible for the player to see two predetermined jackpot games as if they were one jackpot game. This makes it possible for the executed bonus effects to visually entertain the player in a variety of ways, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the player presses the effect button 63, the effect mode is set to the LOGO through-out bonus effect, which corresponds to the LOGO through-out mode, and it is possible to make the player see the execution of multiple jackpot games as a single jackpot game before the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state rather than a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible for the LOGO through-out bonus effect to make the player feel excited about how long the execution of one jackpot game will last, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, if the result of the lottery on special chart 1 in the non-time-saving mode is a 10R time-saving jackpot A, during the ending presentation of jackpot game A, one presentation mode can be selected from LOGO through-out mode, LOGO standard mode, or LOGO 3000 mode by pressing presentation button 63 and select button 64. This allows the player to enjoy the fun of being able to select a specific game state presentation mode to suit their own preferences during the ending time of jackpot game A when the result of the lottery on special chart 1 in the non-time-saving mode is a jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Third Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, after the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is completed, a 5-second variation based on the special symbol 2 variation pattern "P31" or the special symbol 2 variation pattern "P32" is performed in the time-saving mode, and then the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed during the jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is completed, and the time required for the variation to be executed until the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed during the next jackpot game may be shortened, so that the transition from the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect to the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect appears seamless to the player.

The time-saving states in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment include time-saving state A (second advantageous game state) and time-saving state B (first advantageous game state), which is different from time-saving state A. Here, time-saving state A and time-saving state B have different time-saving end conditions for terminating control of each time-saving state. Specifically, the time-saving end condition for terminating control of time-saving state A when controlled in time-saving state A (hereinafter also referred to as the time-saving A end condition) is that a small win is determined in the special chart jackpot determination process in time-saving state A. On the other hand, the time-saving end condition for terminating control of time-saving state B when controlled in time-saving state B (hereinafter also referred to as the time-saving B end condition) is that execution of a type 2 jackpot game is initiated in time-saving state B.

Next, the jackpot symbol type determination table of the third embodiment will be explained using Figure 79 (A). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment determines that a jackpot has been won, it determines the type of jackpot symbol by judging the symbol type random number in accordance with the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in Figure 79 (A). In the drawing for special symbol 1, there is a 50% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A," and a 50% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol B." On the other hand, in the drawing for special symbol 2, there is a 70% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol F," a 10% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol G," a 1% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol H," and a 19% chance that it will be determined to be "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol E." In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, if the type of jackpot symbol won is different, the opening pattern of the jackpot opening in a type 1 jackpot game and the settings related to the game state after the jackpot game will differ (see Figure 80). This will be discussed later.

Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment determines that a small prize has been won, it determines the type of small prize symbol by judging the symbol type random number according to the small prize symbol type determination table shown in Figure 79 (B). Specifically, in the lottery for special prize symbol 2, there is a 70% chance that it will be determined as "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol d," a 10% chance that it will be determined as "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol e," a 1% chance that it will be determined as "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol f," and a 19% chance that it will be determined as "Special prize symbol 2_small prize symbol c." If the type of small prize symbol that is won is different, the settings related to the game state after the jackpot game and the ending time included in the jackpot game, which will be described later, will be different (see Figure 80). This point will be discussed later. Furthermore, different types of small prize symbols may result in different opening patterns for the large prize opening in small prize games and type 2 jackpot games.

Next, the types of big wins and small wins in the third embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 80. As described above, when the result of the special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery or special symbol 2 lottery) is a "big win," a "big win symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 41. The big win symbols in the third embodiment include "Special symbol 1_big win symbol A," "Special symbol 1_big win symbol B," "Special symbol 2_big win symbol E," "Special symbol 2_big win symbol F," "Special symbol 2_big win symbol G," and "Special symbol 2_big win symbol H." Furthermore, when a "small win" occurs, a "small win symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 41. The small win symbols in the third embodiment include "Special symbol 2_small win symbol c," "Special symbol 2_small win symbol d," "Special symbol 2_small win symbol e," and "Special symbol 2_small win symbol f." When a "miss" occurs, a "missing symbol" is displayed statically on the special symbol display 41.

In the lottery for Special Chart 1 in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of winning "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" or "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B." Furthermore, in the lottery for Special Chart 2 in the third embodiment, there is a possibility of winning "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern F," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern G," or "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern H."

As shown in Figure 8, "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern A" and "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Pattern B" are 10R (round) jackpots, with the first large prize slot 30 opening once per Round for a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds. Regardless of whether the game state when "Jackpot Pattern A" is won is the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot play is time-saving state A, with the number of time-saving times set to one. In contrast, the game state after a jackpot play based on "Jackpot Pattern B" is the non-time-saving state.

Furthermore, "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern E," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern F," "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern G," and "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern H" are 10R (round) jackpots, with the first large prize slot 30 opening once per Round for a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds. Whether the game state when "Jackpot Pattern F" is won is either a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state, the game will be controlled to time-saving state B after the jackpot game ends, and the number of time-saving times will be set to one. Whether the game state when "Jackpot Pattern G" is won is either a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state (time-saving state B), the game will be controlled to time-saving state A after the jackpot game ends, and the number of time-saving times will be set to one. Regardless of whether the game state when "jackpot symbol H" is hit is non-time-saving state or time-saving state (time-saving state B), after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled to time-saving state A and the number of time-saving times will be set to 1.

In the third embodiment, as shown in Figure 80, there are four types of small prize symbols (small prize symbols stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b) that can be won in the lottery for special symbol 2. Specifically, in the lottery for special symbol 2, there is a possibility of winning "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol c," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol d," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol e," and "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol c."

"Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern c," "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern d," "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern e," and "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern c" are small wins that will always result in passage to the specific area 39 (also known as V passage) as long as the game is played correctly.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, in small jackpot games based on various small jackpot symbols, the second large prize opening 35 is opened and closed multiple times. The total opening time of the second large prize opening 35 during each small jackpot game is 1.6 seconds. The opening time during each small jackpot game is 0.008 seconds. In jackpot games (type 2 jackpot games) executed based on the passage of the gaming ball through the specific area 39, the first large prize opening 30 is opened once per round from the second round to the tenth round, with a maximum opening time of 29.5 seconds, regardless of whether the type 2 jackpot game is based on "small jackpot symbol d," "small jackpot symbol e," "small jackpot symbol f," or "small jackpot symbol c." In other words, a type 2 jackpot game is essentially executed over 10 rounds.

The gaming state after these two types of jackpot games are executed will be explained. If the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the "small win symbol d" is won is the non-time-saving state, the gaming state after the jackpot game will be time-saving state B, and the number of time-saving times will be set to 1. On the other hand, if the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the "small win symbol d" is won is the time-saving state (time-saving state B), the gaming state after the jackpot game will be time-saving state A, and the number of time-saving times will be set to 1. Regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the "small win symbol e" is won is the non-time-saving state or the time-saving state (time-saving state B), the gaming state after the jackpot game will be time-saving state A, and the number of time-saving times will be set to 1. Furthermore, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the "small win symbol f" is a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state (time-saving state B), the gaming state after the jackpot game is a time-saving state A, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1. Furthermore, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the "small win symbol c" is a non-time-saving state or a time-saving state (time-saving state B), the gaming state after the jackpot game is a non-time-saving state.

Next, we will explain how the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is determined in the third embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the third embodiment determines the special symbol variation pattern in accordance with a special symbol variation pattern determination table that differs between the non-time-shortened state and the time-shortened state (see Figure 81). The special symbol variation pattern determination table in the time-shortened state (see Figure 81 (B)) is a table in which variation patterns with shorter variation times are more likely to be selected than the special symbol variation pattern determination table in the non-time-shortened state (see Figure 81 (A)).

Here, in the non-time-saving state, the drawing for special chart 1 is mainly performed, so the table shown in the special chart 1 column of Figure 81 (A) is used. In the non-time-saving state, play is mainly based on the drawing for special chart 1. Therefore, at this time, the table shown in the special chart 1 column of Figure 81 (A) is used. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the drawing for special chart 2 is mainly performed, so the table shown in the special chart 2 column of Figure 81 (B) is used. In the time-saving state, play is mainly based on the drawing for special chart 2. Therefore, at this time, the table shown in the special chart 2 column of Figure 81 (B) is used. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when controlled in time-saving state A, if a small jackpot is won in the drawing for special chart 2, the table shown in the special chart 2 column of Figure 81 (A) is used.

Next, time-shortened state A and time-shortened state B will be explained using Figure 82. First, time-shortened state A will be explained using Figure 82 (A). As shown in Figure 82 (A), when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is time-shortened state A, if the lottery result for special symbol 2 is a small win, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will transition from time-shortened state A to a non-time-shortened state simultaneously with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. As a result, when the second special symbol is displayed as a stopped small win symbol in the non-time-shortened state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines special symbol 2 variable pattern "P14" according to the special symbol variable pattern determination table shown in Figure 81 (A), and the variable time is set to 5000 ms. As shown in FIG. 81(A), in the non-time-saving mode, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on a 5000 ms variation time, and the second special symbol is displayed as one of the small win symbols, "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol C," "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol D," "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol E," or "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol C." When the second special symbol is displayed as a small win symbol, a small win game is initiated, in which the second large prize slot 35 is opened. Then, when a game ball that enters the second large prize slot 35 during the small win game passes through the specific area 39, a type 2 jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, if the result of the lottery for special symbol 2 in the non-time-saving mode is "10R Time-Shortened Small Win C," the machine will transition to time-saving mode B after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in the non-time-shortened state is either "10R time-shortened small win D" or "10R time-shortened small win E," the machine will transition to time-shortened state A after the jackpot game ends. Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in the non-time-shortened state is "10R normal small win," the machine will be controlled to the non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, we will explain time-saving state B using Figure 82 (B). As shown in Figure 82 (B), when the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment is time-saving state B, if the lottery result for special symbol 2 results in a small prize win, the game control microcomputer 81 determines special symbol 2 variation pattern "P34" according to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 81 (B), and determines the variation time to be 1000 ms. As a result, as shown in Figure 81 (B), the second special symbol is displayed as a variation based on the variation time of 1000 ms in the time-saving state, and the second special symbol is displayed as one of the small prize symbols "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol c," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol d," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol e," or "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol c." When the second special symbol stops and displays as a small win symbol, the second large prize opening 35 is opened, and a small win game is initiated. Then, when the game ball that entered the second large prize opening 35 during the small win game passes through the specific area 39, the small win game ends, and a Type 2 jackpot game begins. At the same time, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment transitions from time-shortened state B to a non-time-shortened state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, regardless of whether the result of the lottery on the special symbol 2 in the time-shortened state (time-shortened state B) is "10R time-shortened small win C," "10R time-shortened small win D," or "10R time-shortened small win E," the game will transition to time-shortened state A after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in the time-saving state (time-saving state B) is a "10R normal small win," the machine will be controlled to a non-time-saving state after the big win game ends.

[Special Chart 2 Jackpot Determination Process (Special Chart 1 Jackpot Determination Process)] The special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) in the third embodiment have the same processing flow, so they will be described together based on Figure 83. As shown in Figure 83, the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) first reads the jackpot random number counter value (the value of label-TRND-A) as the determination value (S1101). More specifically, the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) reads the acquired jackpot random number counter value. Furthermore, the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) reads the jackpot random number counter value stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 85a of RAM 84 (more specifically, the memory area corresponding to the first first special chart reserved).

Next, the jackpot determination table (Figure 7(A)) is set (S1102). Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the set jackpot determination table (S1103). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number counter value (label-TRND-A) matches any of the jackpot determination values "65331" to "65535" (see Figure 7(A)). If the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is a "jackpot," the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1104), and the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out to determine the jackpot symbol type (type of jackpot) based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in Figure 79(A) (S1105). After determining the jackpot symbol type (S1105), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the jackpot symbol type (see FIG. 79 (A)) is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1106), and processing ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination (S1103) is not a "jackpot," it is determined whether or not it is a small jackpot (S1107). More specifically, the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) determines whether the jackpot random number counter value matches any of the small jackpot determination values between "0" and "65329" (see the special chart 2 column in Figure 7 (A)). Furthermore, the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) determines that it is not a small jackpot (see the special chart 1 column in Figure 7 (A)). The probability of winning a small jackpot is higher in the special chart 2 lottery than in the special chart 1 lottery. More specifically, while the probability of winning a small jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery is "zero," the probability of winning a small jackpot in the special chart 2 lottery is approximately 1/1.

If the result of the small win determination (S1107) is a "small win," the game status management process (S1114) described below is performed, the small win flag is turned ON (S1108), and the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out to determine the small win symbol type (type of small win) based on the small win symbol type determination table shown in Figure 79 (B) (S1109). After the small win symbol type is determined (S1109), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the small win symbol type (see Figure 79 (B)) is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1110), and the process ends. Note that the random number that determines whether or not there is a small win may be provided separately from the big win random number.

Also, if it is not a jackpot (NO in S1103) or a small jackpot (NO in S1107), it is a "miss," so the symbol type random number counter value (value of label-TRND-AS) is read out to determine the type of missing symbol (type of miss) (S1112). After determining the type of missing symbol (S1112), the special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the type of missing symbol is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in RAM 84 (S1113), and the process ends. Also, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) does not determine that it is a miss (see the special symbol 2 column in Figure 7 (A)). In other words, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) determines whether it is a jackpot or a small jackpot.

[Game Status Management Processing] As shown in FIG. 84, in the game status management processing (S1114) of the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (S2701), and if it is ON, determines whether the game status of the pachinko game machine 1 is time-saving state A. If the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the game status of the pachinko game machine 1 is time-saving state A (YES in S2702), it decrements the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of special pattern variations executed during the time-saving state, by 1 (S2703), and determines whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S2704). If it is "0," it turns the time-saving flag OFF (S2705). Then, in step S2706, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a game state designation command containing information about the currently set game state in the output buffer of RAM 84, and ends this process.

Next, using Figure 85, we will explain the LOGO3000 bonus presentation and the LOGO1500 bonus presentation of the third embodiment. If the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a small jackpot when in Time-Saving Mode A, the game transitions from Time-Saving Mode A to a non-Time-Saving Mode. If the second special symbol is displayed as "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Symbol d" in the non-Time-Saving Mode, the game control microcomputer 81 determines Special Chart 2 variable pattern "P14" (see Figure 81 (A)). In this case, as shown in Figure 85 (A), when LOGO3000 mode is set, the probability that variable presentation pattern R1 is selected in the variable presentation pattern selection table (S4603) is 100%. In other words, in the variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R1, the presentation examples shown in Figure 55 (A), Figure 55 (B-1), Figure 55 (C-1), and Figure 55 (D) are performed. The fluctuation time for the fluctuation effects shown in the example of Figure 55 (B-1), the example of Figure 55 (C-1), and the example of Figure 55 (D) is 5000 ms.

Also, if the lottery result for Special Symbol 2 results in a small prize while in Time-Saving State A, the game will transition from Time-Saving State A to a non-Time-Saving State. Then, regardless of whether the second special symbol stops and displays as "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol c," "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol e," or "Special Symbol 2_Small Prize Symbol f" in this non-Time-Saving State, the game control microcomputer 81 will determine Special Symbol 2 variable pattern "P14" (see Figure 81 (A)). In this case, as shown in Figure 85 (A), when LOGO3000 mode is set, the probability that Variable Presentation Pattern R3 will be selected in the Variable Presentation Pattern Selection Table (S4603) is 100%. In other words, in variable presentations based on Variable Presentation Pattern R3, the presentation examples shown in Figure 55 (A), Figure 55 (B-2), and Figure 55 (C-2) will be performed.

On the other hand, in either time-saving state B or time-saving state A, if the lottery result for Special Symbol 2 results in a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 81 determines Special Symbol 2 variable pattern "P33" regardless of whether the second special symbol is "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol F," "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol G," "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol H," or "Special Symbol 2_Jackpot Symbol E" (see Figure 81(B)). In this case, as shown in Figure 85(B), when the LOGO3000 mode is set and the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed, the variable effect pattern R2 is selected 100% of the time in the variable effect pattern selection table (S4603). In other words, in the variable effect based on variable effect pattern R2, the effect examples shown in Figure 56(D) and Figure 56(E) are performed. The fluctuation time for the fluctuation effects shown in the example of Figure 56 (D) and the example of Figure 56 (E) is 1000 ms.

Furthermore, in either time-saving state B or time-saving state A, if the lottery result for special symbol 2 results in a jackpot and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol F," the game control microcomputer 81 will determine special symbol 2 variable pattern "P33" (see FIG. 81(B)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when LOGO3000 mode is set, the variable presentation pattern R1 is selected 100% of the time in the variable presentation pattern selection table (S4603) unless the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed. In other words, in variable presentations based on variable presentation pattern R1, the presentation examples shown in FIG. 55(A), FIG. 55(B-1), FIG. 55(C-1), and FIG. 55(D) will be performed.

Furthermore, whether in time-saving state B or time-saving state A, if the lottery result for special symbol 2 results in a jackpot, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as any of the jackpot symbols "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol G," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol H," or "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol E," the game control microcomputer 81 will determine special symbol 2 variable pattern "P33" (see FIG. 81(B)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when LOGO3000 mode is set, variable presentation pattern R3 is selected 100% of the time in the variable presentation pattern selection table (S4603) unless the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation is executed. In other words, in variable presentations based on variable presentation pattern R3, the presentation examples shown in FIG. 55(A), FIG. 55(B-2), and FIG. 55(C-2) will be performed.

Also, if the time-saving mode B is active and the result of the lottery for Special Symbol 2 is a small win, and the second special symbol stops and displays as any of the small win symbols "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol c," "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol d," "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol e," or "Special Symbol 2_Small Win Symbol f," the game control microcomputer 81 will determine Special Symbol 2 variable pattern "P34" (see Figure 81 (B)). In this case, as shown in Figure 85 (B), when LOGO3000 mode is set, the probability that variable presentation pattern R3 will be selected in the variable presentation pattern selection table (S4603) is 100%. In other words, in the variable presentation based on variable presentation pattern R2, the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (D) and the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (E) will be performed. The variation time for the variable presentation in which the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (D) and the presentation example shown in Figure 56 (E) are performed is 1000 ms.

As explained above using Figures 79 to 85, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, once the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation accompanying the execution of a jackpot game has finished, the machine transitions to time-saving state B only after the jackpot game has finished. As a result, if the lottery result for special chart 2 in time-saving state B is a winning combination (a small win or a big win), the machine determines the fluctuation time (1000 ms) for special chart 2 fluctuation pattern "P33" and the fluctuation time (1000 ms) for special chart 2 fluctuation pattern "P34," which are shorter than the fluctuation time (5000 ms) for special chart 2 fluctuation pattern "P13" and the fluctuation time (5000 ms) for special chart 2 fluctuation pattern "P14" in the non-time-saving state (see Figure 81). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, the time (1000 ms) for the variable effect after the end of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is shortened, making it possible to shorten the time from the end of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect until the start of the second half of the next LOGO3000 bonus effect. This makes it possible for the player to see a seamless transition between the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect and the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, and makes it possible for the LOGO3000 bonus effect to make the player believe that two jackpot games are the same as one jackpot game, more so than in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment.

<Effects of the Third Embodiment>
As explained in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, whether or not the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed when the LOGO3000 mode is set can be influenced by the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, which have different termination conditions for the time-saving state. As a result, depending on whether or not the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the time-saving state is controlled to be time-saving state A or time-saving state B, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

When a transition to time-saving state B is made after the end of a jackpot game, the lottery result for special symbol 2 is a small jackpot win, and the fluctuation time (1000 ms) determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is shorter than the fluctuation time (5000 ms) determined by the game control microcomputer 81 when a transition to time-saving state A is made after the end of a jackpot game, and the lottery result for special symbol 2 is a small jackpot win. As a result, the fluctuation time for the second special symbol is shorter when a transition to time-saving state B is made than when a transition to time-saving state A is made, making it possible to create the appearance of a seamless transition from the end of the first half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect to the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Fourth Embodiment
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, a joint battle bonus effect is executed in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (see FIG. 56(F), and FIG. 57(A) to FIG. 57(E)). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, a battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 89 to FIG. 100 may be executed instead of the joint battle bonus effect. The battle bonus effect executed when the LOGO3000 mode is set will be described using FIG. 86 to FIG. 100.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, a battle bonus effect is executed in the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set. The battle bonus effect of the fourth embodiment is a bonus effect that includes a first stage effect, a second stage effect, a third stage effect, and a fourth stage effect. As a result, the battle bonus effect is a bonus effect in which the content of the effect executed varies depending on the stage.

Specifically, first, in the first round of a Type 2 jackpot game (while a small jackpot game is being played), or in the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game, as the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, when a game ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), a large prize slot entry notification presentation (first prize presentation) is executed to indicate that a game ball has entered a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), and a stock presentation is executed to suggest the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends. In the large prize slot winning notification effect that is performed in the first stage of the battle bonus effect, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a winning possibility icon image NI1 indicating that a game ball can win a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), and each time a game ball wins a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), it changes to a winning icon image NI2 indicating that a game ball has won a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35). The maximum number of winning icon images NI2 displayed in the first stage of the battle bonus effect executed in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small jackpot game) or the first round of a jackpot game is 10 (first predetermined number of times), which is the same as the specified maximum number of winnings (10 in this embodiment) in the large winning slots (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35) in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small jackpot game) or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. Also, when the first game ball enters the first large winning slot 30 or the second large winning slot 35 in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small jackpot game) or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game, a stock effect is executed and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 after a predetermined time (700 ms in the fourth embodiment) has elapsed since the winning. The stock effect begins in the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game when the first game ball enters the first large prize slot 30 or the second large prize slot 35, and ends in the final battle effect when all pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) are no longer displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, the stock effect of the fourth embodiment functions as an effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, using the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) that continue to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when a game ball enters the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small prize game) or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. Note that this first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is the initial state (first image state) of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH (predetermined stock image), and functions as an effect image suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, the maximum number of first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 displayed in the first stage of the battle bonus effect executed in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small jackpot game) or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game is 8 (second predetermined number of times), which is less than the specified maximum number of winning balls (10 in this embodiment) in the large winning slots (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35) in the first round of a type 2 jackpot game (during the execution of a small jackpot game) or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. Furthermore, the effect in which the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed corresponds to the "second winning effect."

Next, in the second round of a Type 1 jackpot game or the second round of a Type 2 jackpot game, the second stage of the battle bonus effect may include a large prize entry notification effect indicating that a game ball has entered the first large prize entry slot 30, and an icon change suggestion effect (change effect) in which the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be changed to another pseudo reserve ball icon GH (second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game than the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1. Specifically, in the large prize entry notification effect, each time a game ball enters the first large prize entry slot 30 in the second round of a Type 1 jackpot game or the second round of a Type 2 jackpot game, one of the winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased.

In addition, the icon change suggestion effect is performed while the stock effect is being executed, and in the icon change suggestion effect executed while the stock effect is being executed, each time a game ball enters the first large prize slot 30 in the second round of a Type 1 jackpot game or the second round of a Type 2 jackpot game, a change suggestion reserved ball icon GK indicating "change" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the displayed change suggestion reserved ball icon GK moves toward the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK collides with the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, it may change to another pseudo reserved ball icon GH (second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3). Here, the image forms of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH include the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, which is the initial form; the second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, which is the first specific image form (second image form) suggesting that there is a higher possibility of being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game than the initial form; and the third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3, which is the second specific image form suggesting that there is a higher possibility of being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game than the second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, which is the first specific image form. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the pseudo reserve ball icons suggesting there is a higher possibility of being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game are in the order of the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 ⇒ second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2 ⇒ third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3.

Next, from the third round to the end of the fourth round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), as the third stage of the battle bonus effect, an enemy character determination effect is executed to determine the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle effect (specific effect) in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, depending on whether a game ball enters the first major winning slot 30. Also, in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, if a game ball enters the first major winning slot 30, an icon change suggestion effect may be executed.

Specifically, in the enemy character determination effect executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, a pseudo game ball image GY is displayed each time a game ball enters the first large prize slot 30, and that pseudo game ball image GY moves toward the enemy character displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the pseudo game ball image GY collides with an enemy character, the first enemy character image TR1 representing enemy character A displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may change to a second enemy character image TR2 representing enemy character B. The enemy character image TR (specific display) includes the first enemy character image TR1, which is the initial state (first display state), and the second enemy character image TR2, which is a special display state (second display state) that suggests a higher possibility of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game than the initial state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the enemy character images are displayed in the order of first enemy character image TR1 ⇒ second enemy character image TR2, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the machine will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game.

Next, from the end of the fourth round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) until the end of the final round, a final battle effect is executed as the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, in which the player fights either enemy character A or enemy character B, determined in the third stage of the battle bonus effect. The final battle effect functions as an effect that indicates to the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. In this final battle effect, a stock consumption effect is executed. In the stock consumption effect, the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are caused to collide one by one with the meter display image TM indicating the enemy character's stamina, allowing the player to see the enemy character's stamina being reduced. If the value indicated by the meter display image TM displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 reaches "0" at the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, the game will proceed to a victory effect indicating that the enemy character has been defeated and the player has won. The execution of this victory effect suggests to the player that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, making it possible for the player to understand that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the value indicated by the meter display image TM displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 does not reach "0" at the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, the game will proceed to a defeat effect indicating that the player was unable to defeat the enemy character and was defeated. The execution of this failure effect suggests to the player that the game will not be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, making it possible for the player to understand that the game will be controlled to a non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

Next, using Figure 86, we will explain the large prize slot winning notification effect and stock effect that are executed when a gaming ball enters the first large prize slot 30, which is the first stage of the battle bonus effect executed in the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game in the fourth embodiment. Note that in Figure 86, the winning icon image NI2 is displayed 10 times, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed 8 times.

As shown in Figure 86 (A), the first round of the first-type jackpot game, which is the first stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, begins, and the first game ball is detected by the first major prize opening sensor 30a, i.e., the first game ball enters the first major prize opening 30. Then, 0.5 seconds (500 ms) after the first game ball enters the first major prize opening 30, as shown in Figure 86 (B), the first major prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the first-type jackpot game begins to be executed, and the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the first game ball entered the first large prize slot 30 (see FIG. 86(A)), the stock effect begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(C), and the first first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the second gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the second large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the second gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the second first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the third gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the third large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the second winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the third gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the third first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the fourth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the third large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the third winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the fourth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the fourth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 may not start to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even if 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the first large prize opening sensor 30a detected one game ball. In this case, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 will start to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the next game ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a.

As shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the eighth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the eighth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the eighth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the eighth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the seventh first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the ninth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the ninth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the ninth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, even though 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the ninth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the eighth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 does not begin to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the tenth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the tenth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the first round of the Type 1 jackpot game begins to be executed as shown in FIG. 86(B), and the tenth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the tenth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the eighth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 86(C).

Next, using Figure 87, we will explain the large prize slot winning notification effect and stock effect that are executed when a game ball enters the second large prize slot 35 in the first stage of the battle bonus effect of the small prize game, which corresponds to the first round of the type 2 jackpot game in the fourth embodiment. Note that in Figure 87, the winning icon image NI2 is displayed 10 times, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed 8 times.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), during the first stage of the battle bonus effect executed in a small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game, the second large prize opening sensor 35a detects the first game ball, i.e., the first game ball enters the second large prize opening 35. After 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the first game ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the first large prize opening winning notification effect for the small jackpot game begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the first winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, after 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the first game ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the stock effect begins to be executed, and the first first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the second gaming ball was detected by the second large winning slot sensor 35a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the second large winning slot winning notification presentation for the small winning slot game, which corresponds to the first round of the type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the second winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the second gaming ball entered the second large winning slot 35, the second first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the third gaming ball was detected by the second large winning slot sensor 35a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the third large winning slot winning notification presentation for the small winning slot game, which corresponds to the first round of the Type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the third winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the third gaming ball entered the second large winning slot 35, the third first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the fourth gaming ball was detected by the second large prize opening sensor 35a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the fourth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the small prize game, which corresponds to the first round of the Type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the fourth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the third gaming ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the fourth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 may not start to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 even if 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since one gaming ball was detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a. In this case, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 will start to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the next gaming ball was detected by the first large winning opening sensor 30a.

As shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the eighth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the eighth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the small prize game, which corresponds to the first round of the type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the eighth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the eighth gaming ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the seventh first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 87(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the ninth game ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the ninth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the small prize game, which corresponds to the first round of the type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the ninth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, even though 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the ninth game ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the eighth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 does not begin to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(C).

As shown in FIG. 87(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have passed since the tenth game ball was detected by the second large prize opening sensor 35a during the first stage of the battle bonus presentation, the tenth large prize opening winning notification presentation for the small prize game, which corresponds to the first round of the type 2 jackpot game, begins to be executed, as shown in FIG. 87(B), and the tenth winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the tenth game ball entered the second large prize opening 35, the eighth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(C).

As explained using Figures 86 and 87, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), a large prize slot winning notification effect is executed 500 ms after the winning occurs, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed 700 ms after the winning occurs. As a result, although the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), it is possible to avoid the risk of a player or the like mistaking this for a winning entry into a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35).

Next, the large prize slot winning notification effect and icon change suggestion effect that are performed in the second stage of the battle bonus effect in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) of the fourth embodiment will be explained using Figure 88. Note that in Figure 88, it is assumed that 10 game balls have won in the first large prize slot 30 in the second stage of the battle bonus effect of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 88(A), in the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, the first gaming ball is detected by the first major prize opening sensor 30a, i.e., the first gaming ball enters the first major prize opening 30. When 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the first gaming ball entered the first major prize opening 30, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the first major prize opening winning notification presentation is started in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining 10 winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the first game ball entered the first large winning slot 30, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the first icon change suggestion effect begins, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves towards the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK ceases.

88(A), in the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the second gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the second large prize opening winning notification presentation is executed in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining nine winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased, as shown in FIG. 88(C). Also, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the second gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the second icon change suggestion presentation is executed, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will end.

88(A), in the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the third gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the third large prize opening winning notification presentation is executed in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining eight winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased, as shown in FIG. 88(C). Also, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the third gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the third icon change suggestion presentation is executed, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will end.

88(A), in the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the fourth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the fourth large prize opening winning notification presentation is executed in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining seven winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased, as shown in FIG. 88(C). Also, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the fourth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the fourth icon change suggestion presentation is executed, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will end.

88(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the eighth gaming ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a during the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the eighth large prize opening winning notification presentation is executed in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining three winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased, as shown in FIG. 88(C). Also, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the eighth gaming ball entered the first large prize opening 30, the eighth icon change suggestion presentation is executed, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will end.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(A), when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the ninth gaming ball was detected by the first major winning slot sensor 30a during the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88(B), the ninth major winning slot winning notification presentation is executed during the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and one of the remaining two winning icon images NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased. Furthermore, when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have elapsed since the ninth gaming ball entered the first major winning slot 30, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the ninth icon change suggestion presentation is executed, and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will end.

Finally, as shown in Figure 88 (A), in the second stage of the battle bonus presentation of the fourth embodiment, when 0.5 seconds (500 ms) have elapsed since the tenth game ball was detected by the first large prize opening sensor 30a, as shown in Figure 88 (B), in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the tenth large prize opening winning notification presentation is started, and the last winning icon image NI2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased. Furthermore, in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the tenth game ball entered the first large prize slot 30, the tenth icon change suggestion effect begins, as shown in FIG. 88(C), and one change suggestion reserved ball icon GK begins to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the pseudo reserved ball icon GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. After that, after colliding with the pseudo reserved ball icon GH, the display of the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK ends.

Furthermore, in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), when 0.7 seconds (700 ms) have passed since the tenth game ball entered the first large prize opening 30, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), a button icon suggestion effect begins to be executed, suggesting that the player may operate either the effect button 63 or the select button 64 in the branching effect of the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect. When the button icon suggestion effect begins to be executed, the first button suggestion icon SG1 begins to be displayed, suggesting that the player may operate the select button 64 in the branching effect of the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, and moves from the first large prize opening 30 toward the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, using Figures 89 to 100, we will explain the battle bonus effect that is performed as the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect in the fourth embodiment. Note that the effects shown in Figures 89 to 100 are examples of effects when a battle bonus effect is executed in a type 2 jackpot game.

A case in which a battle bonus effect is executed during a small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game, will be described using Figure 89. As shown in Figure 89 (A), ten win possibility icon images NI1, indicating that a game ball can win the first large prize slot 30 or the second large prize slot 35, are displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying ten win possibility icon images NI1 (white hexagons) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that the maximum number of prizes that can be won through the second large prize slot 35, which is opened during a small jackpot game, is ten.

After that, when one gaming ball enters the second large prize slot 35, which is opened by a small prize game, as shown in FIG. 89(B), one of the ten prize winning icon images NI1 (white hexagon) displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed to a winning icon image NI2 (black hexagon). In other words, in the fourth embodiment, each time one gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), one of the prize winning icon images NI1 displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the leftmost prize winning icon image NI1, is changed to a winning icon image NI2.

Furthermore, when one game ball enters the second large prize opening 35, which is opened by a small win game, the stock effect begins to be executed after one prize-winning icon image NI1 (white hexagon) begins to change to a prize-winning icon image NI2 (black hexagon) (see FIG. 87). When the stock effect is executed, the first first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed, and it appears to the player as if it is moving from the second large prize opening 35 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in FIG. 89(B). Then, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is temporarily displayed as a frozen ball at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in FIG. 89(B), and then the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 moves toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as indicated by the arrow in FIG. 89(B).

If a fifth game ball subsequently enters the second large prize slot 35, which is opened by a small win game, of the six prize-winning icon images NI1 displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the leftmost prize-winning icon image NI1 (white hexagon) will be changed to a winning icon image NI2 (black hexagon) as shown in Figure 89(C). Furthermore, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, which has been moved toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as indicated by the arrow in Figure 89(B), continues to be displayed in the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in Figure 89(C).

Furthermore, when a second game ball enters the second large prize opening 35, which opens during a small win game, and the second first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed, it appears as if it is moving from the second large prize opening 35 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(C). Then, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is temporarily displayed as a frozen ball at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(C), and then the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 moves toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as indicated by the arrow in Figure 89(C).

Furthermore, when a third game ball enters the second large prize opening 35, which opens during a small win game, and the display of the third first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins, it appears as if it is moving from the second large prize opening 35 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(C). Then, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is temporarily displayed as a frozen ball at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(C), and then the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 moves toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as indicated by the arrow in Figure 89(C).

If a sixth game ball subsequently enters the second large prize slot 35, which is opened by a small win game, of the five prize-winning icon images NI1 displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the leftmost prize-winning icon image NI1 (white hexagon) is changed to a winning icon image NI2 (black hexagon), as shown in FIG. 89(D). Also, as shown in FIG. 89(D), four first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with two in the first row and two in the second row.

Furthermore, when a fifth game ball enters the second large prize opening 35, which opens during a small win game, and the fifth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed, it appears to be moving from the second large prize opening 35 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in Figure 89 (D). Then, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is temporarily displayed as a frozen ball at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as shown in Figure 89 (D), and then the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 moves toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as indicated by the arrow in Figure 89 (D).

After that, when the tenth game ball enters the second large prize slot 35, which is opened by a small win game, the single prize winning icon image NI1 displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed to a winning icon image NI2 (a black hexagon) (see Figure 89 (E)). Also, as shown in Figure 89 (E), the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with four in the first row and three in the second row.

Furthermore, when the tenth game ball enters the second large prize opening 35, which is opened by a small win game, and the tenth first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed, it appears to be moving from the second large prize opening 35 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(E). Then, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is temporarily displayed as a stopped ball at the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 shown in Figure 89(E), and then the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 moves toward the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as indicated by the arrow in Figure 89(E).

When proceeding from the presentation example shown in FIG. 89(E) to the presentation example shown in FIG. 89(F), as shown in FIG. 89(F), ten winning icon images NI2 (black hexagons) are displayed at the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The display of ten winning icon images NI2 (black hexagons) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 indicates to the player that ten game balls have entered the second large prize slot 35 during the execution of the small prize game, allowing the player to understand that ten game balls have entered the second large prize slot 35 during the execution of the small prize game. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 89(F), eight first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 are displayed in the lower left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the small prize game ends (presentation example shown in FIG. 89(F)), or when the first round of the first-type jackpot game ends, the presentation example shown in FIG. 90(A) is displayed.

Using Figure 89, we have explained the first stage of the battle bonus effect that takes place during a small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game. The first stage of the battle bonus effect, as shown in Figure 89, is also executed during the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. There are two differences between the first stage of the battle bonus effect that takes place during a small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game, and the first stage of the battle bonus effect that takes place during the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. Specifically, during the first stage of the battle bonus effect that takes place during the first round of a type 1 jackpot game, an effect image displaying "Round 1," indicating that this is the first round of a type 1 jackpot game, is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, in the first stage of the battle bonus presentation that takes place in the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game, when a game ball enters the first large prize opening 30 that opens in the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game, an presentation is produced in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 that makes it appear as if the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is moving from the first large prize opening 30 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Next, the second stage of the battle bonus effect executed in the second round of the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) will be explained using Figure 90. First, when the second round of the jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) starts, as shown in Figure 90(A), 10 winning icon images NI2 (black hexagons) are displayed in the upper part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, as the stock effect continues to be executed, as shown in Figure 90(A),
They are displayed in four rows on the first line and four rows on the second line.

Next, if one game ball enters the first large prize slot 30 that was opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a large prize slot winning notification effect is executed, and after the large prize slot winning notification effect begins to be executed, an icon change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, when the large prize slot winning notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 90(B), one of the ten winning icon images NI2 that was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased. Furthermore, when the icon change suggestion effect is executed, a change suggestion reserved ball icon GK containing the word "change" is moved from the first large prize slot 30 toward the one first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the icon change suggestion effect of the fourth embodiment, when the change suggestion reserve ball icon GK collides with the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 is either changed to another pseudo reserve ball icon GH (second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3), or remains as the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 without being changed to another pseudo reserve ball icon GH (second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3), and the execution of the icon change suggestion effect ends.

If a fifth game ball enters the first major prize slot 30 that opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 90(C). When the fifth major prize slot entry notification presentation is executed, one of the six prize icon images NI2 that was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is erased, as shown in FIG. 90(C). Furthermore, in the fourth icon change suggestion presentation executed when a fourth game ball enters the first major prize slot 30 that opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK is moved from the first major prize slot 30 toward the single first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 90(C). Furthermore, in the fifth icon change suggestion effect that is executed when a fifth game ball enters the first large prize opening 30 that is opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), as shown in Figure 90 (C), the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK is moved from the first large prize opening 30 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If an eighth game ball subsequently enters the first large prize slot 30 that opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the game proceeds to the presentation example shown in FIG. 90(D). As shown in FIG. 90(D), of the eight pseudo reserve ball icons GH displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pseudo reserve ball icon GH located in the upper right corner is the third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3. This causes an icon change suggestion presentation to be executed, and the change suggestion reserve ball icon GK collides with the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, indicating that the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 has changed to the third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3, allowing the player to understand that the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 has changed to the third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3.

Furthermore, when the large prize slot winning notification effect is executed, one of the three winning icon images NI2, which was displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, is erased, as shown in Figure 90 (D). Furthermore, in the icon change suggestion effect executed when a seventh game ball enters the first large prize slot 30 that opened in the second round of a double jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK is moved from the first large prize slot 30 toward the single first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 90 (D). Furthermore, in the icon change suggestion effect that is executed when the eighth game ball enters the first large prize opening 30 that is opened in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK is moved from the first large prize opening 30 toward the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 90 (D).

If the tenth game ball subsequently enters the first large prize slot 30 that was opened in the second round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 90(E). As shown in FIG. 90(E), in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 are displayed in this order from the leftmost position in the first row, and the second row is displayed in this order from the leftmost position in the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3.

In addition, if the tenth game ball enters the first large prize opening 30 that opens in the second round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), not only will an icon change suggestion effect be executed, but a button icon suggestion effect will also be executed. When the button icon suggestion effect is executed, an effect is produced in which the first button suggestion icon SG1 appears to be moving from the first large prize opening 30 toward the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When proceeding from the presentation example shown in Figure 90(E) to the presentation example shown in Figure 90(F), as shown in Figure 90(F), the first button suggestion icon SG1 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the direction of the first large prize opening 30.

Next, using Figure 91, we will explain the third stage of the battle bonus effect that is executed from the third round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). In the third stage of the battle bonus effect that is executed from the third round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), an enemy character determination effect is executed to determine the enemy character that will be engaged in a battle in the final battle effect in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, depending on whether the game ball enters the first major prize slot 30 or the second major prize slot 35.

As shown in Figure 91 (A), when the enemy character determination effect is executed as the third stage of the battle bonus effect, a first enemy character image TR1, which suggests that the enemy character that will be engaged in combat in the final battle effect at the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect may be enemy character A, and a first danger level image KD1 indicating "Danger level ★★★" are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, there is a first enemy character image TR1 which suggests that the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation may be enemy character A, and a second enemy character image TR2 which suggests that the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation may be enemy character B. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the second enemy character image TR2 is an enemy character image that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game than the first enemy character image TR1. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has a first risk level image KD1 indicating "Risk Level ★★★," a second risk level image KD2 indicating a state in which one of the black stars indicated by the first risk level image KD1 has been broken, and a third risk level image KD3 indicating "Risk Level ★★," and the third risk level image KD3 indicating "Risk Level ★★" is a risk level image KD that suggests there is a higher possibility of control to the time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game than the first risk level image KD1 indicating "Risk Level ★★★."

When an enemy character determination effect is being executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, which is executed from the third round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), and a game ball enters the first large prize opening 30, the pseudo game ball image GY will move from the first large prize opening 30 toward the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the pseudo game ball image GY moved toward the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collides with the first enemy character image TR1 and the first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if there is no change in the first danger level image KD1, the effect will proceed to the example shown in Figure 91 (B).

Next, when the enemy character determination effect is being executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, which is executed from the third round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a game ball enters the first large prize opening 30, and the pseudo game ball image GY moves from the first large prize opening 30 toward the first enemy character image TR1 and the first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the pseudo game ball image GY moved toward the first enemy character image TR1 and the first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collides with the first enemy character image TR1 and the first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first danger level image KD1 does not change, and if enemy character A is determined to be the enemy character to fight in the final battle effect in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, the effect proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 91 (C). On the other hand, if the pseudo game ball image GY, which has been moved towards the first enemy character image TR1 and first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, collides with the first enemy character image TR1 and first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, causing the first danger level image KD1 to change, the display will proceed to the example presentation shown in Figure 96 (A).

If, in the enemy character determination presentation, it is determined that enemy character A will be the enemy character that will fight in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation, an effect image CY is displayed around the first enemy character image TR1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 91(C). As shown in FIG. 91(C), the effect image CY is displayed around the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating to the player that enemy character A has been determined as the enemy character that will fight in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation, making it possible for the player to understand that enemy character A has been determined as the enemy character that will fight in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation. The presentation then progresses from the presentation example shown in FIG. 91(C) to the presentation example shown in FIG. 92(A).

Next, using Figures 92 to 95, we will explain the final battle effect that is executed in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect that is executed from the end of the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). Note that in the final battle effect shown in Figures 92 to 95, enemy character A is assumed to have been determined in the enemy character determination effect.

When the final battle effect is executed in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, which is executed from the end of the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a text image showing "ATTACK" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 92 (A). By displaying the text image showing "ATTACK" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is informed that the execution of the final battle effect has begun, and it is possible to make the player aware that the execution of the final battle effect has begun.

Even when the final battle effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the execution of the stock effect continues, so five first pseudo reserve ball icons GH1, two second pseudo reserve ball icons GH2, and one third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3 are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even when the final battle effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the execution of the button icon suggestion effect continues, so the first button suggestion icon SG1 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the final battle performance progresses, a text image showing "LOGO vs. Enemy A" is displayed, as shown in Figure 92 (B). By displaying the text image showing "LOGO vs. Enemy A," the player is informed that they will be facing enemy character A in the final battle performance, making it possible for the player to understand that they will be facing enemy character A in the final battle performance. Also, as shown in Figure 92 (B), a first meter display image TM1 showing the stamina of enemy character A is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the final battle effect is being executed at the end of the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), if a game ball enters the first jackpot slot 30, a button icon change suggestion effect is executed. When the button icon change suggestion effect is executed, an emphasis effect image HO is displayed that highlights the area around the first button suggestion icon SG1 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the emphasis effect image HO is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first button suggestion icon SG1 may be changed to a second button suggestion icon SG2.

After that, in the final battle performance, the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are collided one by one toward the first meter display image TM1, starting with the oldest pseudo reserved ball icon GH. In the fourth embodiment, due to the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), the pseudo reserved ball icon GH that started displaying earlier is treated as the oldest.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, i.e., of the eight pseudo reserve ball icons GH, the pseudo reserve ball icon GH that began displaying earliest in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), collides towards the first meter display image TM1. When the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collides towards the first meter display image TM1, the display of the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 ends.

When the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, a first shake image HC1 surrounded by a blue effect corresponding to the collided first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 92(D). As shown in FIG. 92(D), the first shake image HC1 is tilted and includes a text image indicating "Round 5," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character A, the first meter display image TM1, four first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1, two second pseudo reserved ball icons GH2, one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3, a first button suggestion icon SG1, and an emphasis effect image HO.

The first shake image HC1 shown in Figure 92 (D) indicates that the stamina of enemy character A shown in the first meter display image TM1 has been reduced by the value due to the collision caused by the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1.

Then, the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 93(A). As shown in FIG. 93(A), the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 are displayed in the first row at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 are displayed in the second row. As shown in FIG. 93(A), the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 displayed in the far bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, i.e., the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 which is the pseudo reserved ball icon GH that began displaying earliest in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) among the pseudo reserved ball icons GH shown in FIG. 93(A), moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, and the display of the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is terminated.

When the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, a second shake image HC2 surrounded by a green effect corresponding to the collided second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 93(B). As shown in FIG. 93(B), the second shake image HC2 is tilted and includes a text image indicating "Round 5," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character A, the first meter display image TM1, two first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1, one second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3, a first button suggestion icon SG1, and an emphasis effect image HO.

The second shake image HC2 shown in Figure 93 (B) shows that the stamina of enemy character A shown in the first meter display image TM1 has been reduced by the amount of the collision caused by the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2. Note that the amount of reduction in the stamina of enemy character A shown in the first meter display image TM1 caused by the collision of the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is greater than the amount caused by the collision of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1.

If the final battle effect is being executed in the sixth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the display proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 93(C). As shown in FIG. 93(C), one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, this third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 is the pseudo reserved ball icon GH that was last displayed upon the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot (First Large Prize Slot 30, Second Large Prize Slot 35) in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). As shown in FIG. 93(C), the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, terminating the display of the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3. When the display of the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 ends, the display of all pseudo reserved ball icons GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 also ends, and the execution of the stock effect ends.

When the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, a third shake image HC3 surrounded by a red effect corresponding to the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 that collided is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 93 (D). As shown in Figure 93 (D), the third shake image HC3, which includes a text image indicating "Round 6," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character A, the first meter display image TM1, and an emphasis effect image HO, is in a tilted state.

Then, the display proceeds to the example effect shown in Figure 94 (A). As shown in Figure 94 (A), an effect image showing enemy character A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, below the effect image showing enemy character A, a first meter display image TM1 is displayed, indicating that enemy character A has little stamina remaining. In addition, as shown in Figure 94 (A), a first button suggestion icon SG1 and an emphasis effect image HO are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the final battle effect is being executed in the seventh round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the effect will proceed to the effect example shown in Figure 94 (B). When the first button suggestion icon SG1 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is moved upward on the first meter display image TM1 along the arrow shown in Figure 94 (B), the effect will proceed to the effect example shown in Figure 95 (A).

As shown in Figure 95 (A), an effect image showing the main character and a first meter display image TM1 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the final battle presentation is being executed in the eighth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the final battle presentation will reach a presentation branching point where either a victory presentation (an example of a success presentation) in which the main character ultimately wins, or a defeat presentation (an example of a failure presentation) in which enemy character A wins and the main character is defeated, is reached. At the presentation branching point shown in Figure 95 (B), a select button operation image DS1 prompting the player to operate the select button 64 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the select button operation image DS1 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to let the player know that operating the select button 64 is valid.

If the select button 64 is operated at the effect branching point shown in Figure 95(B) and a branch to a win effect is made, the display proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 95(C). On the other hand, if the select button 64 is operated at the effect branching point shown in Figure 95(B) and a branch to a loss effect is made, the display proceeds to the effect example shown in Figure 95(E). Note that in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, if the select button 64 is not operated at the effect branching point shown in Figure 95(B) and the operation valid period has elapsed, the display will proceed to either the effect example shown in Figure 95(C) or the effect example shown in Figure 95(E).

Whether jackpot game C or jackpot game F is being played, the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in Figure 95(C). When the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in Figure 95(C), that is, when the main character defeats enemy character A in the final battle presentation, a background image SL showing the main character and a first meter display image TM1 showing enemy character A's stamina is "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying a background image SL showing the main character and a first meter display image TM1 showing enemy character A's stamina is "0" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested to the player that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to make the player understand that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

Whether jackpot game C or jackpot game F is being played, if the game proceeds to the ending of the jackpot game after proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 95 (C), when the final battle presentation ends, a LOGO3000 mode continuation presentation is executed in the ending presentation of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation, as shown in Figure 95 (D), and a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 suggests that the specific game state will continue, making it possible to let the player know that the specific game state will continue.

On the other hand, for example, when any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H is being played, the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 95(E), and if the main character is defeated by enemy character A in the final battle presentation, a background image SL showing the main character and a first meter display image TM1 showing that enemy character A has a small amount of stamina remaining are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying a background image SL showing the main character and a first meter display image TM1 showing that enemy character A's stamina did not reach "0" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game will not be controlled to the time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and to make the player understand that the game will be controlled to the non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

After proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 95 (F), after the end of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will display a LOGO3000 result display image RH2, which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific game state, a LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus presentation was executed while the LOGO3000 mode was set, and a LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus presentation was executed while the LOGO3000 mode was set, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after returning to the non-time-saving state. In Figure 95(F), the LOGO 3000 bonus execution count image SB2 showing "LOGO 3000 BONUS x 1" and the LOGO 1500 bonus execution count image SB3 showing "LOGO 1500 BONUS x 0" are displayed so that they can be distinguished and seen by the player. Also in Figure 95(F), a total prize ball count image KS showing "4500 pt" is displayed, indicating to the player that the number of prize balls the player has won in the specific game state is 4500, making it possible for the player to understand that the number of prize balls won in the specific game state is 4500.

Furthermore, if either jackpot game C or jackpot game G is being played after proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 95 (F), the display will proceed to the presentation example shown in Figure 58 (A).

Using Figure 96, we will explain what happens when, during the enemy character determination effect executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, the pseudo game ball image GY moves toward the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, collides with the first enemy character image TR1 and the first danger level image KD1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, causing the first danger level image KD1 to change.

The first danger level image KD1 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is replaced with a second danger level image KD2 showing one of three black stars shattered (see Figure 96 (A)). Furthermore, when the enemy character determination effect is being executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect executed from the third round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a game ball enters the first large prize opening 30, and the pseudo game ball image GY moves from the first large prize opening 30 toward the first enemy character image TR1 and second danger level image KD2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the display progresses from the example shown in Figure 96(A) to the example shown in Figure 96(B). As shown in Figure 96(B), the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed to the second enemy character image TR2. Also, as shown in Figure 96(B), the second danger level image KD2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is changed to the third danger level image SD3.

Furthermore, when the enemy character determination effect is being executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect that is executed from the third round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), if a game ball enters the first large prize slot 30, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK will begin to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and will move toward the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the enemy character determination effect is being executed in the third stage of the battle bonus effect, which is executed from the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a game ball will enter the first large prize opening 30, and the pseudo game ball image GY will move from the first large prize opening 30 toward the second enemy character image TR2 and third danger level image KD3 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If enemy character B is determined to be the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation, an effect image CY is displayed around the second enemy character image TR2 displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(D). As shown in FIG. 96(D), the effect image CY is displayed around the second enemy character image TR2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, suggesting to the player that enemy character B has been determined to be the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation, and making it possible for the player to understand that enemy character B has been determined to be the enemy character that will be fought in the final battle presentation at the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation. The presentation example then progresses from FIG. 96(D) to the presentation example shown in FIG. 97(A).

Next, using Figures 97 to 100, we will explain the final battle effect that is executed in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect that is executed from the end of the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). Note that in the final battle effect shown in Figures 97 to 100, enemy character B is assumed to have been determined in the enemy character determination effect.

When the final battle effect is executed in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect, which is executed from the end of the fourth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), a text image showing "ATTACK" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 97 (A). By displaying the text image showing "ATTACK" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player is informed that the execution of the final battle effect has begun, and it is possible for the player to understand that the execution of the final battle effect has begun.

Even when the final battle effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the execution of the stock effect continues, so five first pseudo reserve ball icons GH1, two second pseudo reserve ball icons GH2, and one third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3 are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even when the final battle effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 92(A), the execution of the button icon suggestion effect continues, so the first button suggestion icon SG1 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the final battle performance progresses, a text image showing "LOGO vs. Enemy B" is displayed, as shown in Figure 97(B). By displaying the text image showing "LOGO vs. Enemy B," the player is informed that the final battle performance will involve a showdown with enemy character A, and is able to understand that the final battle performance will involve a showdown with enemy character B. Also, as shown in Figure 97(B), a second meter display image TM2 showing the stamina of enemy character B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the final battle effect is being executed in the fifth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), if a game ball enters the first jackpot slot 30, a button icon change suggestion effect is executed. When the button icon change suggestion effect is executed, an emphasis effect image HO is displayed that highlights the area around the first button suggestion icon SG1 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when an emphasis effect image HO is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first button suggestion icon SG1 may be changed to a second button suggestion icon SG2.

After that, in the final battle performance, of the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the oldest pseudo reserve ball icons GH are collided one by one toward the second meter display image TM2. In the fourth embodiment, due to the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), the pseudo reserve ball icon GH that started displaying earlier is treated as the oldest.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(C), the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, i.e., of the eight pseudo reserve ball icons GH, the pseudo reserve ball icon GH that began displaying earliest in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game), collides towards the second meter display image TM2. When the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collides towards the second meter display image TM2, the display of the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 ends.

When the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the second meter display image TM2, a fourth shake image HC4 surrounded by a blue effect corresponding to the collided first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 97(D). As shown in FIG. 97(D), the fourth shake image HC4 is tilted and includes a text image indicating "Round 5," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character A, the second meter display image TM2, four first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1, two second pseudo reserved ball icons GH2, one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3, a first button suggestion icon SG1, and an emphasis effect image HO.

The fourth shake image HC4 shown in Figure 97 (D) indicates that the stamina of enemy character B shown in the second meter display image TM2 has been reduced by the amount of the collision caused by the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1.

Then, the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 98(A). As shown in FIG. 98(A), the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 are displayed in the first row at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 are displayed in the second row. As shown in FIG. 98(A), the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 displayed in the far bottom left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, i.e., the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 which is the pseudo reserved ball icon GH that began displaying earliest in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) among the pseudo reserved ball icons GH shown in FIG. 98(A), moves toward and collides with the second meter display image TM2, and the display of the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is terminated.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, an emphasis effect image HO is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the first button suggestion icon SG1 is changed to the second button suggestion icon SG2, as shown in Figure 98 (A), the second button suggestion icon SG2 is displayed, suggesting that the effect button 63 should be pressed in the branching effect of the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect.

When the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the first meter display image TM1, a fifth shake image HC5 surrounded by a green effect corresponding to the collided second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 98(B). As shown in FIG. 98(B), the fifth shake image HC5 is tilted and includes a text image indicating "Round 5," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character A, the first meter display image TM1, two first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1, one second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3, the second button suggestion icon SG2, and an emphasis effect image HO.

The fifth shake image HC5 shown in Figure 98 (B) shows that the stamina of enemy character A shown in the second meter display image TM2 has been reduced by the amount of the collision caused by the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2. Note that the amount of reduction in the stamina of enemy character B shown in the first meter display image TM1 is greater when the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 is hit than when the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is hit.

If the final battle effect is being executed in the sixth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the display proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 98(C). As shown in FIG. 98(C), one third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. That is, this third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 is the pseudo reserved ball icon GH that was last displayed when a game ball entered the large prize slot (First large prize slot 30, Second large prize slot 35) in the first round of the ongoing jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). As shown in FIG. 98(C), the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the second meter display image TM2, terminating the display of the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3. When the display of the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 ends, the display of all pseudo reserved ball icons GH displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 also ends, and the execution of the stock effect ends.

When the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 moves toward and collides with the second meter display image TM2, a sixth shake image HC6 surrounded by a red effect corresponding to the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 that collided is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in Figure 98 (D). As shown in Figure 98 (D), the sixth shake image HC6, which includes a text image indicating "Round 6," an effect image showing the main character attacking enemy character B, the second meter display image TM2, and an emphasis effect image HO, is in a tilted state.

Then, the display proceeds to the example effect shown in Figure 99(A). As shown in Figure 99(A), an effect image showing enemy character B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, below the effect image showing enemy character B, a second meter display image TM2 is displayed, indicating that enemy character B has little stamina remaining. In addition, as shown in Figure 99(A), a second button suggestion icon SG2 and an emphasis effect image HO are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the final battle effect is being executed in the seventh round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the effect will proceed to the effect example shown in Figure 99 (B). When the second button suggestion icon SG2 displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is moved upward on the second meter display image TM2 along the arrow shown in Figure 99 (B), the effect will proceed to the effect example shown in Figure 100 (A).

As shown in Figure 100 (A), an effect image showing the main character and a second meter display image TM2 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When the final battle effect is being executed in the eighth round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), the final battle effect will reach a branching point where either a victory effect (an example of a success effect) in which the main character ultimately wins, or a defeat effect (an example of a failure effect) in which enemy character A wins and the main character is defeated, will be displayed. At the branching point shown in Figure 100 (B), a button operation effect image DS2 prompting the player to operate the button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the button operation effect image DS2 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to let the player know that operating the button 63 is valid.

If the effect button 63 is operated at the effect branching point shown in FIG. 100(B) and the game branches to a win effect, the game proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 100(C). On the other hand, if the effect button 63 is operated at the effect branching point shown in FIG. 100(B) and the game branches to a loss effect, the game proceeds to the effect example shown in FIG. 100(E). Note that in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, if the select button 64 is not operated at the effect branching point shown in FIG. 100(B) and the operation valid period has elapsed, the game will proceed to either the effect example shown in FIG. 100(C) or the effect example shown in FIG. 100(E).

Whether jackpot game C or jackpot game F is being played, the game will proceed to the example presentation shown in Figure 100(C). If the game proceeds to the example presentation shown in Figure 100(C), and the main character defeats enemy character B in the final battle presentation, a background image SL showing the main character and a second meter display image TM2 showing enemy character B's stamina is "0" will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying a background image SL showing the main character and a second meter display image TM2 showing enemy character B's stamina is "0" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is suggested to the player that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and it is possible to make the player understand that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

Whether jackpot game C or jackpot game F is being played, if the game proceeds to the ending of the jackpot game after proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 100 (C), when the final battle presentation ends, a LOGO3000 mode continuation presentation is executed in the ending presentation of the LOGO3000 bonus presentation, and as shown in Figure 100 (D), a 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141 indicating "LOGO3000 mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display suggests that the specific game state will continue, making it possible to let the player know that the specific game state will continue.

On the other hand, for example, when any of jackpot games D, E, G, or H is being played, the display proceeds to the example presentation shown in FIG. 100(E), and if the main character is defeated by enemy character B in the final battle presentation, a background image SL showing the main character and a second meter display image TM2 showing that enemy character B has a small amount of remaining stamina are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying a background image SL showing the main character and a second meter display image TM2 showing that enemy character B's stamina did not reach "0" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game will not be controlled to the time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, and to make the player understand that the game will be controlled to the non-time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

After proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 100 (F), regardless of whether jackpot game E or jackpot game H has ended, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after returning to the non-time-saving state will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, where a LOGO3000 result display image RH2 will be displayed, which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific game state, a LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 indicating the number of times the LOGO3000 bonus presentation has been executed while the LOGO3000 mode is set, and a LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 indicating the number of times the LOGO1500 bonus presentation has been executed while the LOGO3000 mode is set. In Figure 100(F), the LOGO 3000 bonus execution count image SB2 showing "LOGO 3000 BONUS x 1" and the LOGO 1500 bonus execution count image SB3 showing "LOGO 1500 BONUS x 0" are displayed so that they can be distinguished and seen by the player. Also in Figure 100(F), a total prize ball count image KS showing "4500 pt" is displayed, indicating to the player that the number of prize balls the player has won in the specific game state is 4500, making it possible for the player to understand that the number of prize balls won in the specific game state is 4500.

Furthermore, if either jackpot game C or jackpot game G is being played after proceeding to the presentation example shown in Figure 100 (F), the display will proceed to the presentation example shown in Figure 58 (A).

Here, using Figure 101, we will explain the scenario patterns for displaying the pseudo reserved ball icon GH. As shown in Figure 101, in scenario pattern 1, in any case during the first round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), when the specified maximum number of 10 balls is reached in the large prize winning slots (First large prize winning slot 30, Second large prize winning slot 35), the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed by the second prize winning, the fourth prize winning, and the sixth prize winning in the large prize winning slots (First large prize winning slot 30, Second large prize winning slot 35) are displayed as the large prize winning slots ( When a ball wins in the first major prize slot 30 or the second major prize slot 35, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is changed to the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed when the first, third, fifth, and seventh through tenth balls win in the major prize slots (first major prize slot 30 or second major prize slot 35) continues to be displayed without changing its display mode until the execution of the stock effect ends. Scenario pattern 1 is a scenario in which, for example, if no ball wins in the major prize slots (first major prize slot 30 or second major prize slot 35) during a round of jackpot play while eight first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 are displayed, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 continues to be displayed as the initial mode of the pseudo reserved ball icon.

As shown in Figure 101, in scenario pattern 2, in either case of the first round of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game), when the specified maximum number of 10 balls is reached in the large prize slots (First large prize slot 30, Second large prize slot 35), the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed upon the fifth winning entry into the large prize slots (First large prize slot 30, Second large prize slot 35) is changed to the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 upon winning entry into the large prize slots (First large prize slot 30, Second large prize slot 35) during the round of play of the jackpot game, and The first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed by the second winning and the fourth winning into the first large winning slot (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35) is changed to the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 by the winning into the large winning slot (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35) during the round play of the jackpot game, and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed by the first winning, the third winning and the sixth to tenth winning into the large winning slots (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35) continues to be displayed without changing the display mode until the execution of the stock effect is completed. Scenario pattern 2 is a scenario in which, for example, while eight first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 are displayed, if no balls are won in the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) during a round of jackpot play, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 continues to be displayed as the initial state of the pseudo reserved ball icon.

[Received command analysis processing of the fourth embodiment] Next, the received command analysis processing (S4201) of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail using Figure 102. Note that the received command analysis processing (S4201) of the fourth embodiment shown in Figure 102 will omit a description of processing that is similar to the received command analysis processing (S4201) of the first embodiment.

In the received command analysis process (S4201) of the fourth embodiment, if the performance control microcomputer 91 has not received an ending command in step S4413 (NO in S4413), or after performing the ending performance selection process (S4414), it proceeds to step S4420.

In step S4419, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it has received a command for the first large prize opening sensor. If it determines that it has received a command for the first large prize opening sensor (YES in S4419), the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs first large prize opening presentation processing (S4420) and proceeds to step S4421. On the other hand, if it determines that it has not received a command for the first large prize opening sensor (NO in S4419), the presentation control microcomputer 91 proceeds directly to step S4421.

In the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor in the first round of a type 1 jackpot game while the battle bonus presentation is being executed in LOGO3000 mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a winning icon display command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to change the winable icon image NI1 to the winning icon image NI2 as a large prize opening winning notification presentation (see FIG. 86). Also, in the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the second large prize opening sensor in the first round of a type 1 jackpot game while the battle bonus presentation is being executed in LOGO3000 mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a pseudo reserved ball icon display start command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to display the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1.

In addition, in the first large prize opening presentation processing (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor in either the second round of a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) during the execution of a battle bonus presentation when the LOGO3000 mode is set, it sets a winning icon end display command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to erase the display of the winning icon image NI2 as a large prize opening winning notification presentation (see Figure 88). Furthermore, in the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor during the second round of a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game, type 2 jackpot game) while the battle bonus presentation is being executed in LOGO3000 mode, it sets a change suggestion reserved ball display start command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to display the change suggestion reserved ball icon GK (see FIG. 88).

Furthermore, in the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, when the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor and is in the third stage of the battle bonus presentation while the LOGO3000 mode is set, it sets a pseudo game ball image display start command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to display the pseudo game ball image GY.

Furthermore, in the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor and is in the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation when LOGO3000 mode is set, it sets an emphasis image display start command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to display the emphasis presentation image HO.Furthermore, in the first large prize opening presentation process (S4420) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the first large prize opening sensor and is in the fourth stage of the battle bonus presentation when LOGO3000 mode is set, it sets a button suggestion icon change command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to change the first button suggestion icon SG1 to the second button suggestion icon SG2 with a predetermined probability.

In step S4421, the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the second large prize opening sensor has been received. If it determines that a command for the second large prize opening sensor has been received (YES in S4421), the presentation control microcomputer 91 performs second large prize opening presentation processing (S4422) and proceeds to step S4415. On the other hand, if it determines that a command for the second large prize opening sensor has not been received (NO in S4421), the presentation control microcomputer 91 proceeds directly to step S4415.

In the second large prize opening presentation process (S4422) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the second large prize opening sensor during a small win game while the battle bonus presentation is being executed in LOGO3000 mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a winning icon display command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to change the winable icon image NI1 to the winning icon image NI2 as a large prize opening winning notification presentation (see FIG. 87). Also, in the second large prize opening presentation process (S4422) of the fourth embodiment, if the presentation control microcomputer 91 receives a command for the second large prize opening sensor during a small win game while the battle bonus presentation is being executed in LOGO3000 mode, the presentation control microcomputer 91 sets a pseudo reserved ball icon display start command in the output buffer of RAM 94 to display the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 (see FIG. 87).

[Opening effect selection process of the fourth embodiment] In the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711), when the effect control microcomputer 91 of the fourth embodiment executes the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the win type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is either "Special chart 2_small win pattern a" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern b", then based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in Figure 103, it will select small win game effect pattern T1 and select scenario pattern 1 (see Figure 101) with a probability of 30%, and select small win game effect pattern T1 and select scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101) with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, when the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) executes the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the win type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is "Special Chart 2 - Small Win Pattern C," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects small win game effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 1 (see FIG. 101) 70% of the time based on the small win game effect pattern selection table shown in FIG. 103, and selects small win game effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 2 30% of the time. When small win game effect pattern T1 is selected, a small win game effect of the battle bonus effect based on small win game effect pattern T1 is executed (see FIG. 89). When small win game effect pattern T2 is selected, a small win game effect of the battle bonus effect based on small win game effect pattern T1 is executed (see FIG. 89).

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the winning type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern C" or "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Pattern D," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 1 at a ratio of 30%, and opening effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 2 at a ratio of 70%, based on the opening effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 104. If opening effect pattern T1 is selected, the opening effect for the jackpot game based on opening effect pattern T1 is executed. On the other hand, in the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) of the fourth embodiment, when executing the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the win type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Symbol C" or "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Symbol D," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 1 at a ratio of 70%, and opening effect pattern T1 and scenario pattern 2 at a ratio of 30%, based on the opening effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 104. If opening effect pattern T1 is selected, an opening effect for a jackpot game based on opening effect pattern T1 is executed (see FIG. 89).

In the fourth embodiment, when the latter half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed during the opening effect pattern selection process (S4711) while the LOGO3000 mode is set, if the win type information indicated by the analyzed opening command is any of "Special chart 2_small win symbol a," "Special chart 2_small win symbol b," or "Special chart 2_small win symbol c," the effect control microcomputer 91 selects opening effect pattern T2 based on the opening effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 104. If this opening effect pattern T2 is selected, an opening effect based on opening effect pattern T2 is executed (see FIG. 89).

[Round presentation selection process of the fourth embodiment] In the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) of the fourth embodiment, when the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Pattern C" while the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern T1 at a rate of 10%, round presentation pattern T2 at a rate of 20%, round presentation pattern T3 at a rate of 20%, and round presentation pattern T4 at a rate of 50% as the round presentation pattern based on the round presentation pattern selection table for the battle bonus presentation shown in FIG. 105. Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) of the fourth embodiment, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Pattern D" or "Special Chart 2 - Jackpot Pattern E," selects round presentation pattern T1 50% of the time, round presentation pattern T2 20% of the time, round presentation pattern T3 20% of the time, and round presentation pattern T4 10% of the time as the round presentation pattern, based on the round presentation pattern selection table for battle bonus presentation shown in FIG. 105.

In the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) of the fourth embodiment, when the analysis result of the analyzed round game command is "Special Chart 2_Small Win Pattern A" while the LOGO3000 mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern T9 at a rate of 10%, round presentation pattern T10 at a rate of 20%, round presentation pattern T11 at a rate of 20%, and round presentation pattern T12 at a rate of 50% as the round presentation pattern based on the round presentation pattern selection table for the battle bonus presentation shown in FIG. 105. Furthermore, in the round presentation pattern selection process (S4752) of the fourth embodiment, when the analysis result of the analyzed round game command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is either the small prize pattern "Special chart 2_small prize pattern b" or "Special chart 2_small prize pattern c", the presentation control microcomputer 91 selects round presentation pattern T9 50% of the time, round presentation pattern T10 20% of the time, round presentation pattern T11 20% of the time, and round presentation pattern T12 10% of the time as the round presentation pattern, based on the round presentation pattern selection table for the battle bonus presentation shown in FIG. 105.

Here, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T1, a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the first round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and a stock presentation (see Figure 89), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the second round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character A is determined (see Figure 91), and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the select button 64 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off (see Figures 92 to 95). Furthermore, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T2, a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the first round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and a stock presentation (see Figure 89), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the second round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character B is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the select button 64 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off. In addition, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T3, a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the first round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and a stock presentation (see Figure 89), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the second round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character A is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the presentation button 63 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off. Furthermore, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T4, a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the first round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and a stock presentation (see FIG. 89), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the second round will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see FIG. 101), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character B is determined (see FIGS. 91(A), 91(B), and 96), and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the presentation button 63 is operated at the presentation branch point (see FIGS. 97 to 100).

Here, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T5, a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 in the second round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in a large prize entry slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), and a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character A is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the select button 64 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off. Furthermore, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T6, a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 in the second round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in a large prize entry slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), and a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character A is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation in which the presentation button 63 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off will be presented. Furthermore, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T7, a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 in the second round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in a large prize entry slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see Figure 101), a winning entry into the first large prize entry slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character B is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation in which the select button 64 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off will be held. Furthermore, in the round presentation of the battle bonus presentation based on round presentation pattern T8, a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 in the second round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in a large prize slot winning notification presentation and an icon change suggestion presentation based on either scenario pattern 1 or scenario pattern 2 (see FIG. 101), a winning entry into the first large prize slot 30 from the third round to the end of the fourth round of a type 2 jackpot game will result in an enemy character determination presentation in which enemy character B is determined, and from the end of the fourth round to the tenth round, a final battle presentation will be held in which the presentation button 63 is operated at the point where the presentation branches off.

[Ending presentation selection process of the fourth embodiment] In the ending presentation selection process (S4414), the presentation control microcomputer 91 of the fourth embodiment selects ending presentation pattern T1 based on the ending presentation pattern selection table for the battle bonus presentation shown in Figure 106, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command while the LOGO3000 mode is set is "Special chart 2_big win pattern C" or "Special chart 2_small win pattern a", and executes an ending presentation based on ending presentation pattern T1 (see Figures 95 (D) and 100 (D)). Furthermore, in the ending effect selection process (S4414) of the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b" while the LOGO3000 mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern T2 based on the ending effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 106, and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern T1 is executed. Furthermore, in the ending effect selection process (S4414) of the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the analysis result of the analyzed ending command is "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol E" or "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol c" while the LOGO3000 mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 selects ending effect pattern T3 based on the ending effect pattern selection table for the battle bonus effect shown in FIG. 106, and an ending effect based on ending effect pattern T1 is executed (see FIG. 58).

<Effects of the Fourth Embodiment>
As described above in detail, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when a gaming ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35), the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 can be started after the display of the prize winning icon image NI2 has started (see FIGS. 86 and 87). This allows the player to first confirm the entry of a gaming ball into a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) and the start of the display of the prize winning icon image NI2, and then enjoy the start of the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, which suggests the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, can be displayed after the prize winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed (see Figures 86 and 87). This allows the player to first confirm the start of the display of the prize winning icon image NI2 after a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), and then understand that the time-shortened state will be entered after the jackpot game ends through the effect of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 being displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the time (700 ms) from when a gaming ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) to when the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the time (500 ms) from when a gaming ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) to when the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed (see Figures 86 and 87). This makes it possible to reliably delay the start of displaying the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 from when a gaming ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) to when the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed. Therefore, when a game ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35), the player can confirm the start of the display of the prize icon image NI2, and then confirm the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of a small prize game or a type 1 jackpot game, up to ten winning icon images NI2 are displayed in succession. On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) in the first round of a small prize game or a type 1 jackpot game, up to eight first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 are displayed in succession. As a result, when a game ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) during a small prize game or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game, even if the prize icon image NI2 and the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 are displayed, it is possible for the player to confirm the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 after the prize icon image NI2 begins to be displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the first round of a small win game or a type 1 jackpot game, the time (700 ms) from when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the stop time (500 ms) of the special symbol that stops and is displayed as a jackpot symbol or a small win symbol (see Figures 8, 86, and 87). This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the time from when a ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is a special time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can draw the player's attention to the stock effect, which suggests the possibility of the game being controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game as the gaming ball enters the large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) and the stock effect creates a sense of suspense as to whether the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the displayed first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 may be changed to the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 or the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3, which indicate a higher possibility of the game being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game than the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1. As a result, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the icon change suggestion effect is executed, which draws attention to the displayed first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, creating excitement as to whether the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are caused to collide with the meter display image TM, and a final battle effect is executed that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game. This draws the player's attention to the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, making it possible to create a sense of suspense as to whether or not the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of the jackpot game suggested by the final battle effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, if a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the first enemy character image TR1 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be changed to the second enemy character image TR2. As a result, the entry of a gaming ball into a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) affects not only the change in the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 but also the change in the first enemy character image TR1. Therefore, the entry of a gaming ball into a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) allows the player to enjoy various changes in the presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to enjoy a stock effect by displaying the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 when a gaming ball enters the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) that open in the first round of a small prize game or a type 1 jackpot game. This allows the player to enjoy the entry of a gaming ball into the large prize slots (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) that open in the first round of a small prize game or a type 1 jackpot game, and makes the player excited about the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends, as suggested by the stock effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 107 to 116. In the following description, the left, right, up, and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment refer to the left, right, up, and down directions (as viewed from the front) of a player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, "forward" refers to the direction from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1, and "rearward" refers to the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment approaching the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment described above differs from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic embodiment in the predetermined motif associated with the overall effects. In the fifth embodiment, the main character "Logo" is at the center, and the motif associated with the overall effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a story in which the main character "Logo" and his allies confront and battle enemies. Therefore, the content of the SP Reach and L Reach effects (the content of the video associated with the SP Reach background image G113 and the L Reach background image) is appropriately changed to a story related to the main character "Logo."

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment differs in appearance from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Figure 107 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in Figure 107, an effect button 63 that can be pressed downward is located on the upper tray 34 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment.

The front frame 51 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 53. An upper decorative portion 68 (specific decorative portion) is provided at the top of the front of the gaming machine frame 50 to decorate the upper portion of the gaming machine frame 50 (front frame 51). The upper decorative portion 68 is also provided with an upper decorative portion lamp 69 that can emit light, and the upper decorative portion lamp 69 (light-emitting portion) is configured to display the main character's "logo" in letters. The upper decorative portion lamp 69 is also capable of producing various light-emitting effects by emitting light. Here, light emission in the fifth embodiment not only means that the light-emitting means (e.g., a lamp) remains lit, but also means that the light-emitting means (e.g., a lamp) repeatedly turns on and off, i.e., flashes.

In addition, a roughly spherical decorative sphere portion 56 is formed near the boundary between the right end of the upper tray 34 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the lower end of the right side of the front frame 51. Approximately the left half of the exterior of the decorative sphere portion 56 is composed of a transparent plate-like member formed into a roughly hemispherical shape, and the decorative sphere portion 56 is configured so that the interior can be seen through the plate-like member.

As shown in FIG. 107 , the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is equipped with a sword button 65 that can be pressed downward. The sword button 65 is formed into an overall vertically elongated shape. The sword button 65 is attached to the decorative sphere portion 56 so as to penetrate from above into the approximate center of the right half of the decorative sphere portion 56 in a plan view. In the normal state in which the sword button 65 is not operated, the visible portion of the sword button 65 resembles approximately half of the handle side of a sword. In the normal state in which the sword button 65 is not operated, approximately half of the sword button 65 from the tip side is inserted into the decorative sphere portion 56. The portion of the upper end of the sword button 65 that resembles a sword handle is exposed in both the normal state and the operated state. Basically, grasping this portion and pressing the entire sword button 65 downward causes the entire sword button 65 to descend. This downward pressing of the sword button 65 constitutes a pressing operation on the sword button 65.

As shown in Figures 107 and 108, the upper decorative part 68 extends upward and forward from the gaming machine frame 50 (front frame 51). This emphasizes that the upper decorative part 68 is forward and extends upward, making it possible to create a greater impact than conventional gaming machine frames. Therefore, when the upper decorative part lamp 69 provided on the upper decorative part 68 is illuminated, it is possible for not only the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also other players around the pachinko gaming machine 1 to recognize that the upper decorative part lamp 69 is illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 108, the upper decorative portion 68 protrudes further forward than any other portion of the front frame 51 (e.g., the handle 60, the sword button 65, etc.). Specifically, the distance L3 from the front end position P1 of the upper decorative portion 68 to the front position P4 of the fascia 53a of the outer frame 52 (the front end position of the fascia) is approximately 416.5 mm. In contrast, the distance L2 from the front end position P3 of the handle 60 to the front position P4 of the fascia 53a of the outer frame 52 is approximately 150 mm. Therefore, the distance L1 from the upper decorative portion 68 to the outer frame 52 is more than twice the distance L2 from the handle 60 to the outer frame 52. Furthermore, the sword button 65 protrudes significantly forward, similar to the upper decorative portion 68 described above. Specifically, the distance L1 from the front end position P2 of the sword button 65 to the front position P4 of the fascia 53a of the outer frame 52 is approximately 332.4 mm. Therefore, the distance L1 from the sword button 65 to the outer frame 52 is more than twice the distance L2 from the handle 60 to the outer frame 52. This emphasizes not only the upper decorative portion 68 but also the forward protrusion of the sword button 65, making it possible to create a greater impact than conventional gaming machine frames.

A front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is shown in Figure 107, and a right side view is shown in Figure 108. As shown in Figures 107 and 108, a data counter 160 is disposed above the pachinko gaming machine 1 on a vertical wall SH that stands upright in the vertical direction in the island equipment of the gaming parlor. The data counter 160 comprises a fixed member 161 fixed to the vertical wall SH, and a data display device 162 that is tiltably attached to the fixed member 161 so that it assumes a forward-leaning position.

The data display device 162 is roughly rectangular and displays the number of jackpot games played, the number of times the time-saving state has occurred, the number of times a small jackpot game has been played, and other information. The data display device 162 also has a call button that allows the player to call a hall employee. In this data counter 160, the forward tilt angle θ of the data display device 162 relative to the vertical wall surface SH can be adjusted from 15 degrees to 25 degrees. Figure 108 shows the data display device 162 with the forward tilt angle θ set to its maximum of 25 degrees.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 108, the rear wall 68a of the upper decorative portion 68 is inclined upward and forward above the gaming machine frame 50 and forward of the lower end position P5 of the data counter 160 (data display device 162). In other words, the upper wall 57 of the front frame 51 is horizontal and extends forward of the lower end position P5 of the data counter 160, and the rear wall 68a of the upper decorative portion 68 is formed from the front end position of the upper wall 57. Furthermore, the inclination angle φ of the rear wall 68a of the upper decorative portion 68 is the same as the maximum forward inclination angle θ of the data display device 162, which is 25 degrees. In this way, even if the upper decorative portion 68 is configured to protrude above the upper edge 50U of the gaming machine frame 50, interference with the data counter 160 can be avoided. Of course, from the perspective of avoiding interference between the rear wall 68a of the upper decorative portion 68 and the data counter 160, the inclination angle φ may be 25 degrees or greater.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machine of fifth embodiment] As shown in Figure 109, a sub-control board 90 is equipped with a performance control microcomputer 91 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a RAM 94 used as work memory, a CPU 92 that executes the programs stored in the ROM 93, and an I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 97 for inputting and outputting data and signals. Note that the ROM 93 may be external.

As shown in FIG. 109, the sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, audio control board 106, and lamp control board 107. The performance control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The RAM 104 of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM 103 of the image control board 100 stores still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically image data such as characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance designs) and background images. The CPU 102 of the image control board 100 reads image data from ROM 103 based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91. It then executes display control based on the read image data.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. Audio data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented on the audio control board 106, in which case audio control may be performed by that CPU. In this case, a ROM may be implemented on the audio control board 106, and audio data may be stored in that ROM. The speaker 67 may also be connected to the image control board 100, and audio control may be performed by the CPU 102 of the image control board 100. In this case, audio data may also be stored in ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The performance control microcomputer 91 also controls the lighting of lamps such as the upper decorative lamps 69 and panel lamps 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. In more detail, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission data (data that determines on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the upper decorative lamps 69 and panel lamps 5, and controls the lighting of lamps such as the upper decorative lamps 69 and panel lamps 5 in accordance with the light emission data. Note that data stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90 is used to create the light emission data.

Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 operates the movable board 15 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The movable board 15 is a movable gimmick attached to the center decorative body 10, although not shown in Figure 1. More specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the movable board 15, and controls the operation of the movable board 15 in accordance with the operation pattern data. The operation pattern data is created using data stored in ROM 93 of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, in which case the CPU may be responsible for controlling the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable board 15. In this case, a ROM may be implemented in the lamp control board 107, in which case data related to the light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored.

In addition, the sub-control board 90 is connected to a performance button detection switch (SW) 63a, a select button detection switch 64a, and a sword button detection switch 65a. The performance button detection switch 63a detects that the performance button 63 (see Figure 107) has been pressed. When the performance button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the performance button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90. In addition, the select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see Figure 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the select button detection switch 64a to the sub-control board 90. In addition, when the sword button 65 (see Figure 107) is pressed, a detection signal is output from the sword button detection switch 65a to the sub-control board 90.

In the fifth embodiment, if the result of the lottery for special chart 1 or the result of the lottery for special chart 2 is a win (small win, big win), a win confirmation effect (win confirmation effect) may be executed as a preview effect during the execution of the variable effect. When a win confirmation effect is executed as a preview effect during the execution of the variable effect, the upper decorative part lamp 69 lights up in rainbow colors (specific light emission colors). Furthermore, if a stop pattern suggesting a big win (a so-called doublet (an example of a predetermined stop pattern)) is definitely displayed during the execution of the variable effect, the upper decorative part lamp 69 lights up in rainbow colors. Note that by having the upper decorative part lamp 69 light up in rainbow colors during the execution of the variable effect, it indicates to the player that the result of the lottery for the special chart is a win, making it possible for the player to understand that the result of the lottery for the special chart is a win.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the upper decorative lamp 69 is lit in rainbow colors during a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) and a specific game state. By illuminating the upper decorative lamp 69 in rainbow colors during a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) and a specific game state, the player is informed that they are in either a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) or a specific game state, and the player is able to understand that they are in either a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) or a specific game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, one of two light levels, from a first light level to a second light level that is greater than the first light level, is selected, and the upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors according to the selected light level. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors at the first light level when a win confirmation effect is executed, or when a stop pattern suggesting a jackpot (a so-called doublet (an example of a predetermined stop pattern)) is definitively displayed during the execution of a variable effect. Furthermore, in the case of a win game (small win game, jackpot game) or a specific game state, the upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors at the second light level that is greater than the first light level.

Next, using Figure 110, we will explain the relationship between the light color of the upper decorative lamp 69 and the game state. In Figure 110, the variable display of the special symbol begins, and while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, a winning confirmation effect is executed as a preview effect.

As shown in FIG. 110, when the variable display of the special symbol begins and the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the upper decorative part lamp 69 is lit in white as its initial light-emitting mode (default light-emitting mode). Thereafter, while the variable display is being performed, a win confirmation display is executed as a preview display, and at the same time, the upper decorative part lamp 69 stops lighting up in white and starts lighting up in rainbow colors at the first light intensity. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110, the upper decorative part lamp 69 continues to light up in rainbow colors at the first light intensity until the execution of a jackpot game begins. In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the upper decorative part lamp 69 continues to light up in rainbow colors at the first light intensity until the special symbol stop time has elapsed and the execution of a winning game (small win game, jackpot game) begins.

As shown in Figure 110, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol and the jackpot game begins, a second light intensity is selected that is greater than the first light intensity when the upper decorative lamp 69 is lit in rainbow colors. As a result, as shown in Figure 110, when the jackpot game begins, the upper decorative lamp 69 is controlled to increase the amount of rainbow-colored light it emits. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the rainbow-colored light emitted by the upper decorative lamp 69 during the variable display of the special symbol has become more intense as soon as the jackpot game begins.

After that, even if the jackpot game ends and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time-saving state, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity. Also, even if the variable display of special symbols begins in the time-saving state, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, as shown in Figure 110, the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol, and the jackpot game begins. At the same time, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a non-time-reduction state. Even in this case, the upper decorative lamp 69 continues to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

As shown in Figure 110, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol and the jackpot game begins, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity. Even if the jackpot game ends and the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a time-saving state, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity. Furthermore, even if the variable display of special symbols begins in the time-saving state, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, as shown in Figure 110, the variable display of the special symbol begins, and even when the small win symbol stops and the small win game ends, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

As shown in Figure 110, even when a Type 2 jackpot game is played, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity. If the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then controlled to a non-time-shortened state at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the upper decorative lamp 69 will cease to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity, and the upper decorative lamp 69 will be turned off.

Using Figure 111, we will explain the variable presentation in the non-time-saving state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment. Note that the example presentation shown in Figure 111 is an example presentation in which a win confirmation presentation is executed, indicating that the result of the win determination is a win, in a variable presentation based on the special chart 1 variable pattern "P2."

When the display of the first special symbol begins to change based on the special symbol 1 change pattern "P2," for example, as shown in Figure 111(A), the display screen 7a begins to display the changes in the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and also begins to display the changes in the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. As shown in Figure 111(A), the upper decorative lamp 69 emits light in white.

When the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display is, for example, an "N jackpot variation" (a jackpot variation in which a jackpot is indicated by a normal reach) (see Figure 8), the reach-established state is maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and the variation speed of the middle performance symbol 8C gradually slows down, as shown in Figure 111(B). Also, as shown in Figure 111(B), when a win confirmation effect is executed as a preview effect during the execution of the variation effect, a win confirmation effect image OT is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the win confirmation effect image OT on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 indicates to the player that a jackpot has been reached, enabling the player to understand that a jackpot has been reached. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 111(B), the upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors at the first light intensity. The upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors at the first light intensity, indicating to the player that the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot, making it possible for the player to understand that the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot.

After that, as shown in Figure 111 (C), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed stopped in a stopping pattern suggesting a jackpot (a so-called doublet (an example of a predetermined stopping pattern)). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped in a stopping pattern suggesting a jackpot ("555") all at once. The upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow light at the first light intensity, indicating to the player that the lottery result for special symbol 1 is a jackpot, making it possible for the player to understand that the lottery result for special symbol 1 is a jackpot.

Next, using Figure 112, we will explain the jackpot game presentation in jackpot game A when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot win in the non-time-saving mode.

When the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving mode, and an opening effect is executed during the opening of jackpot game A, an opening image OE is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At the same time that the execution of the jackpot game begins, i.e., at the same time that the opening of the jackpot game begins, the light intensity of the upper decorative lamp 69 emitting rainbow colors is changed from a first light intensity to a second light intensity that is greater than the first light intensity.

After that, when the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving mode, if a round effect is executed in the round play of jackpot game A, the round image RE will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, even in the round effect executed in the round play of jackpot game A, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, when the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving mode, if the execution of the ending effect is started during the ending of jackpot game A, the example effect shown in FIG. 112(C) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 112(C), an ending effect image G109 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Also, as shown in FIG. 112(C), even during the ending effect executed at the end of jackpot game A, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

During the ending performance, when the remaining time indicated by the remaining time text image reaches 0 seconds, the display proceeds to the example performance shown in Figure 112(D). As shown in Figure 112(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a first ending image G110 indicating that the specific game state presentation mode is "Entering LOGO Standard Mode." As shown in Figure 112(D), the first ending image G110 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that "LOGO Standard Mode" will be set in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game. After the example performance shown in Figure 112(D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the ending of jackpot game A in the non-time-saving state when the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a jackpot win is completed, thereby completing the execution of the ending performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 112(D), even in the ending performance executed in the ending of jackpot game A, the upper decorative lamp 69 continues to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

Next, using Figure 113, we will explain the variable effects when LOGO standard mode is set. As shown in Figure 113 (A), when LOGO standard mode is set, a LOGO standard background image G120 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the LOGO standard background image G120 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that LOGO standard mode has been set, i.e., that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state.

If the result of the lottery for special chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination), when the execution of the variable effect based on special chart variable pattern "P31" or "P32" begins, the display proceeds to the example of the effect shown in Figure 113 (A). As shown in Figure 113 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will begin to display the variable effects of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and will also begin to display the variable effects of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. Note that, as shown in Figure 113 (A), even when the variable effect is executed when the LOGO standard mode is set, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, when the variable effect finishes executing, if the result of the lottery on Special Chart 2 is either a small win or a big win, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop to display the double digit "666", as shown in Figure 113 (B), and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also stop to display. Also, as shown in Figure 113 (B), even when the variable effect is executed when LOGO standard mode is set, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

Next, the standard bonus effect that is performed during jackpot game C or jackpot game F when LOGO standard mode is set will be described using Figure 114. Execution of the standard bonus effect begins, and as shown in Figure 114 (A), an opening effect is executed at the opening of jackpot game C or the opening of jackpot game F. During the opening effect of the standard bonus effect, a standard opening image G121 indicating "standard bonus" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the standard opening image G121 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that execution of the standard bonus effect has begun when LOGO standard mode is set. Note that even during the opening effect executed at the opening of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the upper decorative lamp 69 continues to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, when the third round of jackpot game C or jackpot game F begins, as shown in FIG. 114(B), a round game image G122 corresponding to the round effect in the standard bonus effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the round game image G122 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it becomes possible to understand that a round effect in the standard bonus effect is being performed. Even during the round effect executed in the round game of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

After that, in the 10th round (final round) of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, as shown in FIG. 114(C), a successful round game image G124 corresponding to the round effect of the final round in the standard bonus effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the successful round game image G124 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is an effect image that indicates to the player that the main character has defeated the enemy character. Even in the round effect executed in the round game of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

At the ending of jackpot game C or the ending of jackpot game F, the execution of the ending effect shown in FIG. 114(D) begins. In the ending effect shown in FIG. 114(D), a LOGO standard mode continuation effect is executed, and a standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the standard continuation suggestion image G125 indicating "Standard mode LOGO rush continues" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to inform the player that control in the specific game state will continue. Even in the ending effect executed at the ending of jackpot game C or jackpot game F, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity.

Next, the standard bonus effect that is executed during jackpot game E or jackpot game H when LOGO standard mode is set will be described using Figure 115. When either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is executed, if LOGO standard mode is set, the standard bonus effect will be executed. The standard bonus effect begins, and as shown in Figure 115(A), the opening effect shown in Figure 115(A) is executed during the opening of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H. During the opening effect of the standard bonus effect, a standard opening image G121 indicating "standard bonus" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displaying the standard opening image G121 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 allows the player to understand that the standard bonus effect has begun when LOGO standard mode is set. Note that the upper decorative lamp 69 continues to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity even during the opening effect executed during the opening of jackpot game E or jackpot game H.

After that, when the third round of either jackpot game E or jackpot game H begins, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a round game image G122 corresponding to the round effect in the standard bonus effect will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the round game image G122 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible to understand that a round effect in the standard bonus effect is being performed.

After that, regardless of whether jackpot game E or jackpot game H is being played, in the 10th round (final round) of that jackpot game, a failed round game image G127 corresponding to the round presentation of the final round in the standard bonus presentation will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 115(C). Specifically, the failed round game image G127 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a presentation image that indicates to the player that the main character has been defeated by the enemy character.

After that, for example, if either jackpot game E or jackpot game H is being played, the execution of the standard bonus effect ends when the ending effect of the standard bonus effect ends. In this case, at the same time that the execution of jackpot game E or jackpot game H ends, the upper decorative lamp 69 stops lighting up with the second light intensity of rainbow colors and turns off. The upper decorative lamp 69 turning off indicates to the player that the specific game state has ended, making it possible for the player to understand that the specific game state has ended.

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to the non-time-saving state, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will display a standard result display image RH1, as shown in Figure 115(D), which includes a total prize ball count image KS indicating the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific gaming state and a bonus execution count image SB1 indicating the number of times the standard bonus effect has been executed. Note that, as shown in Figure 115(D), the upper decorative lamp 69 remains off.

As shown in FIG. 115(D), a total prize ball count image KS indicating "4500 points won" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating that the number of prize balls won by the player in the specific game state is 4500, thereby enabling the player to understand that the number of prize balls won in the specific game state is 4500. Also, as shown in FIG. 115(D), a bonus execution count image SB1 indicating "3 bonuses" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, indicating that the number of bonus effects executed in the specific game state, i.e., the number of jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot games, Type 2 jackpot games) executed, is three, enabling the player to understand that the number of bonus effects executed in the specific game state, i.e., the number of jackpot games (Type 1 jackpot games, Type 2 jackpot games) executed is three.

[Variable performance start processing of the fifth embodiment] The variable performance start processing (S4406) of the fifth embodiment will be explained using the winning confirmation performance execution lottery table shown in Figure 116. In the variable performance start processing (S4406) of the fifth embodiment, if the performance control microcomputer 91 determines that it has received a variable performance start command, it sets the variable performance pattern table (S4602) and then performs preview performance selection processing. In the preview performance selection processing, it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance (e.g., a winning confirmation performance) in conjunction with the variable performance based on the analysis results of the received variable performance start command. Note that information about the preview performance selected in the preview performance selection processing is stored in a specified memory area of RAM 104, and is also included in a preview performance start command and sent to the image control board 100. Upon receiving the preview performance start command, the image control board 140 displays an image of the specified preview performance on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, the performance control microcomputer 91 appropriately controls the performance means (speaker 67, upper decorative lamp 69, panel lamp 5, movable device, input device, etc.) related to the preview performance based on the preview performance information stored in RAM 104.

Specifically, in the variable effect start processing of the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not to execute a winning confirmation effect based on the analysis results of the variable effect start command, the winning confirmation effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 116, and the winning confirmation effect determination random number. For example, in the variable effect start processing, if the special chart fluctuation pattern determined from the analysis results of the variable effect start command is special chart 1 fluctuation pattern "P1," the effect control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). Also, in the variable effect start processing, if the special chart fluctuation pattern determined from the analysis results of the variable effect start command is special chart 1 fluctuation pattern "P2," the effect control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart fluctuation pattern determined from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command is the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern "P11," the effect control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart fluctuation pattern determined from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command is the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern "P12," the effect control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart fluctuation pattern determined from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command is the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern "P21," the effect control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart variation pattern determined from the analysis result of the variation start command is special chart 1 variation pattern "P22," the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart variation pattern determined from the analysis result of the variation start command is special chart 1 variation pattern "P31," the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116). In the variable effect start processing, if the special chart variation pattern determined from the analysis result of the variation start command is special chart 1 variation pattern "P32," the presentation control microcomputer 91 determines with a 1% probability to execute a winning confirmation effect and with a 99% probability to not execute a winning confirmation effect (see FIG. 116).

From the explanation using Figure 116, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the winning confirmation effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect only if the result of the special symbol lottery is a winning one. As a result, the winning confirmation effect functions as an effect that indicates to the player that the result of the special symbol lottery is a winning one.

[Light Emission Data Output Processing of Fifth Embodiment] In the light emission data output processing (S4102) of the fifth embodiment, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a win, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 to cause the upper decorative portion lamp 69 to emit light in rainbow colors at a first light intensity when a win confirmation effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the variable effect (for example, simultaneously with the start of a normal reach), or when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitively displayed as stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot. Also, in the light emission data output processing (S4102) of the fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 to cause the upper decorative portion lamp 69 to emit light in rainbow colors at a second light intensity simultaneously with the start of a jackpot game, i.e., simultaneously with the start of the opening effect. Furthermore, in the light emission data output process (S4102) of the fifth embodiment, when a specific game state presentation mode is set, the presentation control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 to cause the upper decorative lamp 69 to emit rainbow-colored light at a second light intensity that is greater than the first light intensity.

<Effects of the Fifth Embodiment>
As explained in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the rainbow colors indicating a win of the upper decorative part lamp 69 make it possible to entertain the player during the execution of the jackpot game and the execution of the win confirmation effect by the light color of the upper decorative part lamp 69. As a result, not only during the execution of the jackpot game, but also when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a win (small win or big win), the rainbow colors can excite the player during the execution of the win confirmation effect and during the execution of the jackpot game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a winning confirmation effect is being executed, the upper decorative lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a first light intensity, while when a jackpot game is being executed, the upper decorative lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a second light intensity that is greater than the first light intensity. The light intensity of the upper decorative lamp 69 can be used to provide enjoyment. This makes it possible to create a difference between when a winning confirmation effect is being executed and when a jackpot game is being executed, depending on the light intensity of the upper decorative lamp 69, which emits light in rainbow colors, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, because there is an upper decorative lamp 69 provided at the top of the front of the gaming machine frame 50, it is possible to tell that the upper decorative lamp 69 is emitting rainbow colors even when viewed from a distance around the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, in an amusement parlor. This makes it possible for amusement parlor employees and customers to recognize that the special drawing result is a win, or that a jackpot game is being played.

<Modification of the Fifth Embodiment>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the specific gaming state is in effect, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at the second light intensity not only during a jackpot game but also when the time-shortening state is in effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the specific gaming state is in effect, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at the second light intensity during a jackpot game, and when the time-shortening state is in effect, the upper decorative part lamp 69 may emit light in red, indicating that the time-shortening state is in effect. A modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 117 and 118.

In the modified fifth embodiment, when the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is rainbow-colored, it indicates that a Type 1 jackpot game is being played, or that a Type 2 jackpot game is being played. On the other hand, in the modified fifth embodiment, when the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is red, it indicates to the player that the game is simply in a time-saving mode. Therefore, when the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is red, it does not indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a win (small win, big win). As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified fifth embodiment, when the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is rainbow-colored, it indicates that the result of the special symbol lottery is a win (small win, big win) more than when the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is red, making the light emitted a more advantageous color for the player.

Next, using Figure 117, we will explain the relationship between the light color of the upper decorative lamp 69 and the game state in a modified version of the fifth embodiment. In Figure 117, the variable display of the special symbol begins, and while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, a win confirmation effect is executed as a preview effect.

As shown in Figure 117, when the variable display of the special symbol begins and the variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the upper decorative part lamp 69 is lit in white (first light color) as the initial light-emitting mode (default light-emitting mode). Note that in a modified example of the fifth embodiment, when controlled to a non-time-saving mode, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in white, which is the initial light-emitting mode (default light-emitting mode). As a result, the red light (second light color), which is the light color of the upper decorative part lamp 69 when controlled to a time-saving mode, is more advantageous to the player than the white light color, which is the initial light-emitting mode of the upper decorative part lamp 69.

After that, while the variable effect is being executed, a winning confirmation effect is executed as a preview effect, and at the same time, the upper decorative lamp 69 stops lighting up in white and starts lighting up in rainbow colors at the first light intensity. After that, as shown in Figure 110, the upper decorative lamp 69 continues to light up in rainbow colors at the first light intensity until the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol.

As shown in Figure 117, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol and the jackpot game begins, a second light intensity, which is greater than the first light intensity, is selected as the first light intensity when the upper decorative lamp 69 is lit in rainbow colors. As a result, as shown in Figure 117, when the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol and the jackpot game begins, the rainbow light intensity of the upper decorative lamp 69 when it is illuminating is controlled to increase. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the rainbow light emitted by the upper decorative lamp 69 during the variable display of the special symbol has become more intense as soon as the jackpot game begins.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to the time-saving mode, the upper decorative lamp 69 will stop emitting the second amount of rainbow light and begin emitting red light at the same time as the jackpot game ends.

After that, as shown in Figure 117, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the time-saving mode, and then the special symbol is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol, and the jackpot game begins. At the same time, the upper decorative lamp 69 stops emitting red light, and at the same time, the upper decorative lamp 69 begins emitting rainbow light at the second light intensity.

After that, at the same time that the jackpot game ends, the upper decorative lamp 69 stops emitting the second amount of rainbow light and begins emitting red light. At the same time that the jackpot game ends, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the time-shortened state.

After that, as shown in Figure 117, the display of the special symbol begins to change in the time-saving mode, and then the special symbol stops and displays as a small win symbol, and the small win game begins. At the same time, the upper decorative lamp 69 stops emitting red light, and at the same time, the upper decorative lamp 69 begins emitting rainbow light at the second light intensity.

As shown in Figure 117, even when a Type 2 jackpot game is played, the upper decorative lamp 69 will continue to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity. If the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is then controlled to a non-time-shortened state at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the upper decorative lamp 69 will cease to emit rainbow-colored light at the second light intensity, and the upper decorative lamp 69 will be turned off.

Next, using Figure 118, we will explain the variable effects when LOGO standard mode is set. As shown in Figure 118 (A), when LOGO standard mode is set, a LOGO standard background image G120 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. By displaying the LOGO standard background image G120 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is possible for the player to understand that LOGO standard mode has been set, i.e., that the game is being controlled to a time-saving state.

If the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small win, big win), the execution of the variable effect based on Special Chart Variation Pattern "P31" or "P32" begins, and the display proceeds to the example of the effect shown in Figure 118 (A). As shown in Figure 118 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will begin to display the variable effects of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and will also begin to display the variable effects of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. Note that, as shown in Figure 118 (A), when the variable effect is set in LOGO standard mode, the upper decorative lamp 69 lights up in red. The red light of the upper decorative lamp 69 indicates to the player that the game is in the time-saving mode, making it possible for the player to understand that the game is in the time-saving mode.

After that, when the variable effect finishes executing, if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 is either a small win or a big win, as shown in Figure 118 (B), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will stop to display the double number "666," and the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 will also stop to display. Also, as shown in Figure 118 (B), the upper decorative lamp 69 will stop emitting red light and will begin emitting rainbow colors at the second light intensity. By the upper decorative lamp 69 emitting rainbow colors at the second light intensity, it is suggested to the player that the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 was either a small win or a big win, and it is possible for the player to understand that the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 was either a small win or a big win.

[Light emission data output process for a modified example of the fifth embodiment] In the light emission data output process (S4102) for a modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the result of the special drawing is a win, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 to cause the upper decorative part lamp 69 to emit light in rainbow colors at the first light intensity when a win confirmation effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the variable drawing (for example, at the same time as the normal reach starts) or when the result of the special drawing 1 is a win in the non-time-saving state and the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot. Furthermore, in the light emission data output process (S4102) of the modified fifth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 at the same time that the execution of the jackpot game begins, i.e., at the same time that the execution of the opening effect begins, so as to cause the upper decorative portion lamp 69 to emit light in rainbow colors at a second light intensity that is greater than the first light intensity. Also, in the light emission data output process (S4102) of the modified fifth embodiment, if the specific game state effect mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs light emission data (lamp data) to the lamp control board 107 so as to cause the upper decorative portion lamp 69 to emit light in red.

<Effects of the modified example of the fifth embodiment>
As described above in detail, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified fifth embodiment, the red light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 when the machine is in the time-shortened state is different from the rainbow colors emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 when a jackpot game is being played or when a win confirmation effect is being executed. This allows the player to know at a glance whether the machine is in the time-shortened state, a jackpot game is being played, or a win confirmation effect is being executed, based on the light color of the upper decorative part lamp 69. Therefore, whether the machine is in the time-shortened state, a jackpot game is being played, or a win confirmation effect is being executed, the light color of the upper decorative part lamp 69 can entertain the player and increase their interest in the game, regardless of whether the machine is in the time-shortened state, a jackpot game is being played, or a win confirmation effect is being executed.

Furthermore, with the pachinko gaming machine 1 modified from the fifth embodiment, it is possible to let the player know that a rainbow-colored light emitted by the upper decorative lamp 69 is more advantageous to the player than a red light, meaning that the result of the special drawing lottery is a win (small win, big win). This makes it possible to excite the player's own emotions depending on whether the upper decorative lamp 69 is red or rainbow-colored, and to increase the player's interest in the game.

12. Other Modifications Below, other modification examples of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Of course, configurations relating to other modification examples may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in the above embodiments and other modification examples below may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

In the above embodiments, when a game ball enters (enters) the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a special drawing lottery, etc., are obtained, which corresponds to the "predetermined condition." However, this is not limited to this. For example, other start ports different from the first start port 20 and the second start port 21 may be provided. Note that when a game ball enters the other start port, a special drawing lottery 1 or a special drawing lottery 2 may be conducted. In this case, when a game ball enters (enters) any of the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the other start port, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a special drawing lottery, etc., may correspond to the "predetermined condition."

In the above embodiments, jackpot games (type 1 jackpot games, type 2 jackpot games) correspond to "special games." However, this is not limited to this. For example, either type 1 jackpot games or type 2 jackpot games may correspond to "special games." Also, for example, either small jackpot games or large jackpot games may correspond to "special games." Also, for example, small jackpot games and large jackpot games may correspond to "special games."

In the above embodiments, the time-shortened state corresponds to an "advantageous gaming state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as an "ST machine" or a "probability variable loop machine," the gaming state other than when a jackpot game is being played may be controllable to a low-probability state and non-time-shortened state (low-probability non-time-shortened state, normal gaming state), a low-probability state and time-shortened state (low-probability time-shortened state), a high-probability state and time-shortened state (high-probability time-shortened state), or a high-probability state and non-time-shortened state (high-probability non-time-shortened state). In this case, one or more of the low-probability time-shortened state, high-probability time-shortened state, or high-probability non-time-shortened state may correspond to an "advantageous gaming state."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect corresponds to a "special effect" or "confirmed effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, any effect indicating that the game will be controlled to one or more of the following states, for example, a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, or a high-probability non-time-saving state, may correspond to a "special effect" or "confirmed effect." Examples of such effects include a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting pattern, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, and a bonus effect performed when a presentation mode other than the LOGO3000 mode is set. Furthermore, for example, the display 40 may include a second special symbol hold indicator 43b that displays the number of pending activations (second special symbol holds) stored in the second special symbol indicator 41b. In this case, when a jackpot game is being played, for example, if there is a jackpot reserved in the second special chart reserved, the effect that confirms the execution of the jackpot game may correspond to a "special effect" or a "confirmation effect."

In the second embodiment described above, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (10%) corresponded to the "first specific rate," and the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (81%) corresponded to the "second specific rate." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the first specific rate and the second specific rate are different, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (0%) may correspond to the "first specific rate," and the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect (70%) may correspond to the "second specific rate."

In the second embodiment described above, the effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation means." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the select button 64 may also correspond to the "operation means." Furthermore, for example, an operation button other than the effect button 63 and the select button 64 may also correspond to the "operation means." Furthermore, for example, the RAM clear switch 152 may also correspond to the "operation means."

In the second embodiment described above, the player operates the select button 64 to select the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, and presses the effect button 63 to set the execution rate of the selected LOGO3000 bonus effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned on, a gaming facility employee may operate the select button 64, effect button 63, etc. to set the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect selected by the gaming facility employee. In this case, the player cannot set the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect.

In the second embodiment described above, while a customer waiting effect is being executed, the player operates the select button 64 to select the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, and then presses the effect button 63 to set the execution rate of the selected LOGO3000 bonus effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, while an effect other than a customer waiting effect (such as a variable effect, a winning game effect (small winning game effect, big winning game effect)), etc.) is being executed, the player may operate the select button 64 to select the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, and then presses the effect button 63 to set the execution rate of the selected LOGO3000 bonus effect.

In the second embodiment described above, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect was determined by pressing the effect button 63. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be determined by pressing the select button 64. Furthermore, for example, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be determined by operating an operating means other than the effect button 63 and the select button 64.

In the second embodiment described above, if the result of the lottery for special chart 2 is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), there is an 81% chance that the game will transition to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game, and this 81% corresponds to the "predetermined percentage." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the result of the lottery for special chart 1 is a winning combination, 50% of the time will be transitioned to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game, which may also correspond to the "predetermined percentage." Also, for example, if the result of the lottery for special chart 1 is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the percentage of the time will be transitioned to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game may be changeable as appropriate, provided that it does not interfere with gameplay.

The execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect in the second embodiment described above, "81%," was the same as the rate (81%) at which the game transitions to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game when the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small winning combination, big winning combination). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the settable execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be changeable as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay. For example, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be set up to the same rate (50%) as the rate (50%) at which the game transitions to the time-saving mode after the end of the jackpot game when the lottery result for Special Chart 1 is a winning combination.

In the second embodiment described above, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect could be changed to one of the following execution rates: "0%, "10%, "20%, "30%, "40%, "50%, "60%, "70%, or "81%". However, this is not limited to this. For example, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be changeable in single-digit increments. Furthermore, for example, the changeable execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be changeable as appropriate, such as in increments of 20% or 30%, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

In the first and second embodiments, the "10R Time-Shortened Big Win B" and "10R Time-Shortened Small Win A" corresponded to a "specific win." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as an "ST machine" or a "probability variable loop machine," if the result of the special chart lottery is a probability variable big win, it may be possible to transition to a high-probability state after the big win game ends. In this case, the probability variable big win may correspond to a "specific win." Also, for example, one or more of the "10R Time-Shortened Big Win A," "10R Time-Shortened Big Win D," "10R Time-Shortened Big Win E," "10R Time-Shortened Big Win F," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win B," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win C," "10R Time-Shortened Small Win D," or "10R Time-Shortened Small Win E" may correspond to a "specific win."

In each of the above embodiments, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving hit ("10R Time-Saving Big Hit A," "10R Time-Saving Big Hit B," "10R Time-Saving Big Hit D," "10R Time-Saving Big Hit E," "10R Time-Saving Big Hit F," "10R Time-Saving Small Hit A," "10R Time-Saving Small Hit B," "10R Time-Saving Small Hit C," "10R Time-Saving Small Hit D," "10R Time-Saving Small Hit E"; see Figures 8 and 80), the machine transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, and the result of the special symbol 2 lottery in the time-saving state becomes a winning combination (a small hit or a big hit), confirming the execution of the jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the machine may be configured as a "probability variable loop machine." In this case, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a probability variable jackpot, the machine transitions to a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends, and the result of the special symbol lottery in that high-probability state becomes a jackpot, confirming the execution of the jackpot game. Additionally, for example, the displays 40 may include a second special symbol reserve display 43b that displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol reserves) stored in the second special symbol display 41b. In this case, during the execution of a jackpot game, for example, the execution of the jackpot game may be confirmed by the presence of a jackpot reserve among the second special symbol reserves.

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect transitions to a time-saving mode after the end of a jackpot game, and indicates to the player that the lottery result for special symbol 2 in the time-saving mode is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), confirming the execution of the jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a "probability variable loop machine," the LOGO3000 bonus effect may transition to a high-probability mode after the end of a jackpot game if the lottery result for the special symbol is a probability variable jackpot, and the lottery result for the special symbol in this high-probability mode may be a jackpot, confirming the execution of the jackpot game. Furthermore, for example, the display 40 may include a second special symbol hold indicator 43b that displays the number of reserved activations (second special symbol hold) stored in the second special symbol indicator 41b. In this case, if a jackpot is reserved in the second special symbol reserve during the execution of a jackpot game, the LOGO3000 bonus effect may be used to indicate that the next jackpot game will be confirmed.

In the above embodiments, the LOGO1500 bonus effect corresponds to a "transition suggestion effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, any effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to one or more of the following game states after the end of a jackpot game: a low-probability time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state, or a high-probability non-time-saving state may correspond to a "transition suggestion effect." This may include a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or a bonus effect that is displayed when a presentation mode other than the LOGO3000 mode is set.

In the first and third embodiments, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the lottery result for special chart 2 is a time-saving hit is set higher than the execution rate of the LOGO1500 bonus effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the execution rate of the LOGO1500 bonus effect when the lottery result for special chart 2 is a time-saving hit may be set higher than the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect. Furthermore, when the LOGO3000 mode is set, the execution rate of the LOGO1500 bonus effect when the lottery result for special chart 2 is a time-saving hit may be the same as the execution rate of the LOGO3000 bonus effect.

In the third embodiment described above, time-saving state A corresponds to the "second advantageous game state," and time-saving state B corresponds to the "first advantageous game state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, there may be a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state different from the first time-saving state, each of which grants a different number of time-saving periods. In this case, control of the first time-saving state may end when one display of a special symbol in the first time-saving state has ended, and control of the second time-saving state may end when ten display of a special symbol in the second time-saving state has ended. In this case, the condition for ending the first time-saving state is when one display of a special symbol in the first time-saving state has ended. Furthermore, the condition for ending the second time-saving state is when ten display of a special symbol in the second time-saving state has ended. In this case, the first time-saving state may correspond to the "first gaming state," and the second time-saving state may correspond to the "second gaming state." Also, for example, there may be a time-saving state and a high-probability state, and control of the time-saving state may end when one variable display of the special symbol in the time-saving state has ended, and control of the high-probability state may end when ten variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability state has ended. In this case, the condition for ending the time-saving state is when one variable display of the special symbol in the time-saving state has ended. Also, the condition for ending the high-probability state is when ten variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability state has ended. In this case, the time-saving state may correspond to the "first gaming state," and the high-probability state may correspond to the "second gaming state."

In the third embodiment described above, the termination condition for time-saving state A is that the lottery result for special chart 2 in time-saving state A is a small win, and the termination condition for time-saving state B is that a type 2 jackpot game is initiated. However, this is not limited to this. For example, as long as the termination conditions for time-saving state A and time-saving state B are different, they can be changed as appropriate. For example, the termination condition for time-saving state A may be that the lottery result for special chart 2 in time-saving state A is a jackpot, and the termination condition for time-saving state B may be that a type 1 jackpot game is initiated.

In the third embodiment described above, when the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state B is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the fluctuation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is 1000 ms, and when the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state A is a winning combination, the time-shortened state is switched to a non-time-shortened state and the fluctuation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is 5000 ms. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state B is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the fluctuation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 when the time-shortened state A is switched to a non-time-shortened state can be changed as appropriate, as long as it is shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81.

In addition, in the case where the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state B is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the variable time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is shorter when the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state A is a small winning combination, and the time is switched from time-shortened state A to a non-time-shortened state, and only the variable time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is shorter. However, this is not limited to this. For example, in the case where the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state B is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), and the time other than the variable time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is shorter when the result of the special drawing in time-shortened state A is a small winning combination, the time is switched from time-shortened state A to a non-time-shortened state, and only the variable time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 is shorter. For example, the time other than the variable time may be the opening time of a small winning combination, the ending time of a small winning combination, the opening time of a big winning combination, the ending time of a big winning combination, etc. In this case, for example, if the result of the special symbol lottery in time-shortening state B is a winning combination (a small winning combination, a big winning combination), the variable time, opening time, and ending time of the jackpot game determined by the game control microcomputer 81 may be shorter than the variable time, opening time, and ending time of the jackpot game determined by the game control microcomputer 81 when the result of the special symbol lottery in time-shortening state A is a small winning combination, upon transition from time-shortening state A to a non-time-shortening state. This shortens the time between the execution of one jackpot game and the execution of the next jackpot game, making it possible to achieve a seamless connection.

In the above third embodiment, when the time-saving state is A, in the special chart big win determination process (S1002), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that there is a small win, then transitions from the time-saving state A to a non-time-saving state, and then selects the special chart 2 variation pattern in step S1003 (see Figures 18 and 83). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the result of the special chart lottery in time-saving state B is a win (a small win, a big win), the variation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 transitions to time-saving state A. If the variation time determined by the game control microcomputer 81 when the result of the special chart lottery is a small win is short, the timing of the game control microcomputer 81 performing the game state management process (S1114) to transition from the time-saving state A to a non-time-saving state can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), after a small win symbol is set (S1110), the game status management process (S1114) may be performed to transition from time-saving state A to a non-time-saving state. Also, for example, in the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), before a small win is determined, the game status management process (S1114) may be performed to transition from time-saving state A to a non-time-saving state.

In the first and second embodiments described above, "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D," "Special symbol 2_small win symbol a," and "Special symbol 2_small win symbol b" corresponded to "specific winning modes." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as an "ST machine" or a "probability variable loop machine," the special symbol may be capable of stopping and displaying a jackpot symbol (hereinafter, "probability variable symbol") that transitions to a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends. In this case, the probability variable symbol may be the "specific winning mode."

In the first and second embodiments, "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D" and "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol b" correspond to the "first specific prize mode," and "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C" and "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol a" correspond to the "second specific prize mode." However, this is not limited to this. For example, "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A" may correspond to the "first specific prize mode." Also, in the third embodiment, "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol H" and "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol f" may correspond to the "first specific prize mode," and "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol F," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol G," "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol d," and "Special symbol 2_small prize symbol e" may correspond to the "second specific prize mode."

In each of the above embodiments, the execution of a jackpot game based on a time-saving win (time-saving big win (10R time-saving big win B, 10R time-saving big win C, see Figure 8), time-saving small win (10R time-saving small win A, 10R time-saving small win B, see Figure 8)) in a special symbol lottery in the non-time-saving state corresponds to a "specific condition." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss that triggers control of the time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 may control the game state to the time-saving state after the stop display of the missing symbol. In this case, the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss that triggers control of the time-saving state may correspond to a "specific condition." Furthermore, if the number of times the special symbol lottery results in a miss in the non-time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 900 times), the game control microcomputer 81 may control the game to the time-saving state. In this case, the "specific condition" may be met when the number of times the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the non-time-saving mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 900 times).

In each of the above embodiments, if a 10R time-saving jackpot A is won in the lottery on Special Chart 1 in a non-time-saving state, and the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a time-saving win (time-saving jackpot or time-saving small win) after the jackpot game ends, from the time control to the time-saving state begins until the time-saving state control ends, a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game ends, a series of events that tend to occur in succession, including a transition to the time-saving state, correspond to a "special gaming state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as a "probability loop machine," a state in which a jackpot game is played, and after the jackpot game ends, a series of events that tend to occur in succession, including a transition to a high-probability state, may correspond to a "special gaming state."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out bonus effect corresponds to a "suggestive effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, effects that suggest that control is being exercised in a specific gaming state may correspond to "suggestive effects," such as a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, effects such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting pattern, effect hold notices, cut-in notices, step-up notices, notices using effect images, and bonus effects that are performed when a presentation mode other than the LOGO through-out mode is set.

In the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out mode corresponds to the "first presentation mode," and the LOGO 3000 mode corresponds to the "second presentation mode." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO 3000 mode may correspond to the "first presentation mode," and the LOGO standard mode may correspond to the "second presentation mode."

In each of the above embodiments, in the LOGO through-out mode, the through-out bonus effect was executed while the special symbols were being displayed in a variable manner, and even while a winning game (a big win game, a small win game) was being played. However, this is not limited to this. For example, in the LOGO through-out mode, the LOGO through-out bonus effect may not be executed while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, but may be executed only while a winning game (a small win game, a big win game) is being played.

In the above embodiments, the defeat effect for the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect executed in the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect when the LOGO3000 mode is set corresponds to an "end suggestion effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the effect suggests the possibility of the time-saving state control ending, the "end suggestion effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc.

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 mode-exclusive revival effect B corresponds to a "specific effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if an effect is executed that suggests the time-saving state control may end, and then the effect suggests that the time-saving state control will continue, then the "specific effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc.

When the LOGO3000 mode in each of the above embodiments is set and the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is executed, if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (a small win or a big win), the LOGO3000 mode-specific revival effect B is executed in the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect with a 1% probability. However, when the LOGO through-out mode is set and the LOGO through-out bonus effect is executed, even if the lottery result for Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (a small win or a big win), the revival effect will not be executed in the through-out bonus effect. However, this is not limited to this. As long as the probability of a revival effect being executed in the second half of the LOGO3000 bonus effect is different from the probability of a revival effect being executed in the through-out bonus effect, these can be changed as appropriate.

In each of the above embodiments, when a specific game state presentation mode including LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode was set, a continuation presentation corresponding to each presentation mode (LOGO standard mode continuation presentation, LOGO 3000 mode continuation presentation, LOGO through-out mode continuation presentation) was executed in the ending presentation. During each continuation presentation, a continuation suggestion image (standard continuation suggestion image G125, 3000 mode continuation suggestion image G141, through-out continuation suggestion image G142) was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, this is not limited to this. For example, in the continuation effects corresponding to each effect mode (LOGO standard mode continuation effect, LOGO 3000 mode continuation effect, LOGO through-out mode continuation effect), effects such as a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, lighting up the frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5 in a specific lighting mode, effect hold notices, cut-in notices, step-up notices, and notices using effect images may be performed.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, when specific game state presentation modes including LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode are set, the continuation presentation executed in the ending presentation differs depending on each presentation mode (LOGO standard mode continuation presentation, LOGO 3000 mode continuation presentation, LOGO through-out mode continuation presentation). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the same continuation presentation may be executed in two or more presentation modes out of LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, and LOGO through-out mode. Furthermore, for example, as long as at least a portion of the continuation presentation executed in each of the three presentation modes is different, the other portions of the presentation may be the same or similar.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out mode continuation effect corresponds to a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a suggestion effect," and the LOGO 3000 mode continuation effect corresponds to a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a special effect," and the LOGO through-out mode continuation effect and the LOGO 3000 mode continuation effect are different effects. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a suggestion effect" and a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a special effect" may be the same effect. Also, for example, if a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a suggestion effect" and a "continuation suggestion effect that suggests that control of the advantageous gaming state will continue through a special effect" are partially different, the other parts of the effects may be the same or similar.

In the LOGO standard bonus effects of each of the above embodiments, the LOGO standard mode continuation effect executed without the LOGO standard exclusive revival effect A (see FIG. 52(G)) and the LOGO standard mode continuation effect executed without the LOGO standard exclusive revival effect A (see FIG. 54) were the same effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the effect content of the continuation effect executed without the LOGO standard exclusive revival effect A and the continuation effect executed without the LOGO standard exclusive revival effect A may be completely different, or as long as at least a portion of the continuation effect is different, the other portions of the effect may be the same or similar.

In the LOGO3000 bonus effects in each of the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 mode continuation effect (see FIG. 57(G)) executed without the LOGO3000-specific revival effect B being executed is the same as the LOGO3000 mode continuation effect (see FIG. 58) executed without the LOGO3000-specific revival effect B being executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the content of the continuation effect executed without the LOGO3000-specific revival effect B being executed and the continuation effect executed without the LOGO3000-specific revival effect B being executed may be completely different, or as long as at least a portion of the continuation effect is different, the other portions of the effect may be the same or similar. Also, for example, in the LOGO1500 bonus effect, a LOGO1500-specific revival effect may be executed.

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect, the LOGO1500 bonus effect, the LOGO standard bonus effect, and the LOGO through-out bonus effect correspond to "special effects." However, this is not limited to this. For example, two types of bonus effects out of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, the LOGO1500 bonus effect, the LOGO standard bonus effect, or the LOGO through-out bonus effect may correspond to "special effects." Alternatively, for example, three types of bonus effects out of the LOGO3000 bonus effect, the LOGO1500 bonus effect, the LOGO standard bonus effect, or the LOGO through-out bonus effect may correspond to "special effects."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect and the LOGO through-out bonus effect correspond to the "second special effect," and the LOGO1500 bonus effect and the LOGO standard bonus effect correspond to the "first special effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, either the LOGO standard bonus effect or the LOGO1500 bonus effect may correspond to the "first special effect," and either the LOGO3000 bonus effect or the LOGO through-out bonus effect may correspond to the "second special effect."

In the above embodiments, the variable effects and winning game effects (small win game effects, big win game effects) during the period from when control of the specific game state begins, when the execution of the jackpot game begins, to when control of the specific game state ends correspond to "effects during an advantageous period." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the winning game effects (small win game effects, big win game effects) during the period from when control of the specific game state begins, when the execution of the jackpot game begins, to when control of the specific game state ends may also correspond to "effects during an advantageous period." Also, for example, the variable effects during the period from when control of the specific game state begins, when the execution of the jackpot game begins, to when control of the specific game state ends may also correspond to "effects during an advantageous period." Also, for example, the variable effects, winning game effects (small win game effects, big win game effects), and customer waiting effects during the period from when control of the specific game state begins, when the execution of the jackpot game begins, to when control of the specific game state ends may also correspond to "effects during an advantageous period."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO 1500 bonus effect and the LOGO standard bonus effect functioned as bonus effects that suggested to the player that one winning game (small winning game, big winning game) would be executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO 1500 bonus effect and the LOGO standard bonus effect may function as effects that suggest to the player that one small winning game or one big winning game would be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect functions as a bonus effect that suggests to the player that two winning games (small win game, big win game) are being played as one winning game (small win game, big win game). However, this is not limited to this. For example, it may also function as an effect that suggests to the player that multiple small win games (e.g., two) or multiple big win games (e.g., two) are being played as one small win game or one big win game.

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out bonus effect functions as an effect that suggests to the player that one or more winning games (small win game, big win game) that occur from the start of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning (small win game, big win game) in a specific game state until the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a "10R normal jackpot A" or a "normal small win," the execution of the jackpot game ends, and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state, are the execution of a single winning game (small win game, big win game). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO through-out bonus effect may function as an effect that suggests to the player that one or more small jackpot games or jackpot games that are played from the start of a jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game) that is executed when the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a winning combination (small jackpot win, big jackpot win) in a specific game state until the lottery result on Special Chart 2 is a "10R normal jackpot A" or a "normal small jackpot" and the jackpot game ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state is a single small jackpot game or jackpot game.

In each of the above embodiments, the period from when control of the specific game state begins and when the jackpot game begins to when control of the specific game state ends corresponds to the "advantageous period." For example, the jackpot game may also correspond to the "advantageous period." Also, the time-saving state may also correspond to the "advantageous period." For example, if the pachinko game machine 1 is configured as an "ST machine" or a "probability loop machine," the high-probability state to which the game transitions after the jackpot game ends may also correspond to the "advantageous period." Also, for example, the period from when control of the specific game state begins and when control of the specific game state ends may also correspond to the "advantageous period."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus execution count image SB2 corresponds to the "first count display," and the LOGO1500 bonus execution count image SB3 corresponds to the "second count display." However, this is not limited to this. For example, one of the bonus execution count image SB1 and the through-out bonus execution count image SB4 may correspond to the "first count display," and the other may correspond to the "second count display."

In the above embodiments, "two times" corresponds to "multiple times." However, this is not limited to this. For example, "three or more times" may also correspond to "multiple times."

In each of the above embodiments, the effect control microcomputer 91 counted two jackpot games as one LOGO3000 bonus effect. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 may count three or more jackpot games as one LOGO3000 bonus effect.

In each of the above embodiments, when a Type 1 jackpot game is started, and when a Type 2 jackpot game is started, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 119 in the ON state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when a small jackpot game is started, the game control microcomputer 81 may output a small jackpot signal to the external terminal board 119 in the ON state. In this case, when the small jackpot game is ended, the game control microcomputer 81 may change the output state of the small jackpot signal to the external terminal board 119 from the ON state to the OFF state.

In the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out bonus effect, the LOGO standard bonus effect, and the LOGO 3000 bonus effect corresponded to the "special suggestion effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO through-out bonus effect, the LOGO standard bonus effect, the LOGO 1500 bonus effect, and the LOGO 3000 bonus effect may also correspond to the "special suggestion effect."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO standard bonus effect corresponds to the "first special suggestion effect," and the LOGO3000 bonus effect corresponds to the "second special suggestion effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO1500 bonus effect may correspond to the "first special suggestion effect," and the LOGO3000 bonus effect may correspond to the "second special suggestion effect." Furthermore, for example, if the effect suggests the execution of one winning game (a big win game or a small win game), the "first special suggestion effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like. Furthermore, for example, if the effect suggests that a predetermined number of (for example, two) winning games (jackpot games, small jackpot games) have been played as if they were a single winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game), then the "first special suggestion effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect in which the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 emits light in a specific light-emitting pattern, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, or the like.

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out bonus effect corresponds to the "third special suggestion effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, any effect that suggests the execution of multiple jackpot games as if it were a single jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game until the game is controlled to a non-time-saving mode may correspond to the "third special suggestion effect," such as a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a hold effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, or a notice using an effect image.

In the above embodiments, LOGO standard mode corresponds to the "first presentation mode," and LOGO3000 mode corresponds to the "second presentation mode." However, this is not limited to this. For example, LOGO3000 mode or LOGO through-out mode may correspond to the "first presentation mode," and LOGO standard mode or LOGO through-out mode may correspond to the "second presentation mode."

In the above embodiments, the LOGO3000 bonus effect suggests that two predetermined jackpot games are executed as one jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO3000 bonus effect may suggest that three or more predetermined jackpot games are executed as one jackpot game.

In the above embodiments, the non-time-saving state corresponds to the "disadvantageous game state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured as an "ST machine" or a "probability variable loop machine," the low-probability time-saving state may correspond to the "disadvantageous game state," and the low-probability non-time-saving state may correspond to the "disadvantageous game state."

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out mode corresponds to the "third presentation mode." However, this is not limited to this. For example, a presentation mode other than the LOGO standard mode, the LOGO 3000 mode, and the LOGO through-out mode may correspond to the "third presentation mode." In this case, a bonus presentation corresponding to the other presentation mode may be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the LOGO through-out bonus effect suggests that multiple jackpot games have been played after the end of a jackpot game until the game is controlled to the non-time-saving mode as if they were a single jackpot game, and suggests that jackpot games are still being played even while variable effects are being played. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the LOGO through-out bonus effect may suggest that multiple jackpot games have been played after the end of a jackpot game until the game is controlled to the non-time-saving mode as if they were a single jackpot game, but may not suggest that jackpot games are still being played while variable effects are being played.

In each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving state, any of the presentation modes from LOGO through-out mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO standard mode can be selected at the ending time of the executed jackpot game A. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving state, any of the presentation modes from LOGO through-out mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO standard mode can be selected even outside the ending time of the executed jackpot game A. For example, when the lottery result for special chart 1 is a jackpot in the non-time-saving state, any of the presentation modes from LOGO through-out mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO standard mode can be selected during a round of play of the executed jackpot game A. Additionally, for customer waiting effects, it may be possible to select one of the following modes: LOGO through-out mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO standard mode.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the first large prize opening 30 and the second large prize opening 35 correspond to the "prize opening." However, this is not limited to this. For example, either the first large prize opening 30 or the second large prize opening 35 may correspond to the "prize opening." Also, for example, either the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21 may correspond to the "prize opening." Also, for example, the first start opening 20 and the second start opening 21 may correspond to the "prize opening." Also, for example, the regular prize opening 27 may correspond to the "prize opening."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the large prize slot winning notification effect in which the winning icon image NI2 is displayed corresponds to the "first winning effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, a large prize slot winning notification effect in which the winning icon image NI2 disappears may also correspond to the "first winning effect." Furthermore, for example, when a game ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), a specific sound is emitted from the speaker 67 indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), or the frame lamp 66 or the panel lamp 5 is illuminated in a specific lighting pattern indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35). These may also correspond to the "first winning effect."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the effect in which the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 is displayed corresponds to the "second winning effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, an effect in which at least one of the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 or the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 is displayed may correspond to the "second winning effect." Furthermore, for example, if an effect different from the winning icon image NI2 occurs when a game ball enters a large winning slot (first large winning slot 30, second large winning slot 35), the "second winning effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 illuminating in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect preview, a cut-in preview, a step-up preview, a preview using an effect image, or the like.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the effect in which the pseudo reserved ball icon GH is displayed is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the effect in which the pseudo reserved ball icon GH is displayed may be an effect that suggests the possibility of the special chart lottery result being a win (a small win or a jackpot).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the display of the winning icon image NI2 begins as soon as a predetermined time (500 ms in the fourth embodiment) has passed since the winning entry into the major winning slot (first major winning slot 30, second major winning slot 35), and the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins as soon as a specific time (700 ms in the fourth embodiment) has passed since the winning entry into the major winning slot (first major winning slot 30, second major winning slot 35). However, this is not limited to this. For example, as long as the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins after the display of the winning icon image NI2 begins, the timing at which the display of the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins may be changed as appropriate.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) were effect images suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) may be effect images suggesting the possibility that the result of the hit determination is a hit (small hit, big hit).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game, and the first round of a type 1 jackpot game corresponded to the "predetermined period." However, this is not limited to this. For example, either the small jackpot game, which corresponds to the first round of a type 2 jackpot game, or the first round of a type 1 jackpot game may correspond to the "predetermined period." Also, for example, a round other than the first round of a jackpot game may correspond to the "predetermined period." Also, for example, the opening of a jackpot game may correspond to the "predetermined period." Also, for example, the ending of a jackpot game may correspond to the "predetermined period." In addition, for example, the period during which a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner may correspond to the "predetermined period." Also, for example, the normal game state, the time-saving state, the high-probability state, etc. may correspond to the "predetermined period." Also, for example, the small jackpot game may correspond to the "predetermined period."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the winning icon image NI2 could be displayed consecutively on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during a single small win game and the first round of a type 1 jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed during the opening of a small win game or a jackpot game, and then the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed during the ending, which may correspond to "the first winning effect being able to be executed consecutively." Also, the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed at a first timing during the execution of a variable effect, and then the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed at a second timing after the first timing, which may correspond to "the first winning effect being able to be executed consecutively." Also, for example, the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed during the first round of a jackpot game, and then the winning icon image NI2 may be displayed during the second round, which may correspond to "the first winning effect being able to be executed consecutively."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 could be displayed consecutively on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during a single small win game and the first round of a Type 1 jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed during the opening of a small win game or a jackpot game, and then the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed during the ending, which may correspond to "the second winning effect being able to be executed consecutively." Also, the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed at a first timing during the execution of a variable effect, and then the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed at a second timing after the first timing, which may correspond to "the second winning effect being able to be executed consecutively." Also, for example, the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed during the first round of a jackpot game, and then the first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1 may be displayed during the second round, which may correspond to "the second winning effect being able to be executed consecutively."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the time (700 ms) from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the time (500 ms) from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, as long as the time from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the time from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the winning icon image NI2 begins to be displayed, this can be changed as appropriate to the extent that it does not interfere with gameplay.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, the time from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed was 700 ms. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the time from when a ball enters a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed can be changed as appropriate to the extent that it does not interfere with gameplay.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the number of winning icon images NI2 that can be displayed in response to winning at the major winning slots (first major winning slot 30, second major winning slot 35) was 10. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the number may be less than 10, or may be 11 or more.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the number of first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 that can be displayed in response to winning at the major winning slots (first major winning slot 30, second major winning slot 35) was eight. However, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be less than seven, or may be nine or more.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21 correspond to the "predetermined ball entry hole." However, this is not limited to this. For example, either the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 may correspond to the "predetermined ball entry hole." Also, for example, a third starting hole, which is different from the first starting hole 20 and the second starting hole 21, may correspond to the "predetermined ball entry hole."

In the fourth embodiment above, the special symbol corresponds to the "identification symbol." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the normal symbol may also correspond to the "identification symbol."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the time (700 ms) from when a ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the stop time of the first special symbol (500 ms) and also longer than the stop time of the second special symbol (500 ms) (see Figures 8, 86, and 87). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the time from when a ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed may be longer than either the stop time of the first special symbol or the stop time of the second special symbol.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the time (700 ms) from when a ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed is longer than the stop time when a special symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol (small prize symbol, big prize symbol). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the time from when a ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) until the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 begins to be displayed may be longer than the stop time when a special symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol (small prize symbol, big prize symbol).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) that are displayed when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) correspond to a "predetermined stock image." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if a presentation image continues to be displayed when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), a jackpot determination is made and a special symbol indicating the determination result is currently being displayed in a changing state, and the icon TA, presentation hold 9A, cut-in image used in the cut-in preview, presentation image used in the step-up preview, effect image, etc. corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a changing state may correspond to a "predetermined stock image."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) continued to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the first round to the sixth round of the jackpot game (Type 1 jackpot game, Type 2 jackpot game). However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) are displayed during the execution of the jackpot game, they may continue to be displayed until the variable effect is executed in the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) are displayed during a jackpot game, they may continue to be displayed until a predetermined timing in the next jackpot game (for example, opening time, ending time, during a round of play, etc.).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), a pseudo reserved ball icon GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) is displayed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even if multiple gaming balls enter a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), only one pseudo reserved ball icon GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment described above, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35), the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) are displayed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 regardless of whether a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35). In this case, for example, when the timing for executing a stock effect arrives during the execution of a variable effect, a small win effect, or a large win effect, the stock effect may begin, and one or more first pseudo reserved ball icons GH1 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The stock effect in the fourth embodiment above was an effect that suggested the possibility of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the stock effect may be an effect that suggests the possibility that the result of the hit determination will be a hit (small hit, jackpot).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 were not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without first changing from the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 when a gaming ball enters a large prize opening (first large prize opening 30, second large prize opening 35) without first changing from the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1.

In the above fourth embodiment, the initial state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH corresponded to the "first image state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the first specific image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may correspond to the "first image state."

Furthermore, in the above fourth embodiment, the first specific image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH corresponded to the "second image state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the second specific image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may correspond to the "second image state."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH was three types: the initial state ("weak"), the first specific image state ("medium"), and the second specific image state ("strong"). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be two or less types. Also, for example, the image state of the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be four or more types.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the order of the likelihood of being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of a jackpot game was the initial state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH ⇒ first specific image state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH ⇒ second specific image state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the order of the likelihood of the hit determination result being a hit (small hit, jackpot) may be the initial state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH ⇒ first specific image state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH ⇒ second specific image state of the pseudo reserve ball icon GH.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 simply differ in the characters displayed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1 may be blue, the second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2 may be green, and the third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3 may be red, indicating by color that there is a high possibility that the game will be controlled to a time-shortened state after the jackpot game ends.

The icon change suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment above corresponds to a "change effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, an icon change effect that can change the display mode of effect hold 9A from a first display mode to a second display mode in which the result of the predictive judgment is more likely to be a hit than the first display mode may also correspond to a "change effect." Also, for example, an icon change effect in which a jackpot judgment has been made and a special pattern indicating the judgment result is currently being displayed in a changing manner, and the display mode of the icon TA corresponding to the special pattern being displayed in a changing manner, can change from a first display mode to a second display mode in which the result of the hit judgment is more likely to be a hit than the first display mode, may also correspond to a "change effect."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the icon change suggestion effect was an effect that was executed when a gaming ball entered a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the icon change suggestion effect may be executed by holding a lottery to determine whether to execute the icon change suggestion effect, and if the result of the lottery is a win, the icon change suggestion effect may be executed regardless of whether a gaming ball entered a major prize slot (first major prize slot 30, second major prize slot 35).

In the fourth embodiment described above, the icon change suggestion effect was an effect that was executed while a jackpot game was being played. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the icon change suggestion effect may be executed while a variation effect is being played.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the final battle effect in which the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collide with the meter display image TM (first meter display image TM1, second meter display image TM2) corresponds to the "special effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the final battle effect in which the pseudo reserve ball icons GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 collide with an enemy character may also correspond to the "special effect." Furthermore, for example, a final battle effect in which the pseudo reserved ball icons GH (first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserved ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserved ball icon GH3) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are moved from their initial positions to display positions different from their initial positions may also be considered a "specific effect".

In the fourth embodiment, the enemy character images TR (first enemy character image TR1, second enemy character image TR2) corresponded to "specific displays." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the effect image suggests the possibility of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, a jackpot determination has been made and a special symbol indicating the determination result is currently being displayed in a changing state, the icon TA corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in a changing state, a hold effect 9A, a cut-in image used in a cut-in notice, an effect image used in a step-up notice, an effect image, etc. may correspond to a "specific display."

In the fourth embodiment described above, the enemy character images TR (first enemy character image TR1, second enemy character image TR2) were effect images that suggested the possibility of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the enemy character images TR (first enemy character image TR1, second enemy character image TR2) may be effect images that suggest the possibility that the result of the hit determination will be a hit.

In the fourth embodiment, the enemy character images TR included a first enemy character image TR1 representing enemy character A and a second enemy character image TR2 representing enemy character B. However, this is not limited to this. For example, there may be three or more types of enemy character images TR. In this case, for example, there may be a first enemy character image TR1 representing enemy character A, a second enemy character image TR2 representing enemy character B, and a third enemy character image TR3 representing enemy character C. The third enemy character image TR3 may be an effect image suggesting that there is a higher possibility of the game being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game than the first enemy character image TR1 and the second enemy character image TR2, or that there is a lower possibility of the game being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game than the first enemy character image TR1 and the second enemy character image TR2. Furthermore, when the third enemy character image TR3 is selected, a battle with enemy character C may take place in a final battle effect.

In the above fourth embodiment, when a pseudo reserve ball icon GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an enemy character image TR (first enemy character image TR1, second enemy character image TR2) is displayed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even when a pseudo reserve ball icon GH (first pseudo reserve ball icon GH1, second pseudo reserve ball icon GH2, third pseudo reserve ball icon GH3) is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, an enemy character image TR (first enemy character image TR1, second enemy character image TR2) may be displayed.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the initial state of the enemy character image TR corresponds to the "first display state," and the special display state of the enemy character image TR corresponds to the "second image state." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the enemy character image TR may have three or more display states. In this case, for example, of the three display states including the initial state, a first special display state that suggests a possibility of a time-saving state being entered after the end of a jackpot game more than the initial state, and a second special display state that suggests a possibility of a time-saving state being entered after the end of a jackpot game more than the first special display state, the first special display state may correspond to the "first display state," and the second special display state may correspond to the "second display state."

In the enemy character determination effect in the fourth embodiment described above, it was possible to change from the first enemy character image TR1 to the second enemy character image TR2. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the enemy character image TR may be configured to include the first enemy character image TR1, the second enemy character image TR2, and other enemy character images TR. For example, in the enemy character determination effect, the first enemy character image TR1 may be changed to the second enemy character image TR2, and then the second enemy character image TR2 may be changed to the third enemy character image TR3, which suggests a greater possibility of a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game than the second enemy character image TR2. In this case, if the third enemy character image TR3 is determined, a battle with the enemy character corresponding to the third enemy character image TR3 may take place in the fourth stage of the battle bonus effect.

In the enemy character determination effect in the fourth embodiment described above, the first enemy character image TR1 could be changed to the second enemy character image TR2 when a game ball entered the first large winning slot 30. However, this is not limited to this. For example, in the enemy character determination effect, the first enemy character image TR1 may be changed to the second enemy character image TR2 when certain conditions are met, such as the passage of a predetermined amount of time, the start of a predetermined reach effect, or the player operating the effect button 63.

In the fourth embodiment described above, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) during the first round of a small prize game or a type 1 jackpot game, a pseudo reserved ball icon GH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when a gaming ball enters a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35) during a jackpot game, the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be displayed at the opening or ending of the jackpot game. Also, for example, when a gaming ball enters the second large prize slot 35 during a small prize game, the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be displayed at the ending of the small prize game. In addition, for example, when a gaming ball enters the normal prize slot 27, first start slot 20, second start slot 21, etc. during a jackpot game, the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be displayed. Additionally, for example, if a game ball enters the normal winning hole 27, the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, etc. while a variable effect is being performed, a pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be displayed.

In the fourth embodiment described above, the pseudo reserved ball icon GH was displayed when a game ball entered a large prize slot (first large prize slot 30, second large prize slot 35). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo reserved ball icon GH may be displayed when a game ball enters the first start slot 20, second start slot 21, normal prize slot 27, etc.

In the fifth embodiment, the upper decorative lamp 69 corresponds to the "light-emitting unit." However, this is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp 66 may correspond to the "light-emitting unit." Also, the panel lamp 5 may correspond to the "light-emitting unit." Furthermore, for example, if a lamp capable of emitting light is provided on the panel movable body 15, the lamp provided on the panel movable body 15 may correspond to the "light-emitting unit."

In the fifth embodiment above, the rainbow colors correspond to the "specific luminous colors." However, this is not limited to this. For example, luminous colors such as a white circle, blue, yellow, green, red, and purple may correspond to the "specific luminous colors" as long as they indicate that the special drawing result is a win.

In the fifth embodiment described above, only one rainbow color was used to indicate that the special drawing result was a win. However, this is not limited to this. For example, there may be two or more colors used to indicate that the special drawing result is a win.

The variable effect in the fifth embodiment above corresponds to a "win/lose indication effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the effect suggests that the result of the special drawing is a win, the "win/lose indication effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect such as making the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 emit light in a specific lighting pattern, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the winning confirmation effect in which the winning confirmation effect image OT is displayed corresponds to the "winning confirmation effect." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the effect indicates that the result of the special drawing is a winning, the "winning confirmation effect" may be a specific effect image displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a specific sound output from the speaker 67, an effect in which the frame lamp 66 or the board lamp 5 is illuminated in a specific lighting mode, a pending effect notice, a cut-in notice, a step-up notice, a notice using an effect image, etc.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the upper decorative lamp 69 always continued to emit light in rainbow colors at the first light intensity while the winning confirmation effect was being executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, while the winning confirmation effect was being executed, the upper decorative lamp 69 may emit light in rainbow colors at the first light intensity, or the upper decorative lamp 69 may emit light in colors other than rainbow.

In the fifth embodiment described above, when the winning confirmation effect was being executed, if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were definitively displayed as stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 emitted rainbow colors at a first light intensity, while in a specific game state, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 emitted rainbow colors at a second light intensity that was greater than the first light intensity. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the winning confirmation effect was being executed, if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were definitively displayed as stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 emitted rainbow colors at a first brightness, while in a specific game state, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 may emit rainbow colors at a second brightness that was greater than the first brightness. Furthermore, for example, when the winning confirmation effect is being executed, if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 may flash in rainbow colors; on the other hand, when the specific game state is being executed, the upper decorative portion lamp 69 may flash in rainbow colors faster than when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot.

In the fifth embodiment described above, when the winning confirmation effect is being executed, if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitively displayed as stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a first light intensity; on the other hand, when the specific game state is being executed, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a second light intensity that is greater than the first light intensity. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the winning confirmation effect is being executed, if the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitively displayed as stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a second light intensity; on the other hand, when the specific game state is being executed, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits light in rainbow colors at a first light intensity that is less than the second light intensity.

In the fifth embodiment described above, when the winning confirmation display was being executed, if the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were displayed in a definite stopped state suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative lamp 69 emitted rainbow colors at the first light intensity. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were displayed in a temporary stopped state suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative lamp 69 emitted rainbow colors at the first light intensity, and then if the display symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R were displayed in a definite stopped state suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative lamp 69 may change from emitting rainbow colors at the first light intensity to emitting rainbow colors at the second light intensity.

In the fifth embodiment described above, the upper decorative portion 68 corresponds to the "specific decorative portion." However, this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a decorative portion provided on the gaming machine frame 50, a decorative portion provided in any of the directions to the left, right, up, or down of the front frame 51 of the gaming machine frame 50 when viewed from the front may correspond to the "specific decorative portion." Furthermore, for example, a decorative portion provided in two or more directions to the left, right, up, or down of the front frame 51 of the gaming machine frame 50 when viewed from the front may correspond to the "specific decorative portion."

In the fifth embodiment described above, the upper decorative portion 58 extends upward and forward from the front frame 51 (see Figure 108). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the upper decorative portion 58 may extend upward from the front frame 51. Also, for example, the upper decorative portion 58 may extend forward from the front frame 51. Alternatively, for example, the upper decorative portion 58 may extend either to the right or to the left from the front frame 51. Also, for example, it may extend downward and forward from the front frame 51.

The upper decorative portion 68 in the fifth embodiment may be attachable to the upper portion, which is the base portion, of the front frame 51. By attaching the upper decorative portion 68 to the upper portion, which is the base portion, of the front frame 51, the upper decorative portion 68 may extend forward and upward from the front frame 51, as shown in Figures 107 and 108.

In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the white light emitted by the upper decorative lamp 69 is the "first light color," and the red light emitted by the upper decorative lamp 69 is the "second light color." However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the second light color is more advantageous to the player than the first light color, the first light color may be a light color other than white, and the second light color may be a light color other than red.

In the modified example of the fifth embodiment described above, the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is white when in the non-time-saving state, and red when in the time-saving state, so red is a light color that is more advantageous to the player than white. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is white when in the low-probability state, and red when in the high-probability state, so red may be a light color that is more advantageous to the player than white. Also, for example, the light emitted by the upper decorative part lamp 69 is white when in the normal game state, and red when in the execution of a small win game or a big win game, so red may be a light color that is more advantageous to the player than white.

In the modified example of the fifth embodiment described above, when a jackpot game is being played and a state in which a jackpot game can be played after a small jackpot game has occurred, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits rainbow colors, suggesting that the rainbow colors are more advantageous to the player than the red color of the upper decorative part lamp 69 emitted in the time-saving state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when a 10R jackpot game is being played and a state in which a 10R jackpot game can be played after a small jackpot game has occurred, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits rainbow colors, suggesting that the rainbow colors are more advantageous to the player than the red color of the upper decorative part lamp 69 emitted in the time-saving state. Also, for example, when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game, the upper decorative part lamp 69 emits rainbow colors, suggesting that the rainbow colors are more advantageous to the player than the red color of the upper decorative part lamp 69 emitted in the time-saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment described above, the upper decorative part lamp 69 illuminates red when in the time-saving state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when in the low-probability time-saving state, the upper decorative part lamp 69 may illuminate green, and when in the high-probability time-saving state, the upper decorative part lamp 69 may illuminate red. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the game is controlled to the low-probability time-saving state when the upper decorative part lamp 69 illuminates green, and to understand that the game is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state when the upper decorative part lamp 69 illuminates red.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment and the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the player or an employee of the gaming parlor may be able to stop the rainbow-colored illumination of the upper decorative lamp 69 by operating the operating means.

In each of the above embodiments, the machine is configured as a so-called Type 1/2 hybrid machine that can execute a jackpot game based on the passage of a gaming ball through the specific area 39 within the second large prize opening 35. Because the combined probability of winning a jackpot in the drawing for Special Design 2 and the probability of winning a small prize in the drawing for Special Design 2 is 1/1, when the time-saving state is entered with one time of time-saving, the execution of the next jackpot game is essentially confirmed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the machine may be of a type other than a Type 1/2 hybrid machine, such as a so-called "ST machine" or "probability variable loop machine." In the case of an ST machine or a probability variable loop machine, the machine may be a so-called "symbol probability variable machine" in which a transition to a high-probability state with a high jackpot probability is determined based on the type of special symbol that is won, or a so-called "V probability variable machine" in which a transition to a high-probability state is determined based on the passage of a special symbol within a V attacker (a large prize device with a specific area).

In each of the above embodiments, during the ending presentation executed at the ending time of the first jackpot game, one of the presentation modes, LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode, is selected by pressing the presentation button 63, and after a predetermined time (15 seconds) has elapsed, the selected specific game state presentation mode is set. However, this is not limited to this. For example, during the ending presentation, one of the presentation modes, LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode, may be set by pressing the presentation button 63. Also, for example, during the ending presentation, one of the presentation modes, LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode may be selected by pressing the presentation button 63, and when an operation button other than the presentation button 63 is operated, the selected specific game state presentation mode may be set.

In each of the above embodiments, one of the following presentation modes was set for the ending presentation executed at the ending time of the jackpot game upon the first win: LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode. However, this is not limited to this. For example, situations in which the presentation mode can be set from LOGO standard mode, LOGO 3000 mode, or LOGO through-out mode may include, for example, customer waiting presentations, when variable presentations are being executed, small jackpot game presentations, and jackpot game presentations.

In the fifth embodiment and the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the first special symbol is displayed as a winning symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) in a non-time-saving state, that is, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitively displayed as stopped symbols suggesting a jackpot, the upper decorative lamp 69 emits rainbow colors. Note that the light intensity in this case is the first light intensity. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the upper decorative lamp 69 may emit rainbow colors at the first light intensity after the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily displayed as stopped symbols suggesting a jackpot, and then, simultaneously with the start of a winning game (small win game, jackpot game), the upper decorative lamp 69 may emit rainbow colors at the second light intensity. Also, for example, when the first special symbol is displayed as a winning symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) in a non-time-saving state, the upper decorative lamp 69 may emit rainbow colors at the first light intensity until the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 may include only the jackpot symbol that will be controlled to the time-saving state (i.e., controlled to the non-time-saving state) after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the machine is configured as a so-called Type 1/Type 2 mixed machine, but depending on the gameplay desired, it may also be configured as a so-called "Hanemono" (Type 2) machine that does not have a Type 1 jackpot. In other words, it may be configured so that it is not possible to win a so-called "direct jackpot" in either the Special Chart 1 lottery or the Special Chart 2 lottery.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, it is possible to win a so-called "direct jackpot" based on the lottery for Special Chart 2, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which it is not possible to win a "direct jackpot" based on the lottery for Special Chart 2, i.e., a configuration in which the jackpot based on the lottery for Special Chart 2 is only a type 2 jackpot.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, in a small prize game based on the lottery of special chart 2, the opening control of the second large prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 37) and the operation control of the distribution member 71 are configured to ensure that V passage occurs. In contrast, in a small prize game based on the lottery of special chart 2, the opening control of the second large prize opening 35 and the operation control of the distribution member 71 may be configured to ensure that V passage occurs but not always (in other words, if the timing when the distribution member 71 is in a state allowing passage and the timing of the winning at the second large prize opening 35 coincide well, passage to the specific area 39 occurs, but if they do not, passage to the specific area 39 does not occur).

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the opening pattern for the small prize game based on the lottery of Special Chart 2 is an opening pattern in which a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 regardless of the timing of the entry. However, as long as the game is played correctly (as long as the right hand is continuously hit), the opening pattern does not necessarily require all game balls that enter the second large prize opening 35 to pass through the specific area 39, as long as the game ball can always pass through the specific area 39 during the small prize game. Specifically, for example, an opening pattern may be configured in which a 0.1-second opening is repeated 12 times, and game balls that enter the first through ninth openings pass through the specific area 39, while game balls that enter the tenth through twelfth openings pass through the non-specific area 70. In other words, the passing opening pattern may be an opening pattern in which entry into the second large prize opening 35 is possible and at least one of the game balls that enter the second large prize opening 35 passes through the specific area 39. When using an opening pattern like this modified example, the opening/closing member of the second large prize device should be designed as follows to make it easier for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 35 during each opening. That is, it should be a retractable member that can move forward and backward, blocking the second large prize opening when extended forward and opening it when retracted backward. The opening/closing member should then be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second flow path R2 roll along its upper surface. Furthermore, the coefficient of friction of the upper surface of the opening/closing member should be increased (for example, by using a highly elastic material such as rubber) so that game balls roll slowly along the upper surface of the opening/closing member. Alternatively, protrusions to slow the rolling speed of game balls may be provided on the path of the game balls, which uses the upper surface of the opening/closing member as the floor.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the specific area 39 is configured to open according to a predetermined activation pattern managed by time, based on the start of the small win game. Alternatively, the specific area 39 may be configured to open (to allow passage) when the number of winning balls entering the second large winning opening 35 reaches a predetermined activation-trigger winning number (for example, one ball). In this case, for a special 2V passing small win, the activation-trigger winning number may be set to, for example, "1." In this way, during a special 2V passing small win, winning balls entering the second large winning opening 35 can pass through the specific area 39. Even if the distribution member 71 is configured to operate based on the activation-trigger winning number, the specific area 39 still switches between allowing and not allowing passage at predetermined times.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, there is no special symbol 2 reserve, i.e., the upper limit of the number of special symbol 2 reserves that can be stored is "0," but this can be changed as appropriate. For example, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay, the upper limit of the number of special symbol 2 reserves that can be stored (second special symbol reserve) may be "1" or more. The upper limit of the number of special symbol 2 reserves that can be stored can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the upper limit on the number of times the special symbol variable display is executed (time-saving count) in the time-saving state is the combined upper limit on the number of times it is executed, which is counted whether the special symbol 1 variable display or the special symbol 2 variable display is executed. However, in addition to this combined upper limit on the number of times it is executed, a special symbol 1 upper limit on the number of times it is executed, which counts only the special symbol 1 variable display, or a special symbol 2 upper limit on the number of times it is executed, which counts only the special symbol 2 variable display, may be set, and the time-saving state may be configured to end when either of these numbers is met. Note that the special symbol 1 upper limit on the number of times it is executed and the special symbol 2 upper limit on the number of times it is executed may be set to a value different from the combined upper limit on the number of times it is executed. Furthermore, without setting a combined upper limit on the number of times it is executed, a special symbol 1 upper limit on the number of times it is executed and a special symbol 2 upper limit on the number of times it is executed may be set, and the time-saving state may be configured to end when either of these numbers is met, or only a special symbol 2 upper limit on the number of times it is executed may be set, and the time-saving state may be configured to end when this number is met.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the player can obtain a greater bonus when a jackpot game (including a type 2 jackpot game) is played based on the lottery for special chart 2 than when a jackpot game is played based on the lottery for special chart 1, but the opposite or the same may also be true. The bonuses that the player can obtain include the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a jackpot game, and various settings related to the game state after a jackpot game (such as whether or not the game is controlled to a time-saving state, and the number of times the game is shortened if controlled to a time-saving state).

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, the display unit that performs the variable effects is configured using the display screen of one display device (display screen 7a of image display device 7), but it may also be configured using the display screens of two or more display devices. For example, in a configuration that includes a sub-display device in addition to image display device 7 as the main display device, the display screen of the main display device may be configured to perform the variable effects of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the display screen of the sub-display may be configured to perform the variable effects of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3. Furthermore, a touch panel consisting of a touch sensor and a liquid crystal display device may be mounted on the gaming machine frame 50, and the liquid crystal display device on this touch panel may be used as the sub-display device.

In addition, in each of the above embodiments, four random numbers, including a jackpot random number, are obtained as random numbers (determination information) based on a win at the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. However, it is also possible to obtain a single random number and use that random number to determine whether it is a jackpot or a small win, the type of jackpot symbol, small win symbol, or losing symbol, whether there is a reach, and the type of variation pattern. In other words, the number of random numbers obtained based on a start win and what is determined by each random number can be set arbitrarily.

13. Inventions Shown in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The above-mentioned embodiments show the following inventions (inventions relating to means A1 to A4, inventions relating to means B1 to B4, inventions relating to means C1 to C5, inventions relating to means D1 to D4, inventions relating to means E1 to E5, inventions relating to means F1 to F5, inventions relating to means G1 to G5, and inventions relating to means H1 to H5). In the following description of the inventions, corresponding component names and expressions in the above-mentioned embodiments and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to these additions.

<Means A>
The invention according to means A1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that determines whether or not a win has been made based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a special drawing lottery, etc. are acquired);
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The game control means
If the result of the determination is a win, a special game (jackpot game) can be executed;
After the execution of the special game is completed, the game state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player (time-saving state),
The performance control means
A special effect (LOGO3000 bonus effect) indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous gaming state can be executed.
A first specific percentage (10%) indicating the probability that the special effect will be executed when the result of the determination is a win can be set;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to set a second specific rate (81%) that is greater than the first specific rate as the probability that the special effect will be executed if the result of the judgment is a win.

A gaming machine with this configuration can provide players with a special effect set to a first specific rate, which indicates the probability of a special effect being executed when the result of the hit/wonder judgment is a hit, indicating that the player will be controlled to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It can also provide players with a special effect set to a second specific rate, which is greater than the first specific rate, as the probability of a special effect being executed when the result of the judgment is a hit. This makes it possible to enjoy special effects set to various rates to suit the preferences of various players, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The invention according to means A2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means A1,
Equipped with operable operation means (performance button 63, select button 64),
The performance control means
The first specific ratio can be set based on an operation of the operating means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific ratio can be set based on the operation of the operating means.

A gaming machine with this configuration can provide a player with a special effect set at a first specific rate or a special effect set at a second specific rate based on the operation of the operating means. This allows the player to operate the operating means according to their own preferences and enjoy the special effect set at the first specific rate or the special effect set at the second specific rate, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means A3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means A2,
The game control means
If the result of the judgment is a win, the game state can be controlled to the advantageous game state after the end of the special game at a predetermined rate (81%),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the second specific percentage is the same percentage (81%) as the predetermined percentage.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the machine is controlled to a favorable game state after the end of the special game at a predetermined rate, and when the result of the win/win determination is a win, the probability of the special effect being executed can be set up to a second specific rate that is the same as the predetermined rate, making it possible to provide the player with a special effect. This makes it possible to heighten the player's interest in the game through the novelty of being able to set the specific rate up to the second specific rate that is the same as the predetermined rate at which the machine is controlled to a favorable game state after the end of the special game.

The invention according to means A4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3,
If the result of the judgment by the game control means is a specific win (10R time-saving big win B, 10R time-saving small win A, see FIG. 8), after the special game ends, the game is transitioned to the advantageous game state and the execution of the next special game is confirmed.
The special effect is a gaming machine characterized in that after the special game ends, the machine is controlled to the advantageous game state and indicates that the next special game will be played.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the special effect indicating that the game will be controlled to a favorable gaming state after the end of a special game and that the execution of the next special game is confirmed can be set to a first specific rate or a second specific rate. This makes it possible to heighten interest in the game by providing the player with the joy of being controlled to a favorable gaming state after the end of a special game and that the execution of the next special game is confirmed through special effects set to specific rates that suit the preferences of various players.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are a type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether a jackpot has been reached, provided that a gaming ball has entered the starting slot, as described in JP 2018-88993 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is performed, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A, a time-saving gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be entered in which a gaming ball is more likely to enter the variable starting slot that can be opened and closed than in a non-time-saving gaming state. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to players, such as those described in JP 2018-88993 A, in order to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention of the above-mentioned means A differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A in that "a first specific percentage indicating the probability that the special effect will be executed if the result of the judgment is a win can be set, and a second specific percentage greater than the first specific percentage can be set as the probability that the special effect will be executed if the result of the judgment is a win." This makes it possible for the invention of means A to solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "making it possible to increase interest in gaming."

<Means B>
The invention according to means B1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not a game has been won based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for performing a special drawing lottery, etc. are obtained);
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The game control means
If the result of the lottery is a win, a special game (jackpot game) is executed;
After the special game ends, the player can transition to an advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player,
If the result of the lottery by the game control means is a specific win (10R time-saving big win B, 10R time-saving small win A, see FIG. 8), after the special game ends, the game is transitioned to the advantageous game state and the execution of the next special game is confirmed.
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that if the result of the lottery is the specific win, the machine is transitioned to the advantageous game state and is capable of executing a confirmation effect (LOGO3000 bonus effect) indicating that the next execution of the special game is confirmed.

With a gaming machine configured in this way, the confirmation effect allows the player to understand that the transition to a favorable gaming state and the execution of the next special game are confirmed. This makes the confirmation effect a strong impression on the player, which is novel and entertaining for the player, and can increase their interest in the game.

The invention according to means B2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means B1,
The performance control means
If the result of the lottery is the specific winning, after the end of the special game, a transition suggestion effect (LOGO1500 bonus effect) that suggests the possibility of transitioning to the advantageous game state can be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the possibility of the transition suggestion effect being executed when the result of the lottery is the specific win is different from the possibility of the confirmation effect being executed when the result of the lottery is the specific win (see Figures 80 and 85).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, if the result of the lottery is a specific win, after the special game ends, the likelihood of a transition suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of being controlled to a favorable game state differs from the likelihood of a confirmation effect being executed. As a result, even though the likelihood of being controlled to a favorable game state after the special game ends is the same, the novelty of the different likelihood of a transition suggestion effect being executed and a confirmation effect being executed can entertain players and increase their interest in the game.

The invention according to means B3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means B2,
The advantageous game state includes a plurality of advantageous game states (time-saving state A, time-saving state B) having different ending conditions for the advantageous game state,
The performance control means
After the special game ends, if the game is transitioned to the first advantageous game state (time-saving state B) among the plurality of advantageous game states, the determination effect is executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, after the special game ends, if the game transitions to a second advantageous game state (time-shortened state A) different from the first advantageous game state among the multiple advantageous game states, the transition suggestion effect can be executed.

A gaming machine with this configuration has two advantageous gaming states, a first advantageous gaming state and a second advantageous gaming state, which have different conditions for terminating the advantageous gaming state. When a transition to the first advantageous gaming state occurs, a confirmation effect is always executed. On the other hand, when a transition to the second advantageous gaming state occurs, a transition suggestion effect may be executed. This makes it possible to create interest in whether a confirmation effect or a transition suggestion effect will be executed, depending on whether a transition to the first advantageous gaming state or the second advantageous gaming state has occurred, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The invention according to means B4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means B3,
The game control means
It is possible to determine the variation time of the special symbols that indicate the result of the lottery,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the game state is shifted to the first advantageous game state after the special game ends, the time period during which the special pattern changes, which is determined if the result of the lottery is a win, is shorter than the time period during which the game state is shifted to the second advantageous game state after the special game ends, which is determined if the result of the lottery is a win (see Figure 81).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the time period over which the special symbol changes when the lottery result is a win after transitioning to the first advantageous game state is shorter than the time period over which the special symbol changes when the lottery result is a win after transitioning to the second advantageous game state. As a result, the time period over which the special symbol changes when the lottery result is a win is shorter when transitioning to the first advantageous game state than when transitioning to the second advantageous game state, giving the player the impression that there is no connection between the end of a special game and the execution of the next special game, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are a type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether a jackpot has been reached, provided that a gaming ball has entered the starting slot, as described in JP 2018-88993 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is performed, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A, a time-saving gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be entered in which a gaming ball is more likely to enter the variable starting slot that can be opened and closed than in a non-time-saving gaming state. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to players, such as those described in JP 2018-88993 A, in order to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means B differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A in that "if the result of the lottery is the specific win, the machine is transitioned to the advantageous gaming state and a confirmation effect is executed indicating that the next execution of the special game is confirmed." As a result, the invention relating to means A can solve the problem (achieve the effect) of "making it possible to increase interest in gaming."

<Means C>
The invention according to means C1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that determines whether or not a win has occurred based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a special drawing lottery, etc., are acquired);
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The game control means
When the result of the determination is a win, a special game (jackpot game) can be controlled;
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (a jackpot game based on a time-saving win (a time-saving big win (10R time-saving big win B, 10R time-saving big win C, see FIG. 8), a time-saving small win (10R time-saving small win A, 10R time-saving small win B, see FIG. 8)) is executed in a non-time-saving state by drawing a special chart), the special game and an advantageous game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player can be controlled to a special game state (specific game state) in which they are easily controlled consecutively,
The performance control means
A suggestive effect (LOGO through-out bonus effect) that suggests that the game is controlled to the special game state can be executed.
This gaming machine is characterized in that even if the execution of the special game is terminated by the game control means during the execution of the suggestive effect, if control of the special game state continues, the execution of the suggestive effect continues.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if the execution of the special game ends, the suggestive effect that suggests that the special game and the advantageous game state advantageous to the player are being controlled to a special game state that is easily controlled continuously continues, as long as the control of the special game state continues. This provides the player with a novel effect that heightens the player's desire for the special game state to continue for a long time, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means C2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C1,
The performance control means
When the game control means controls the special game state, one of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (LOGO through-out mode) and a second presentation mode (LOGO3000 mode) different from the first presentation mode can be set;
When the special game is being executed during the execution of the first presentation mode, the suggestion presentation is executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the special game is being played while the second presentation mode is set, a special presentation (LOGO3000 bonus presentation) indicating that the special game is being played is executed.

With this gaming machine, if a special game is being played while the first of the multiple presentation modes is set, a suggestive effect is executed. On the other hand, if a special game is being played while the second of the multiple presentation modes is set, a special effect indicating that a special game is being played is executed. This allows players to enjoy suggestive effects when a special game is being played while the first presentation mode is set, and special effects when a special game is being played while the second presentation mode is set, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The invention according to means C3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C2,
The performance control means
When the special game is being executed, after executing an end suggestion effect (a defeat effect for the latter half effect of the LOGO3000 bonus effect shown in FIG. 57(E)) which suggests that the control of the advantageous game state may be ended, a specific effect (a revival effect B exclusive to the LOGO3000 mode) which suggests that the control of the advantageous game state will continue can be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the probability that the specific effect will be executed in the suggestive effect is different from the probability that the specific effect will be executed in the special effect.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the probability of a specific effect suggesting that control of a favorable gaming state will continue in a suggestive effect while the first presentation mode is set is different from the probability of a specific effect being executed in a special effect while the second presentation mode is set. This provides a novel gaming machine in which the probability of a specific effect being executed varies depending on the currently set presentation mode, making it possible to increase gaming enjoyment.

The invention according to means C4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means C3,
The game control means
When the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific winning mode ("Special symbol 2_Big win symbol C", "Special symbol 2_Big win symbol D", "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol a", "Special symbol 2_Small win symbol b", see FIG. 8), after the special game ends, the game is controlled to the advantageous game state,
The specific winning patterns include a first specific winning pattern ("Special drawing 2_Big winning pattern D", "Special drawing 2_Small winning pattern b", see FIG. 8) and a second specific winning pattern ("Special drawing 2_Big winning pattern C", "Special drawing 2_Small winning pattern a", see FIG. 8) different from the first specific winning pattern,
The performance control means
During the setting of the first presentation mode, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in either the first specific winning mode or the second specific winning mode, a continuation suggestion presentation (LOGO through-out mode continuation presentation, see FIG. 60(E) and FIG. 63(C-1)) is executed, which suggests that the control of the advantageous game state will be continued in the suggestion presentation,
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when the special pattern is displayed stopped in the first specific winning pattern while the second presentation mode is set, the specific presentation is executed by the special presentation, and, on the other hand, when the special pattern is displayed stopped in the second specific winning pattern while the second presentation mode is set, the special presentation executes a continuation suggestion presentation (LOGO3000 mode continuation presentation, see Figure 57 (D)) that suggests that control of the advantageous game state will continue.

With this gaming machine configuration, when a special symbol is displayed in a specific winning pattern, including a first specific winning pattern and a second specific winning pattern, the machine is controlled to a favorable gaming state after the special game ends. Furthermore, when the first presentation mode is set and the special symbol is displayed in either the first or second winning pattern, a continuation suggestion effect is executed, suggesting that the favorable gaming state will continue. On the other hand, when the second presentation mode is set and the special symbol is displayed in the first winning pattern, a specific effect is executed in the special effect, and when the special symbol is displayed in the second winning pattern, a continuation suggestion effect is executed, suggesting that the favorable gaming state will continue. This provides an innovative gaming machine that can change whether the continuation suggestion effect or the specific effect, or whether only the continuation suggestion effect is executed, depending on the presentation mode rather than the winning pattern, thereby increasing gaming enjoyment.

The invention according to means C5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means C2 to C4,
The performance control means
The first presentation mode can be set from among the plurality of presentation modes based on a predetermined operation by the player (pressing the presentation button 63),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation mode can be set from among the plurality of presentation modes based on the predetermined operation.

With this gaming machine, of the multiple presentation modes, it is possible to set a first presentation mode in which a suggestive presentation is executed, or a second presentation mode in which a special presentation is executed without executing a suggestive presentation, based on a predetermined operation by the player. This allows players to select the first presentation mode in which a suggestive presentation is executed, or the second presentation mode in which a special presentation is executed, based on their own preferences, thereby providing a novel gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are a type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether a jackpot has been reached, provided that a gaming ball has entered the starting slot, as described in JP 2018-88993 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is performed, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A, a time-saving gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be entered in which a gaming ball is more likely to enter the variable starting slot that can be opened and closed than in a non-time-saving gaming state. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to players, such as those described in JP 2018-88993 A, in order to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means C differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A in that "it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the game has been controlled to the special game state, and even if the game control means ends the execution of the special game while the suggestive effect is being executed, if control of the special game state continues, the execution of the suggestive effect continues." As a result, the invention relating to means A can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "making it possible to increase interest in the game."

<Means D>
The invention according to means D1 is
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (examples of numerical information and judgment information) for performing special drawing lottery, etc. are acquired);
In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control microcomputer 91) capable of executing special presentations (LOGO standard bonus presentation, LOGO 3000 bonus presentation, LOGO 1500 bonus presentation, LOGO through-out bonus presentation) that indicate that the special game is being played,
The game control means
After the special game ends, the game can be controlled to a beneficial game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player,
The special effects include a first special effect (LOGO standard bonus effect, LOGO 1500 bonus effect) and a second special effect (LOGO 3000 bonus effect, LOGO through-out bonus effect) that is different from the first special effect.
The performance control means
Based on the end of an advantageous period (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, a first number display (bonus execution number image SB1, LOGO1500 bonus execution number image SB3) that indicates the number of times the first special effect is executed during the advantageous period can be executed;
This gaming machine is characterized by being able to execute a second number display (LOGO3000 bonus execution number image SB2, through-out bonus execution number image SB4) indicating the number of times the second special effect is executed during the advantageous period based on the end of the advantageous period.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, based on the end of a favorable period advantageous to the player, a first count display showing the number of times the first special effect was executed during that favorable period and a second count display showing the number of times the second special effect was executed during that favorable period are displayed separately. This makes it possible to provide an innovative gaming machine that makes it easy to clearly understand the number of times the first special effect was executed during the favorable period and the number of times the second special effect was executed during the favorable period.

The invention according to means D2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means D1,
The first special effect is an effect (LOGO standard bonus effect, LOGO 1500 bonus effect) that suggests the execution of one special game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second special effect is an effect (LOGO3000 bonus effect) that suggests that the execution of the special game multiple times is the execution of the special game once.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the first special effect makes it appear to the player that a single special game has been played, and the second special effect makes it appear to the player that multiple special games have been played as if they were a single special game. This makes it possible to entertain the player in a variety of ways depending on the special effect being played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means D3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means D1,
The first special effect is an effect (LOGO standard bonus effect, LOGO 1500 bonus effect) that suggests the execution of one special game,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second special effect is an effect (LOGO through-out bonus effect) that suggests that the effects during the advantageous period are the execution of one special game.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the first special effect makes it possible for the player to see that a single special game has been played, and the second special effect makes it possible for the effects during the advantageous period to appear to the player as if a single special game had been played. This makes it possible to entertain the player in a variety of ways depending on the special effect being played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means D3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means D1,
The performance control means
Counting one execution of the special game by the game control means as one execution of the first special effect (step S4703, see FIG. 37),
This gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the special game multiple times by the game control means is counted as one execution of the second special effect (step S4706, see Figure 37).

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the execution of one special game is counted as the execution of one first special effect, and the execution of multiple special games is counted as the execution of one second special effect. This makes it possible to control the distinctly displayed first and second count displays so that the number of times each special effect has been executed can be accurately determined.

The invention according to means D4 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D3,
An external terminal unit (external terminal board 119) capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The game control means
A determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry hole (second starting hole 21), and
When the result of the determination is a win, the special game is executable;
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is capable of outputting a winning signal to the external terminal section each time the result of the judgment is a winning one, regardless of whether the first special effect or the second special effect is executed.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, each time the result of the hit determination is a hit, regardless of whether the first or second special effect is executed, the gaming control means outputs a hit signal to an external terminal that can output a signal to the outside of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to accurately communicate to the outside the number of times the result of the hit determination is a hit, regardless of whether the first or second special effect is shown to the player.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are a type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, provided that a gaming ball has entered the starting slot, as described in JP 2018-88993 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is performed, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A, a time-saving gaming state (advantageous gaming state) may be entered in which a gaming ball is more likely to enter the variable starting slot that can be opened and closed than in a non-time-saving gaming state. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for innovative gaming machines that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player, such as that described in JP 2018-88993 A. The invention of the above-mentioned means D differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2018-88993 A in that "based on the end of an advantageous period that is advantageous to the player, a first count display can be executed to indicate the number of times the first special effect will be executed during that advantageous period, and based on the end of the advantageous period, a second count display can be executed to indicate the number of times the second special effect will be executed during that advantageous period." This allows the invention of means A to solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "making it possible to increase interest in gaming."

<Means E>
The invention according to means E1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that can execute a special game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (examples of numerical information and judgment information) for performing a special drawing lottery, etc. are acquired);
and a performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of executing a special suggestion performance that suggests that the special game is being executed.
The special suggestion effects include a first special suggestion effect (LOGO standard bonus effect) and a second special suggestion effect (LOGO3000 bonus effect) that is different from the first special suggestion effect.
The performance control means
One of a plurality of presentation modes including a first presentation mode (LOGO standard mode) and a second presentation mode (LOGO3000 mode) different from the first presentation mode can be set;
When the first presentation mode is set, the first special suggestion presentation corresponding to the first presentation mode can be executed;
This gaming machine is characterized in that when the second presentation mode is set, the second special suggestion presentation corresponding to the second presentation mode can be executed.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when a set first presentation mode is set, the first special suggestion presentation corresponding to that first presentation mode makes it possible for the player to understand that a special game is being played. On the other hand, when a set second presentation mode is set, the second special suggestion presentation corresponding to that second presentation mode makes it possible for the player to understand that a special game is being played. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a special game is being played through the special suggestion presentation corresponding to the presentation mode set to suit the player's preferences, which allows for enjoyment and increases the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means E2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means E1,
The game control means
Based on the entry of the game ball into the predetermined ball entry port (second starting port 21), a determination is made as to whether or not a win has been made (special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002)).
If the result of the determination is a win, the special game is executed;
After the special game ends, the game can be controlled to a beneficial game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player,
The first special suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the execution of one special game,
The second special suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the execution of a predetermined number of special games is the execution of a single special game.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the first special suggestion effect makes it appear to the player that a single special game has been played, and the second special suggestion effect makes it appear to the player that a predetermined number of special games have been played as a single special game. This makes it possible to entertain the player in a variety of ways depending on the special suggestion effect being played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means E3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means E2,
The game control means
The game state can be controlled to an unfavorable game state (non-time-shortened state) that is more unfavorable to the player than the advantageous game state,
The performance control means
A third presentation mode (LOGO through-out mode) different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode can be set from among the plurality of presentation modes;
When the third presentation mode is set, a third special suggestion presentation (LOGO through-out bonus presentation) corresponding to the third presentation mode can be executed;
The third special suggestion effect is a performance that suggests the execution of the special game once or multiple times after the end of the special game before the game is controlled to the disadvantageous game state, as if it were the execution of one special game.

With a gaming machine configured in this way, when the third presentation mode is set, the third special suggestion presentation makes it appear to the player that one or more special games are played after the end of a special game before the game state is controlled to an unfavorable state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state. This makes it possible for the third special suggestion presentation to make the player's heart race, wondering how long one special game will continue, and thus increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means E4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means E3,
An external terminal unit (external terminal board 119) capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine is provided,
The game control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that it is capable of outputting a winning signal to the external terminal section each time the result of the judgment is a winning one, regardless of whether the second special suggestion effect or the third special suggestion effect is executed.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, each time the result of the hit determination is a hit, a hit signal is output by the gaming control means to an external terminal unit that can output a signal to the outside of the gaming machine, regardless of whether the second special suggestion effect, which suggests that multiple special games are being played as if they were a single special game, or the third special suggestion effect is played. This makes it possible to correctly communicate to the outside the number of times the result of the hit determination is a hit, regardless of whether the second special suggestion effect or the third special suggestion effect is shown to the player.

The invention according to means E5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means E2 to E4,
The game control means
If the result of the judgment is a specific win (10R time-saving big win A, FIG. 8), control is made to the advantageous game state after the special game ends,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that one presentation mode can be set from among the plurality of presentation modes during execution of the special game based on the specific win.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode may be set during the execution of a special game based on a specific win. This allows players to enjoy a presentation mode that suits their preferences during the execution of a special game based on a specific win, increasing their interest in the game.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are one type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached, provided that a gaming ball enters the starting slot, as described in JP 2008-119399 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine described in JP 2008-119399 A, a jackpot game effect (special suggestion effect) that suggests that a jackpot game (special game) is being executed may be executed. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing special suggestion effects that suggest that a special game is being executed, such as those described in JP 2008-119399 A, in order to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means E differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2008-119399 A in that "when the first presentation mode is set, the first special suggestion presentation corresponding to the first presentation mode is executed, and when the second presentation mode is set, the second special suggestion presentation corresponding to the second presentation mode is executed." This makes it possible for the invention relating to means E to solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "making it possible to increase interest in gaming."

<Means F>
The invention according to means F1 is:
winning holes into which game balls can enter (first large winning hole 30, second large winning hole 35);
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The performance control means
When the game ball enters the winning hole, a first winning effect (a large winning hole winning notification effect) can be executed to indicate that the game ball has entered the winning hole;
When the game ball enters the winning hole, a second winning effect (a performance of displaying a first pseudo reserved ball icon GH1) different from the first winning effect can be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the execution of the second winning effect can be started after the execution of the first winning effect has started (see Figures 86 and 87).

With a gaming machine configured in this way, when a gaming ball enters a prize slot, it is possible to start the execution of the second prize presentation after the execution of the first prize presentation. This makes it possible to enjoy the start of the second prize presentation after enjoying the start of the first prize presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The invention according to means F2 is:
In the gaming machine described in means F1,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 81) is provided, which can control the game state to be advantageous to the player (time-shortened state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (examples of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting special drawing lottery, etc. are obtained),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second winning effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of being controlled into the advantageous gaming state.

With a gaming machine configured in this way, when a gaming ball enters a winning slot, it is possible to start the execution of a second winning effect, which suggests the possibility of being controlled to a favorable gaming state, after the start of the first winning effect. This allows the player to enjoy the start of the first winning effect, and then understand the possibility of being controlled to a favorable gaming state through the second winning effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means F3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means F2,
The performance control means
The first winning effect can be executed consecutively in response to the winning of the game ball into the winning hole during a predetermined period (the first round of the small win game or the first type big win game),
The second winning effect can be executed consecutively in response to the winning of the game ball into the winning hole during the predetermined period,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the time (700 ms) from when the game ball enters the winning slot to when the second winning effect starts to be executed is longer than the time (500 ms) from when the game ball enters the winning slot to when the first winning effect starts to be executed.

With a gaming machine configured in this way, the time from when a gaming ball enters a prize slot until the second prize effect begins to be executed is longer than the time from when the first prize effect begins to be executed, so the second prize effect begins to be executed later than the first prize effect. This makes it possible to make the player aware of the start of the first prize effect before the second prize effect begins to be executed, even if the first prize effect and the second prize effect are executed consecutively in response to the entry of a gaming ball into a prize slot within a specified period of time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means F4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means F3,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that, depending on the game ball entering the winning slot during the specified period, the first winning presentation is executed consecutively up to a first specified number of times (10 times), and the second winning presentation is executed consecutively up to a second specified number of times (8 times) that is different from the first specified number of times.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, even if a first prize presentation is executed a first predetermined number of times in succession in response to the entry of gaming balls into a prize slot within a predetermined period of time, and a second prize presentation is executed a second predetermined number of times in succession that is different from the first predetermined number, it is possible to make the player aware of the start of the first prize presentation and then the start of the second prize presentation, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means F5 is:
In the gaming machine according to means F3,
The game control means
A determination is made as to whether or not a winning ball has been received based on whether or not the game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry port (first entry port 20, second entry port 21).
The result of the determination is a win, and then a discrimination pattern (special pattern) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped, and when a predetermined confirmation time (500 ms) has passed since the stopped display, a special game (a big win game, a small win game) that can open the prize opening can be executed,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the time from when the gaming ball enters the winning hole to when the second winning effect starts to be executed is longer than the predetermined fixed time.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the time between when a gaming ball enters a prize slot that can be opened during special play and when the second prize presentation begins is longer than the predetermined confirmation time of the identification symbol indicating a win. This makes it possible for players to recognize that the time until the second prize presentation begins is a special period of time, thereby increasing their interest in the game.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are one type of gaming machine, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached, provided that a gaming ball has entered a starting slot, as described in JP 2012-213560 A, for example. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed to indicate the result of the jackpot determination. If the special symbol display indicates that the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. In response to a win in the jackpot slot during the jackpot game, a prize-winning effect is executed to indicate that the gaming ball has entered the jackpot slot. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing prize-winning effects to indicate that a gaming ball has entered a prize slot, as described in JP 2012-213560 A, in order to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means F differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2012-213560 A in that "when a gaming ball enters the winning slot, a second winning effect different from the first winning effect can be executed, and the execution of the second winning effect can begin after the execution of the first winning effect begins." This allows the invention relating to means F to solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "enhancing gaming enjoyment."

<Means G>
The invention according to means G1 is:
winning holes into which game balls can enter (first large winning hole 30, second large winning hole 35);
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that can control the game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting special drawing lottery, etc. are obtained);
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The performance control means
When a game ball enters the winning hole, a predetermined stock image (pseudo reserved ball icon GH) can be displayed;
This gaming machine is characterized by being able to use the stock image to execute a suggestive effect (stock effect) that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when a gaming ball enters a winning slot, a specific stock image is displayed, providing visual enjoyment with suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of controlling the game to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. This allows the player to enjoy the game of getting the gaming ball to enter the winning slot, while also creating a sense of suspense as to whether or not the suggestive effects will control the game to an advantageous gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means G2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means G1,
The image state of the stock image includes a first image state (initial state) and a second image state (first specific image state) which suggests that there is a higher possibility of being controlled to the advantageous gaming state than the first image state,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that, in the suggestion effect, when a gaming ball enters the winning slot, it is possible to execute a change effect (icon change suggestion effect) that can change the stock image of the first image form currently being displayed to the stock image of the second image form.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the change effect can change the displayed predetermined stock image in the first image mode to a predetermined stock image in the second image mode, which suggests a high possibility of control to a favorable gaming state, making the game ball's entry into the winning slot even more enjoyable. This allows for visual enjoyment through the change effect that is executed when a gaming ball enters the winning slot, creating excitement as to whether or not the game will be controlled to a favorable gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means G3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means G2,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after the change effect is executed, a specific effect (final battle effect) can be executed using the image state of the stock image being displayed, which indicates whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous gaming state.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, a specific effect is executed that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous gaming state using the first image form of a predetermined stock image and the second image form of a predetermined stock image. This makes it possible to arouse interest in whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous gaming state through the specific effect, by drawing attention to whether the image form of the predetermined stock image is the first image form or the second image form after the execution of the change effect has finished, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means G4 is:
In the gaming machine described in means G2,
The performance control means
During the display of the stock image, a specific display (enemy character image TR) can be executed, which suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous game state;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a gaming ball enters the winning slot, the specific display of the first display mode (initial mode) currently in progress can be changed to the specific display of a second display mode (special display mode) which suggests that there is a higher possibility of the game being controlled into the advantageous gaming state than the first display mode.

With this gaming machine configuration, the first display mode of the specific display that is executed while a predetermined stock image is displayed changes to a second display mode that suggests a high probability of control into a favorable gaming state when a gaming ball enters a winning slot. This changes not only the image mode of the predetermined stock image but also the display mode of the specific display when a ball enters a winning slot, providing more visual enjoyment to the player and increasing their interest in the game.

The invention relating to means G5 is as follows:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4,
The game control means
It is possible to determine whether or not a game has been won based on whether a game ball has entered a predetermined ball entry port (first entry port 20, second entry port 21),
If the result of the determination is a win, a special game (jackpot game) that can open the winning hole can be executed;
After the special game ends, the advantageous game state can be controlled.
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a gaming ball enters the winning hole in the special game, the stock image can be displayed.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, it is possible to visually enjoy the suggestive effects through a predetermined stock image that is displayed when a gaming ball enters a winning opening during a special game in which the winning opening can be opened. This allows players to enjoy the thrill of getting a gaming ball to enter a winning opening during a special game, while also creating a sense of suspense as to whether or not the suggestive effects will control the game into a favorable gaming state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is one type of gaming machine, for example, as described in JP 2004-033631 A, if the display result derived from the special game is a line of the same type of symbols, a jackpot game is executed. In the gaming machine described in JP 2004-033631 A, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state (advantageous gaming state) after the jackpot game ends. However, in recent years, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines that can be controlled to a time-saving state as described in JP 2004-033631 A to increase gaming enjoyment. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means G differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2004-033631 A in that "when a gaming ball enters the winning slot, a predetermined stock image can be displayed, and using the stock image, a suggestive effect can be executed that suggests the possibility of being controlled to the advantageous gaming state." As a result, the invention relating to means G can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "enhancing interest in games."

<Means H>
The invention according to means H1 is:
A game control means (game control microcomputer 81) that determines whether or not a win has been made based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various random numbers (an example of numerical information or judgment information) for conducting a special drawing lottery, etc. are acquired);
a light-emitting portion (upper decorative portion lamp 69) that can emit light;
A performance control means (performance control microcomputer 91) capable of causing the light emitting unit to emit light,
The game control means
If the result of the determination is a win, a special game (jackpot game) can be executed;
The performance control means
During the execution of the special game, the light emitting unit can be made to emit light in a specific light emitting color (rainbow color) that indicates that the result of the judgment is a win,
It is possible to execute a success/failure suggestion effect (variable effect) that suggests the result of the judgment,
This gaming machine is characterized in that during the hit/miss indication effect, the light-emitting section can be made to emit light in the specific light color while a hit confirmation effect (hit confirmation effect) is being executed, which indicates that the result of the judgment is a hit.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the specific light-emitting color of the light-emitting section indicating a win can provide visual enjoyment during the execution of the special game and the execution of the win notification effect in the win/loss indication effect. This makes it possible to heighten the player's excitement and increase their interest in the game not only during the execution of the special game, but also when the result of the judgment is a win, by using the specific light-emitting color during the execution of the win confirmation effect and the execution of the special game.

The invention according to means H2 is as follows:
In the gaming machine described in means H1,
This gaming machine is characterized in that the light intensity (second light intensity) of the light-emitting element emitted during execution of the special game is different from the light intensity (first light intensity) of the light-emitting element emitted during execution of the winning confirmation effect.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, the light-emitting elements emit a specific color during the execution of the winning effect and the special game, but the light intensity differs, making for more visual enjoyment. This creates a difference in the player's feelings during the execution of the winning effect and the special game, depending on the light intensity of the light-emitting elements emitting a specific color, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The invention according to means H3 is:
In the gaming machine described in means H1,
The game control means
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (a jackpot game based on a time-saving win (a time-saving big win (10R time-saving big win B, 10R time-saving big win C, see FIG. 8), a time-saving small win (10R time-saving small win A, 10R time-saving small win B, see FIG. 8)) in a non-time-saving state by a lottery of a special chart), it is possible to control to an advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player,
The light emitting color of the light emitting unit includes a first light emitting color (white) and a second light emitting color (red) which is more advantageous to a player than the first light emitting color,
The performance control means
This gaming machine is characterized in that when it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, the light-emitting section can emit light in the second light color.

With a gaming machine of this configuration, when the machine is controlled to a favorable gaming state, the light-emitting section emits light in a second light color that is more favorable to the player than the first light color, providing visual enjoyment that the machine is controlled to a favorable gaming state. This draws the player's attention to the second light color when the machine is controlled to a favorable gaming state, making it possible to excite the player in the favorable gaming state and increase their interest in the game.

The invention according to means H4 is:
In the gaming machine according to means H3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific light emission color is a light emission color that suggests that it is more advantageous to the player than the second light emission color.

A gaming machine with this configuration allows the player to understand that the specific light color is a light color that suggests it is more advantageous to the player than the second light color. This makes it possible to heighten the player's interest in the game by making them excited about whether the light-emitting unit will emit a specific light color rather than whether the light-emitting unit will emit the first or second light color.

The invention according to means H5 is:
In the gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4,
The game machine has an openable and closable gaming machine frame (gaming machine frame 50),
The gaming machine frame is provided with a specific decorative portion (upper decorative portion 68) that decorates the gaming machine frame and has the light-emitting portion;
The specific decorative portion of the gaming machine is characterized in that it extends from the gaming machine frame in a predetermined direction (upper front, see Figure 108).

With this gaming machine configuration, a specific decorative element that decorates the openable gaming machine frame and has a light-emitting element extends in a specific direction from the gaming machine frame. This makes it possible to distinguish at a glance the specific light color of the light-emitting element of the specific decorative element extending in a specific direction from the gaming machine frame. Therefore, the light color of the light-emitting element lets players around the gaming machine know that a winning effect or a special game is being played, which can liven up the gaming parlor and increase interest in gaming.

In pachinko gaming machines, which are one type of gaming machine, for example, as described in JP 2000-024230 A, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred, provided that a gaming ball enters the starting slot. When a jackpot determination is performed and a jackpot symbol combination is displayed on the symbol display, a jackpot game advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, when the symbols displayed on the symbol display described in JP 2000-024230 A are likely to be a jackpot symbol combination, a frame lamp (light-emitting unit) located on the top of the pachinko gaming machine is caused to flash. However, in recent years, gaming machines capable of illuminating light-emitting units such as those described in JP 2000-024230 A still have room for improvement in order to increase the enjoyment of gaming. The invention relating to the above-mentioned means H differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2000-024230 A in that "during the execution of the special game, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit a specific light color indicating that the result of the judgment is a win, a win/loss indication effect can be executed that suggests the result of the judgment, and the light-emitting unit is made to emit the specific light color during the execution of the win/loss indication effect that indicates that the result of the judgment is a win." As a result, the invention relating to means H can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "making it possible to increase interest in the game."

1... Pachinko gaming machine 20... First start opening 21... Second start opening 30... First large winning opening 35... Second large winning opening 39... Specific area 50... Gaming machine frame 68... Upper decorative part 69... Upper decorative part lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Performance control microcomputer 100... Image control board 119... External terminal board

Claims (1)

a game control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a winning ticket has been won based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A performance control means capable of controlling a predetermined performance,
The game control means
If the result of the lottery is a win, a special game is executed;
After the special game ends, the player can transition to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player.
If the result of the lottery is a specific win by the game control means, after the special game ends, the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state and the execution of the next special game is confirmed;
The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state and a second advantageous game state that ends when a termination condition is met, including a timing at which the first advantageous game state ends being different from that of the second advantageous game state.
The performance control means
If the result of the lottery is the specific win, the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state, and a confirmation effect is executed to indicate that the execution of the next special game is confirmed ;
After the special game ends, if the game state is shifted to the first advantageous game state, the determination effect is executed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the game state is shifted to the second advantageous game state after the special game ends, a transition suggestion effect is executed to suggest the possibility of shifting to the advantageous game state .